diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'support/tcltexed/hlp')
228 files changed, 25567 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/RCS/index,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/RCS/index,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e39e9d6dbd --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/RCS/index,v @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +head 1.1; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.1; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.1 +date 2000.10.12.15.03.13; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc +@@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision +@ +text +@fontshape eng/Typefaces.txt put {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} bibliography {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt} LaTeX2e {eng/sonder.txt ger/sonder.txt} ref {eng/References.txt ger/bezug.txt} textnormal eng/Typefaces.txt mathbb {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt} noindent {eng/Paragraphs.txt ger/format.txt} line {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} dashbox {eng/Environments.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt} epsfxsize {eng/epsf.txt ger/epsf.txt} footnotemark {eng/Footnotes.txt ger/notiz.txt} mathbf eng/Typefaces.txt arabic eng/Counters.txt nocite {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt} texttt eng/Typefaces.txt pagestyle {eng/Styles.txt ger/pagestyle.txt} xleftarrow {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} enumerate {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt} stopbreaks eng/Letters.txt fboxrule ger/latexbox.txt boldsymbol {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt} addcontentsline {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt} slshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} markboth eng/Styles.txt Huge {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} oddsidemargin ger/Seitenformat.txt textup eng/Typefaces.txt textfloatsep ger/gleit.txt tabular {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt} linethickness {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} section {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} nonumber ger/math.txt paragraph {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} part {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} displaymath ger/math.txt newline eng/Breaking.txt figure {eng/Environments.txt ger/gleit.txt} Large {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} arraystretch ger/tabelle.txt framebox {eng/Environments.txt eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt} vfill eng/Spaces.txt value {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt ger/input.txt} scshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} newenvironment eng/Definitions.txt label {eng/References.txt ger/bezug.txt} flushright {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt} overbrace eng/Math.txt ! eng/Math.txt # eng/Characters.txt kill eng/Environments.txt {$} {eng/Math.txt ger/math.txt} it ger/format.txt Biggl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} % {eng/Characters.txt ger/sonder.txt} listoffigures eng/Contents.txt hrulefill {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt} ' eng/Environments.txt equal ger/if.txt ( eng/Math.txt not ger/if.txt name eng/Letters.txt ) eng/Math.txt headheight ger/Seitenformat.txt Biggr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} amsmath {eng/amsmath.txt eng/amsthm.txt ger/amsmath.txt} + eng/Environments.txt whiledo ger/if.txt settodepth eng/Lengths.txt , eng/Math.txt - {eng/Breaking.txt eng/Environments.txt} mathfrak {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt} hoffset ger/Seitenformat.txt intertext {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} epsfbox {eng/epsf.txt ger/epsf.txt} twocolumn eng/Layout.txt huge {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} multicolumn {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt} author {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt} include {eng/Input.txt ger/input.txt} totalheight eng/Lengths.txt footnotesep ger/notiz.txt Bigl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} end eng/Environments.txt dbtextfloatsep ger/gleit.txt thanks {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt} fussy {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} large {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} gather {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} {;} eng/Math.txt pagenumbering {eng/Styles.txt ger/pagenumbering.txt} Bigr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} < eng/Environments.txt arraycolsep ger/tabelle.txt = eng/Environments.txt underline eng/Math.txt equation {eng/Environments.txt ger/math.txt} > eng/Environments.txt vline {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt} itemize {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt} onecolumn eng/Layout.txt DeclareGraphicsExtensions ger/graphicx.txt unitlength ger/picture.txt ttfamily {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} newcounter {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt} oval {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} atop ger/math.txt indexspace ger/index.txt dbfloatsep ger/gleit.txt setcounter {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt} list eng/Environments.txt theoremstyle {eng/amsthm.txt ger/amsthm.txt} biggl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} columnseprule ger/Seitenformat.txt dotfill {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt} setlength {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt ger/Seitenformat.txt} closing eng/Letters.txt input {eng/Input.txt ger/input.txt} marginparwidth ger/Seitenformat.txt readme_hlp {eng/readme_hlp.txt ger/readme_hlp.txt} refstepcounter eng/Counters.txt nolinebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} par eng/Paragraphs.txt biggr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} cline {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt} prod ger/math.txt usecounter eng/Counters.txt addtolength {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt} address eng/Letters.txt ddots eng/Math.txt hfill eng/Spaces.txt pushtabs eng/Environments.txt eqnarray eng/Environments.txt frac {eng/Math.txt ger/math.txt} linebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} verse eng/Environments.txt ldots eng/Math.txt bigl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} mathit eng/Typefaces.txt raggedbottom eng/Layout.txt theindex ger/index.txt or ger/if.txt strech ger/format.txt {[} eng/Math.txt \\ eng/Breaking.txt bigr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} voffset ger/Seitenformat.txt textbf eng/Typefaces.txt reversemarginpar eng/Margin.txt \] eng/Math.txt footnoterule ger/notiz.txt fontencoding eng/Typefaces.txt ^ eng/Math.txt document {eng/Starting.txt ger/documentclass.txt} verb eng/Environments.txt _ eng/Math.txt ` eng/Environments.txt table {eng/Environments.txt ger/gleit.txt} marginparsep ger/Seitenformat.txt xrightarrow {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} a eng/Environments.txt topskip ger/Seitenformat.txt vector {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} ps eng/Letters.txt normalsize {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} right ger/math.txt footskip ger/Seitenformat.txt flushbottom eng/Layout.txt choose ger/math.txt marginpar {eng/Margin.txt ger/notiz.txt} depth eng/Lengths.txt sc ger/format.txt thispagestyle {eng/Styles.txt ger/pagestyle.txt} rm ger/format.txt tabbing {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabbing.txt} substack {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} hline {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt} marginparpush ger/Seitenformat.txt sf ger/format.txt usepackage {eng/Document.txt ger/usepackage.txt} emph eng/Typefaces.txt enlargethispage eng/Breaking.txt coprod ger/math.txt ExecuteOptions {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} sl ger/format.txt swapnumbers {eng/amsthm.txt ger/amsthm.txt} sideset {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} Vmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} footnotetext {eng/Footnotes.txt ger/notiz.txt} usefont eng/Typefaces.txt hspace {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt} LaTeX {eng/sonder.txt ger/sonder.txt} epsf {eng/epsf.txt ger/epsf.txt} gpl_hlp {eng/gpl_hlp.txt ger/gpl_hlp.txt} chapter {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} mathversion eng/Typefaces.txt savebox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt} scalebox {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} topfraction ger/gleit.txt fnsymbol eng/Counters.txt theorem eng/Environments.txt telephone eng/Letters.txt matrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} textheight ger/Seitenformat.txt graphicspath {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} tt ger/format.txt subparagraph {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} discription {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt} floatpagefraction ger/gleit.txt indent ger/format.txt circle {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} left ger/math.txt int ger/math.txt addtocounter eng/Counters.txt caption ger/gleit.txt usebox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt} raggedright eng/Environments.txt today {eng/sonder.txt ger/sonder.txt} math ger/math.txt doublerulesep ger/tabelle.txt sinature eng/Letters.txt amssymb {eng/amssymb.txt ger/amssymb.txt} split {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} listoftables {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt} printindex ger/index.txt upshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} editort_hlp eng/editort_hlp.txt {\[} ger/math.txt array {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt} rotatebox {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} tcltexed_hlp {eng/tcltexed_hlp.txt ger/tcltexed_hlp.txt} settoheight eng/Lengths.txt stackrel ger/math.txt {\]} ger/math.txt DeclareGraphicsRule {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} quad ger/format.txt LARGE {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} sffamily {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} hypentation {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} vmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} copyright_hlp {eng/copyright_hlp.txt ger/copyright_hlp.txt} cite {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt} arrayrulewidth ger/tabelle.txt fboxsep ger/latexbox.txt dbfloatpagefraction ger/gleit.txt vdots eng/Math.txt subequation {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} small {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} mathrm eng/Typefaces.txt newcommand {eng/Definitions.txt ger/counter.txt} oint ger/math.txt boxed {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} subsubitem ger/index.txt mathsf eng/Typefaces.txt bfseries {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} listofffigures ger/index.txt clearpage {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} tabcolsep ger/tabelle.txt medskip eng/Spaces.txt thebibliography {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt} ifthenelse ger/if.txt centering {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt} amscd {eng/amscd.txt ger/amscd.txt} topmargin ger/Seitenformat.txt fontsize eng/Typefaces.txt textit eng/Typefaces.txt editor_hlp {eng/editor_hlp.txt ger/editor_hlp.txt} minipage {eng/Environments.txt ger/latexbox.txt} qquad ger/format.txt cdots eng/Math.txt columnsep ger/Seitenformat.txt item {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt} opening eng/Letters.txt fontfamily eng/Typefaces.txt typein {eng/Terminal.txt ger/input.txt} sqrt {eng/Math.txt ger/math.txt} frame eng/Environments.txt intextsep ger/gleit.txt textwidth ger/Seitenformat.txt documentclass {eng/Document.txt ger/documentclass.txt} newpage {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} settowidth {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt} pmod ger/math.txt smallskip eng/Spaces.txt rmfamily {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} headsep ger/Seitenformat.txt mathtt eng/Typefaces.txt vspace {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt} addtocontents {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt} underbrace eng/Math.txt tableofcontents {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt} alph eng/Counters.txt textmd eng/Typefaces.txt symbol eng/Characters.txt titlepage {eng/Environments.txt ger/titlepage.txt} fontseries eng/Typefaces.txt newsavebox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt} makeidx ger/index.txt addvspace eng/Spaces.txt picture {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} bibliographystyle eng/Environments.txt mbox eng/Spaces.txt newtheorem {eng/amsthm.txt eng/Definitions.txt ger/amsthm.txt} footnote {eng/Footnotes.txt ger/notiz.txt} selectfont eng/Typefaces.txt cleardoublepage {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} bmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} sloppy {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} maketitle {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt} appendix {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} location eng/Letters.txt verbatim {eng/Environments.txt ger/verbatim.txt} samepage ger/format.txt stepcounter {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt ger/input.txt} shortstack {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} footheight ger/Seitenformat.txt subitem ger/index.txt bigskip eng/Spaces.txt center {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt} typeout {eng/Terminal.txt ger/input.txt} bottomfraction ger/gleit.txt mathnormal eng/Typefaces.txt align {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} newlength {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt} raisebox eng/Spaces.txt renewenvironment eng/Definitions.txt quote {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt} startbreaks eng/Letters.txt grafics ger/graphics.txt fbox eng/Spaces.txt bf ger/format.txt documentstyle ger/documentclass.txt rule {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt} letter eng/Environments.txt bezier ger/picture.txt amsthm ger/amsthm.txt title {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt} graficx ger/graphicx.txt sbox eng/Spaces.txt makeindex ger/index.txt floatsep ger/gleit.txt includeonly {eng/Input.txt ger/input.txt} cc eng/Letters.txt cases {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} markright eng/Styles.txt height eng/Lengths.txt DeclareGraphicsExtentions ger/graphics.txt pageref {eng/References.txt ger/bezug.txt} tiny {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} bibitem {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt} dicretionary ger/format.txt raggedleft eng/Environments.txt thicklines:thinlines ger/picture.txt fill ger/format.txt subsection {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} normalfont eng/Typefaces.txt evensidemargin ger/Seitenformat.txt footnotesize {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} subsubsection {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt} mathcal eng/Typefaces.txt textfraction ger/gleit.txt editot_hlp ger/editort_hlp.txt multiput {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt} sum ger/math.txt itshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} date {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt} lrbox eng/Spaces.txt nopagebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} makebox {eng/Environments.txt eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt} scriptsize {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} makelabels eng/Letters.txt multline {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} and {ger/if.txt ger/titlepage.txt} textsc eng/Typefaces.txt amsfonts {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt} mdseries {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt} textrm eng/Typefaces.txt parbox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt} overline eng/Math.txt quotation {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt} text {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt ger/math.txt} pmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} begin {eng/Environments.txt ger/begin.txt} flushleft {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt} textsf eng/Typefaces.txt DeclareMathOperator {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt} nolimits ger/math.txt dbtopfraction ger/gleit.txt renewcommand eng/Definitions.txt width eng/Lengths.txt newfont eng/Definitions.txt em ger/format.txt pagebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt} resizebox {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} textsl eng/Typefaces.txt includegraphics {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt}
+@ diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Breaking.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Breaking.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39b180e3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Breaking.txt @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +############################################################
+Line & Page Breaking
+############################################################
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is
+to translate your input file into a string of glyphs and
+spaces. To produce a printed document, this string must be
+broken into lines, and these lines must be broken into pages.
+In some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with
+the \\ command, but LaTeX usually does it for you.
+
+ \\: Start a new line.
+ \- (hyphenation): Insert explicit hyphenation.
+ \cleardoublepage: Start a new right-hand page.
+ \clearpage: Start a new page.
+ \enlargethispage: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+ \fussy: Be fussy about line breaking.
+ \hyphenation: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+ \linebreak: Break the line.
+ \newline: Break the line prematurely.
+ \newpage: Start a new page.
+ \nolinebreak: Don't break the current line.
+ \nopagebreak: Don't make a page break here.
+ \pagebreak: Please make a page break here.
+ \sloppy: Be sloppy about line breaking.
+
+############################################################
+ \\ ::\::
+############################################################
+\\[*][extra-space]
+The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
+optional argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra
+vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This
+can be a negative amount.
+The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except
+that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at
+that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will
+usually find all correct hyphenation points. The \- command
+is used for the exceptional cases.
+
+Note that when you insert \- commands in a word, the word
+will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the
+hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+############################################################
+ \cleardoublepage ::cleardoublepage::
+############################################################
+The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes
+all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input
+to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes
+the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a
+blank page if necessary.
+############################################################
+ \clearpage ::clearpage::
+############################################################
+The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all
+figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to
+be printed.
+############################################################
+ \enlargethispage ::enlargethispage::
+############################################################
+\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified
+amount; e.g.
+\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line.
+The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on
+the page as much as possible. This is normally used together
+with an explicit \pagebreak.
+############################################################
+ \fussy ::fussy::
+############################################################
+\fussy
+This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between
+words, but may produce overfull boxes.
+This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command.
+section \sloppy
+############################################################
+ \hyphenation ::hypentation::
+############################################################
+\hyphenation{words}
+The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points,
+where words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
+each hyphenation point is indicated by a - character.
+############################################################
+ \linebreak ::linebreak::
+############################################################
+\linebreak[number]
+The \linebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current line
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \linebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+The \linebreak command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
+extends to the right margin.
+############################################################
+ \newline ::newline::
+############################################################
+The \newline command breaks the line right where it is. It
+can only be used in paragraph mode.
+############################################################
+ \newpage ::newpage::
+############################################################
+The \newpage command ends the current page.
+############################################################
+ \nolinebreak ::nolinebreak::
+############################################################
+\nolinebreak[number]
+The \nolinebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current line at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nolinebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \nopagebreak ::nopagebreak::
+############################################################
+\nopagebreak[number]
+The \nopagebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current page at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nopagebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \pagebreak ::pagebreak::
+############################################################
+\pagebreak[number]
+The \pagebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current page
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+############################################################
+ \sloppy ::sloppy::
+############################################################
+\sloppy
+This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
+This can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space
+between words. Lasts until a \fussy command is issued.
+section \fussy.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Characters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Characters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6117d613e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Characters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +############################################################
+Special Characters ::#::%::symbol::
+############################################################
+
+The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+called "special printing characters", or simply
+"special characters".
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+Whenever you put one of these special characters into your
+file, you are doing something special. If you simply want
+the character to be printed just as any other letter, include
+a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce
+$ in your output.
+
+One exception to this rule is the \ itself because \\ has its
+own special meaning. A \ is produced by typing $\backslash$
+in your file.
+Also, \~ means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
+so you will probably want to use \verb instead.
+
+In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+know its number by using the \symbol command. For example,
+the character used for displaying spaces in the \verb*
+command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+\symbol{32}.
+
+You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal
+numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written
+ as \symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Contents.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Contents.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49d35032a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Contents.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +############################################################
+Table of Contents
+############################################################
+::tableofcontents::listoffigures::listoftables::
+A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
+command. You put the command right where you want the table
+of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces
+a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page.
+If you want a new page after the table of contents, include
+a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command.
+
+There are similar commands \listoffigures and \listoftables
+for producing a list of figures and a list of tables,
+respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the
+table of contents.
+
+NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you
+cannot have the \nofiles command in your document.
+
+ \addcontentsline: Add an entry to table of
+ contents etc.
+ \addtocontents: Add text directly to table of
+ contents file etc.
+
+############################################################
+ \addcontentsline ::addcontentsline::
+############################################################
+\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}
+The \addcontentsline command adds an entry to the specified
+list or table where:
+
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ sec_unit controls the formatting of the entry. It
+ should be one of the following, depending upon
+ the value of the file argument:
+ toc -- the name of the sectional unit, such
+ as part or subsection.
+ lof -- figure
+ lot -- table
+ entry is the text of the entry.
+############################################################
+ \addtocontents ::addtocontents::
+############################################################
+\addtocontents{file}{text}
+The \addtocontents command adds text (or formatting commands)
+directly to the file that generates the table of contents or
+list of figures or tables.
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ text is the information to be written.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Counters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Counters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ef4316a446 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Counters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +############################################################
+Counters
+############################################################
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated
+with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name
+of the environment or command that produces the number,
+except with no \. (enumi - enumiv are used for the nested
+enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters
+used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control
+numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+ \addtocounter: Add a quantity to a counter.
+ \alph: Print value of a counter using letters.
+ \arabic: Print value of a counter using numerals.
+ \fnsymbol: Print value of a counter using symbols.
+ \newcounter: Define a new counter.
+ \refstepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \roman: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
+ \setcounter: Set the value of a counter.
+ \stepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \usecounter: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+ \value: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+
+############################################################
+ \addtocounter ::addtocounter::
+############################################################
+\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+The \addtocounter command increments the counter by the
+amount specified by the value argument. The value argument
+can be negative.
+############################################################
+ \alph ::alph::
+############################################################
+\alph{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in alphabetic characters. The \alph command uses lower case
+alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., a, b, c... while the
+\Alph command uses upper case alphabetic characters,
+i.e., A, B, C....
+############################################################
+ \arabic ::arabic::
+############################################################
+\arabic{counter}
+The \arabic command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
+############################################################
+ \fnsymbol ::fnsymbol::
+############################################################
+\fnsymbol{counter}
+The \fnsymbol command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be
+used for numbering footnotes. eg. From 1-9:
+NB. counter must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
+############################################################
+ \newcounter ::newcounter::
+############################################################
+\newcounter{foo}[counter]
+The \newcounter command defines a new counter named foo. The
+counter is initialized to zero.
+The optional argument [counter] causes the counter foo to be
+reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
+incremented.
+############################################################
+ \refstepcounter ::refstepcounter::
+############################################################
+\refstepcounter{counter}
+The \refstepcounter command works like \stepcounter See
+section \stepcounter, except it also defines the current
+\ref value to be the result of \thecounter.
+############################################################
+ \roman ::roman
+############################################################
+\roman{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in Roman numerals. The \roman command uses lower case Roman
+numerals, i.e., i, ii, iii..., while the \Roman command uses
+upper case Roman numerals, i.e., I, II, III....
+############################################################
+ \stepcounter ::stepcounter::
+############################################################
+\stepcounter{counter}
+The \stepcounter command adds one to the counter and resets
+all subsidiary counters.
+############################################################
+ \setcounter ::setcounter::
+############################################################
+\setcounter{counter}{value}
+The \setcounter command sets the value of the counter to that
+specified by the value argument.
+############################################################
+ \usecounter ::usecounter::
+############################################################
+\usecounter{counter}
+The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the
+list environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
+number the list items.
+############################################################
+ \value ::value::
+############################################################
+\value{counter}
+The \value command produces the value of the counter named
+in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects
+an integer or number, such as the second argument of a
+\setcounter or \addtocounter command, or in:
+ \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Definitions.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Definitions.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e2d50c3281 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Definitions.txt @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +############################################################
+Definitions
+############################################################
+
+\newcommand: Define a new command.
+\newenvironment: Define a new environment.
+\newtheorem: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+\newfont: Define a new font name.
+
+############################################################
+ \newcommand ::newcommand::renewcommand::
+############################################################
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+These commands define (or redefine) a command.
+ cmd A command name beginning with a \. For
+ \newcommand it must not be already defined and
+ must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand it
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the command being defined. The
+ default is for the command to have no arguments.
+ def If this optional parameter is present, it means
+ that the command's first argument is optional.
+ The default value of the optional argument is def.
+ definition The text to be substituted for every
+ occurrence of cmd; a parameter of the form #n in
+ cmd is replaced by the text of the nth argument
+ when this substitution takes place.
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment ::newenvironment::renewenvironment::
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+These commands define or redefine an environment.
+ nam The name of the environment. For \newenvironment
+ there must be no currently defined environment
+ by that name, and the command \nam must be
+ undefined. For \renewenvironment the environment
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the newly-defined environment.
+ The default is no arguments.
+ default If this is specified, the first argument
+ is optional, and default gives the default value
+ for that argument.
+ begdef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \begin{nam}; a parameter of the form #n in cmd
+ is replaced by the text of the nth argument when
+ this substitution takes place.
+ enddef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \end{nam}. It may not contain any argument
+ parameters.
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem ::newtheorem::
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+ \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+This command defines a theorem-like environment.
+ env_name The name of the environment to be defined.
+ A string of letters. It must not be the
+ name of an existing environment or counter.
+ caption The text printed at the beginning of the
+ environment, right before the number.
+ This may simply say "Theorem", for example.
+ within The name of an already defined counter,
+ usually of a sectional unit. Provides a
+ means of resetting the new theorem counter
+ within the sectional unit.
+ numbered_like The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment.
+The \newtheorem command may have at most one optional argument.
+############################################################
+ \newfont ::newfont::
+############################################################
+\newfont{cmd}{font_name}
+Defines the command name cmd, which must not be currently
+defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
+font_name to be the current font.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Document.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Document.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3e68a83dc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Document.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +############################################################
+Document Classes
+############################################################
+
+Valid LaTeX document classes include:
+ article
+ report
+ letter
+ book
+ slides
+Other document classes are often available. See section
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide, for details. They are
+selected with the following command:
+
+ \documentclass [options] {class} ::documentclass::
+
+All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+options for
+selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
+ 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+(default is letter):
+ a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper,
+ legalpaper, executivepaper
+Miscellaneous options:
+ landscape -- selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
+ titlepage, notitlepage -- selects if there should be a
+ separate title page.
+ leqno -- equation number on left side of equations. Default
+ is right side.
+ fleqn -- displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
+ openbib -- use "open" bibliography format.
+ draft, final -- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
+ Default is final.
+These options are not available with the slides class:
+ oneside, twoside -- selects one- or twosided layout.
+ Default is oneside, except for the book class.
+ openright, openany -- determines if a chapter should
+ start on a right-hand page. Default is
+ openright for book.
+ onecolumn, twocolumn -- one or two columns. Defaults
+ to one column.
+The slides class offers the option clock for printing the
+time at the bottom of each note.
+
+If you specify more than one option, they must be separated
+by a comma. Additional packages are loaded by a
+
+ \usepackage[options]{pkg} ::usepackage::
+
+command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+separated by a comma.
+
+Any options given in the \documentclass command that are
+unknown by the selected document class are passed on to
+the packages loaded with \usepackage.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Environments.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Environments.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8284905a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Environments.txt @@ -0,0 +1,943 @@ +############################################################
+Environments ::begin::end::
+############################################################
+
+LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+manner.
+
+ \begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{environment-name}
+
+ array: Math arrays.
+ center: Centred lines.
+ description: Labelled lists.
+ enumerate: Numbered lists.
+ eqnarray: Sequences of aligned equations.
+ equation: Displayed equation.
+ figure: Floating figures.
+ flushleft: Flushed left lines.
+ flushright: Flushed right lines.
+ itemize: Bulleted lists.
+ letter: Letters.
+ list: Generic list environment.
+ minipage: Miniature page.
+ picture: Picture with text, arrows, lines and
+ circles.
+ quotation: Indented environment with paragraph
+ indentation.
+ quote: Indented environment with no paragraph
+ indentation.
+ tabbing: Align text arbitrarily.
+ table: Floating tables.
+ tabular: Align text in columns.
+ thebibliography: Bibliography or reference list.
+ theorem: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+ titlepage: For hand crafted title pages.
+ verbatim: Simulating typed input.
+ verse: For poetry and other things.
+
+############################################################
+ array ::array::
+############################################################
+
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+
+Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has
+a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns
+and the alignment within them. Each column, coln, is specified
+by a single letter that tells how items in that row should
+be formatted.
+
+ c -- for centred
+ l -- for flush left
+ r -- for flush right
+
+Column entries must be separated by an &. Column entries may
+include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+Note that the array environment can only be used in math mode,
+so normally it is used inside an equation environment.
+############################################################
+ center ::center::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{center}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{center}
+
+The center environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are centred within the left and
+right margins on the current page. Each line must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+\centering: The declaration form of the center environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \centering ::centering::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the center environment. This
+declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote
+or in a parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centred
+on the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning
+of the figure or table environment.
+
+Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does
+not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ description ::discription::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [label] First item
+ \item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{description}
+
+The description environment is used to make labelled lists.
+The label is bold face and flushed right.
+############################################################
+ enumerate ::enumerate::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+The enumerate environment produces a numbered list.
+Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments.
+
+Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command.
+There must be at least one \item command within the environment.
+The enumerate environment uses the enumi through enumiv
+counters (see section Counters). The type of numbering can be
+changed by redefining \theenumi etc.
+############################################################
+ eqnarray ::eqnarray::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ math formula 1 \\
+ math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of
+equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
+array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and
+consecutive items within a row separated by an &.
+
+An equation number is placed on every line unless that line
+has a \nonumber command.
+
+The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas
+across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush
+left in a box of zero width.
+############################################################
+ equation ::equation::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ math formula
+ \end{equation}
+
+The equation environment centres your equation on the page
+and places the equation number in the right margin.
+############################################################
+ figure ::figure::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+ \caption{figure title}
+ \end{figure}
+
+Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Figures will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h (Here) - at the position in the text where the
+ figure environment appears.
+ t (Top) - at the top of a text page.
+ b (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement tbp.
+
+The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc. you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your figure.
+############################################################
+ flushleft ::flushleft::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated
+with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedright: The declaration form of the flushleft
+ environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedright ::raggedright::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ flushright ::flushright::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushright}
+
+The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedleft: The declaration form of the flushright environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedleft ::raggedleft::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushright environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ itemize ::itemize::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{itemize}
+
+The itemize environment produces a "bulleted" list.
+Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments. Each item of an itemized list
+begins with an \item command. There must be at least one
+\item command within the environment. The itemize environment
+uses the itemi through itemiv counters (see section Counters).
+The type of numbering can be changed by redefining \theitemi
+etc.
+############################################################
+ letter ::letter::
+############################################################
+This environment is used for creating letters. See section
+Letters.
+############################################################
+ list ::list::item::
+############################################################
+The list environment is a generic environment which is used
+for defining many of the more specific environments. It is
+seldom used in documents, but often in macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{list}
+
+The {label} argument specifies how items should be labelled.
+This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box
+to form the label. This argument can and usually does contain
+other LaTeX commands.
+
+The {spacing} argument contains commands to change the spacing
+parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
+null, i.e., {}. This will select all default spacing which
+should suffice for most cases.
+############################################################
+ minipage ::minipage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
+ text
+ \end{minipage}
+
+The minipage environment is similar to a \parbox command. It
+takes the same optional position argument and mandatory width
+argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
+inside a minipage. Footnotes in a minipage environment are
+handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting
+footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext
+command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage
+instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter
+
+See section Counters.
+
+NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+minipage.
+############################################################
+ picture ::picture::
+############################################################
+ \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+ \end{picture}
+The picture environment allows you to create just about any
+kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and
+circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture
+by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number
+that may have a decimal point and a minus sign -- a number
+like 5, 2.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength
+has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
+length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of
+\unitlength anywhere you want, using the \setlength command,
+but strange things will happen if you try changing it inside
+the picture environment.
+
+A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5),
+specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5.
+Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to
+an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the
+picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it
+is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit
+the argument.
+
+The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is
+a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The
+environment produces a rectangular box with width and height
+determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+
+The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
+following the size argument, that can change the origin.
+(Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has
+been set to 1mm, the command
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and
+whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When
+you first draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument,
+leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to
+modify your picture by shifting everything, you just add the
+appropriate optional argument. The environment's mandatory
+argument determines the nominal size of the picture.
+
+This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
+LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture,
+or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX
+in determining how much room to leave for it.
+
+Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command.
+The command
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference
+point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
+objects will be described below. The \put command creates an LR box.
+You can put anything in the text argument of the \put command that
+you'd put into the argument of an \mbox and related commands. When
+you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of
+the box.
+
+Picture commands:
+
+ \circle: Draw a circle.
+ \dashbox: Draw a dashed box.
+ \frame: Draw a frame around an object.
+ \framebox (picture): Draw a box with a frame around it.
+ \line: Draw a straight line.
+ \linethickness: Set the line thickness.
+ \makebox (picture): Draw a box of the specified size.
+ \multiput: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+ \oval: Draw an ellipse.
+ \put: Place an object at a specified place.
+ \shortstack: Make a pile of objects.
+ \vector: Draw a line with an arrow.
+
+############################################################
+ \circle ::circle::
+############################################################
+\circle[*]{diameter}
+The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as
+close to the specified one as possible. If the *-form of the
+command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
+Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
+############################################################
+ \dashbox ::dashbox::
+############################################################
+Draws a box with a dashed line.
+\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}
+The \dashbox has an extra argument which specifies the width
+of each dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and
+height are multiples of the dash_length.
+############################################################
+ \frame ::frame::
+############################################################
+\frame{...}
+The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around the object
+specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom
+left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the
+frame and the object.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents
+of the box.
+############################################################
+ \line ::line::
+############################################################
+\line(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \line command draws a line of the specified length and
+slope.
+Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where
+x and y have integer values from -6 through 6.
+############################################################
+ \linethickness ::linethickness::
+############################################################
+\linethickness{dimension}
+Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture environment to be dimension, which must be a positive
+length. It does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and
+circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval to form the
+corners of an oval.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar
+to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify
+a width and height in multiples of \unitlength.
+The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant
+that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the
+following:
+ t - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+ b - Moves the item to the bottom
+ l - Moves the item to the left
+ r - Moves the item to the right
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \multiput ::multiput::
+############################################################
+\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}
+The \multiput command can be used when you are putting the
+same object in a regular pattern across a picture.
+############################################################
+ \oval ::oval::
+############################################################
+\oval(width,height)[portion]
+The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.
+The optional argument, [portion], allows you to select part
+of the oval.
+ t - Selects the top portion
+ b - Selects the bottom portion
+ r - Selects the right portion
+ l - Selects the left portion
+Note that the "corners" of the oval are made with quarter
+circles with a maximum
+
+radius of 20 pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes
+with rounded corners.
+############################################################
+ \put ::put::
+############################################################
+\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
+The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory
+argument at the given coordinates.
+############################################################
+ \shortstack ::shortstack::
+############################################################
+\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}
+The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The
+valid positions are:
+ r - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
+ l - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
+ c - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack
+ (default)
+############################################################
+ \vector ::vector::
+############################################################
+\vector(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the
+specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie
+between -4 and +4, inclusive.
+
+############################################################
+ quotation ::quotation::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quotation}
+ text
+ \end{quotation}
+The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the
+left and the right.
+
+The text is justified at both margins and there is paragraph
+indentation.
+
+Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ quote ::quote::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quote}
+ text
+ \end{quote}
+The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left
+and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving
+a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ tabbing ::tabbing::
+############################################################
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+ second row \> \> more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabbing}
+The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in
+columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them
+much the way you do with an ordinary typewriter.
+
+It is best suited for cases where the width of each column
+is constant and known in advance.
+
+This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular
+environment.
+
+The following commands can be used inside a tabbing
+enviroment:
+
+############################################################
+ \= ::=::
+############################################################
+Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+############################################################
+ \> ::>::
+############################################################
+Advances to the next tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \< ::<::
+############################################################
+This command allows you to put something to the left of the
+local margin without changing the margin. Can only be used
+at the start of the line.
+############################################################
+ \+ ::+::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the right.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the left.
+############################################################
+ \' ::'::
+############################################################
+Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current
+column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\,
+or \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+against the current column's tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \` ::`::
+############################################################
+Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop,
+including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
+of the last column because here's no tab stop there. The \`
+command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or
+\end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command
+between the \` and the command that ends the line.
+############################################################
+ \kill ::kill::
+############################################################
+Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
+except that it throws away the current line instead of
+producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \-
+commands in that line remain in effect.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs ::pushtabs::
+############################################################
+Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing
+environment.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs
+############################################################
+Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs.
+############################################################
+ \a ::a::
+############################################################
+In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not
+produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands \a=, \a'
+and \a` are used.
+
+This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+format:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+############################################################
+ table ::table::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+ \caption{table title}
+ \end{table}
+
+Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Tables will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h : Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+ t : Top - at the top of a text page.
+ b : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement [tbp].
+
+The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your table.
+############################################################
+ tabular ::tabular::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory
+and optional arguments consist of:
+ width Specifies the width of the tabular* environment.
+ There must be rubber space between columns that
+ can stretch to fill out the specified width.
+ pos Specifies the vertical position; default is
+ alignment on the centre of the environment.
+ t - align on top row
+ b - align on bottom row
+ cols Specifies the column formatting. It consists of
+ a sequence of the following specifiers,
+ corresponding to the sequence of columns and
+ intercolumn material.
+ l - A column of left-aligned items.
+ r - A column of right-aligned items.
+ c - A column of centred items.
+ | - A vertical line the full height and depth of
+ the environment.
+ @{text} - This inserts text in every row. An
+ @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space
+ normally inserted between columns; any desired
+ space between the inserted text and the adjacent
+ items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd}
+ command in an @-expression causes an extra space
+ of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent
+ columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
+ command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this
+ extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression.
+ An \extracolsep command can be used only in an
+ @-expression in the cols argument.
+ p{wd} - Produces a column with each item typeset in
+ a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument
+ of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not
+ appear in the item, except in the following
+ situations:
+ 1. inside an environment like minipage,
+ array, or tabular.
+ 2. inside an explicit \parbox.
+ 3. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright,
+ or \raggedleft
+ declaration. The latter declarations must appear
+ inside braces or an environment when used in a
+ p-column element.
+ *{num}{cols} - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where
+ num is any positive integer and cols is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another
+ *-expression.
+
+These commands can be used inside a tabular environment:
+
+ \cline: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+ \hline: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+ \multicolumn: Make an item spanning several columns.
+ \vline: Draw a vertical line.
+
+############################################################
+ \cline ::cline::
+############################################################
+\cline{i-j}
+The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j,
+which are identified in the mandatory argument.
+############################################################
+ \hline ::hline::
+############################################################
+The \hline command will draw a horizontal line the width of
+the table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top,
+bottom, and between the rows of the table.
+############################################################
+ \multicolumn ::multicolumn::
+############################################################
+\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+The \multicolumn is used to make an entry that spans several
+columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the
+number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos,
+specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centred, l for
+flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
+text, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
+############################################################
+ \vline ::vline::
+############################################################
+The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the
+full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be
+used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also
+be used in an @-expression.
+############################################################
+ thebibliography ::thebibliography::
+############################################################
+ \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+ \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{thebibliography}
+The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or
+reference list. In the article class, this reference list is
+labelled "References"; in the report class, it is labelled
+"Bibliography".
+
+ widest-label: Text that, when printed, is
+ approximately as wide as the widest item
+ label produces by the \bibitem commands.
+ \bibitem: Specify a bibliography item.
+ \cite: Refer to a bibliography item.
+ \nocite: Include an item in the bibliography.
+ Using BibTeX: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+############################################################
+ \bibitem ::bibitem::
+############################################################
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label.
+If the label argument is missing, a number is generated as
+the label, using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any
+sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not
+containing a comma. This command writes an entry on the `.aux'
+file containing cite_key and the item's label. When this
+`.aux' file is read by the \begin{document} command, the
+item's label is associated with cite_key, causing the
+reference to cite_key by a \cite command to produce the
+associated label.
+############################################################
+ \cite ::cite::
+############################################################
+\cite[text]{key_list}
+The key_list argument is a list of citation keys. This command
+generates an in-text citation to the references associated
+with the keys in key_list by entries on the `.aux' file read
+by the \begin{document} command. The optional text argument
+will appear after the citation, i.e. \cite[p. 2]{knuth} might
+produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
+############################################################
+ \nocite ::nocite::
+############################################################
+\nocite{key_list}
+The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list,
+which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux'
+file.
+############################################################
+ Using BibTeX
+############################################################
+If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple
+of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+thebibliography environment. Instead, you include the lines
+
+ \bibliographystyle{style} ::bibliographystyle::
+ \bibliography{bibfile} ::bibliography::
+
+where style refers to a file style.bst, which defines how
+your citations will look. The standard styles distributed
+with BibTeX are:
+
+ alpha Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed
+ from name of author and year of publication.
+ plain Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+ unsrt Like plain, but entries are in order of
+ citation.
+ abbrv Like plain, but more compact labels.
+
+In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored
+to the demands of various publications.
+The argument to \bibliography refers to the file bibfile.bib,
+which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the
+entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in
+the bibliography.
+############################################################
+ theorem ::theorem::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+ \end{theorem}
+
+The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface
+followed by your theorem text.
+############################################################
+ titlepage ::titlepage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ text
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page
+with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the
+following page to be numbered page one.
+
+Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command
+comes in handy for title pages.
+
+Note that you can use the \maketitle (see section \maketitle)
+command to produce a standard title page.
+############################################################
+ verbatim ::verbatim::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ text
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment
+that gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns
+LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks
+having the same effect that they would on a typewriter.
+
+ \verb: The macro form of the verbatim environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \verb ::verb::
+############################################################
+\verb char literal_text char
+\verb*char literal_text char
+Typesets literal_text exactly as typed, including special
+characters and spaces, using a typewriter (\tt) type style.
+There may be no space between \verb or \verb* and char
+(space is shown here only for clarity). The *-form differs
+only in that spaces are printed as `\verb*| |'.
+############################################################
+ verse ::verse::
+############################################################
+ \begin{verse}
+ text
+ \end{verse}
+The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may
+find other uses for it.
+The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate
+the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank
+lines to separate the stanzas.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Footnotes.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Footnotes.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e4655dd0cd --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Footnotes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +############################################################
+Footnotes
+############################################################
+
+Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can
+also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the
+\footnotetext commands. See the specific command for
+information on why you would use one over the other.
+
+ \footnote: Insert a footnote.
+ \footnotemark: Insert footnote mark only.
+ \footnotetext: Insert footnote text only.
+
+############################################################
+ \footnote ::footnote::
+############################################################
+\footnote[number]{text}
+The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at
+the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, number,
+is used to change the default footnote number. This command
+can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot
+use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures,
+tables or in a tabular environment.
+############################################################
+ \footnotemark ::footnotemark::
+############################################################
+The \footnotemark command puts the footnote number in the
+text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The
+text of the footnote is supplied by the \footnotetext command.
+This command can be used to produce several consecutive
+footnote markers referring to the same footnote by using
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+after the first \footnote command.
+############################################################
+ \footnotetext ::footnotetext::
+############################################################
+\footnotetext[number]{text}
+The \footnotetext command produces the text to be placed at
+the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after
+the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must
+appear in outer paragraph mode.
+
+The optional argument, number, is used to change the default
+footnote number.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Input.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Input.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e8da3c1cf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Input.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +############################################################
+Splitting the Input
+############################################################
+
+A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than
+putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more
+efficient to split it into several smaller ones.
+Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one
+that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when
+you run LaTeX.
+
+ \include: Conditionally include a file.
+ \includeonly: Determine which files are included.
+ \input: Unconditionally include a file.
+
+############################################################
+ \include ::include::
+############################################################
+\include{file}
+The \include command is used in conjunction with the
+\includeonly command for selective inclusion of files. The
+file argument is the first name of a file, denoting `file.tex'.
+If file is one the file names in the file list of the
+\includeonly command or if there is no \includeonly command,
+the \include command is equivalent to
+
+ \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+
+except that if the file `file.tex' does not exist, then a
+warning message rather than an error is produced. If the file
+is not in the file list, the \include command is equivalent
+to \clearpage.
+
+The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a
+file read by another \include command.
+############################################################
+ \includeonly ::includeonly::
+############################################################
+\includeonly{file_list}
+The \includeonly command controls which files will be read
+in by an \include command. file_list should be a
+comma-separated list of filenames. Each filename must match
+exactly a filename specified in a \include command. This
+command can only appear in the preamble.
+############################################################
+ \input ::input::
+############################################################
+\input{file}
+The \input command causes the indicated file to be read and
+processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in
+the current file at that point. The file name may be a
+complete file name with extension or just a first name, in
+which case the file `file.tex' is used.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Layout.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Layout.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61559daa09 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Layout.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +############################################################
+Layout
+############################################################
+
+Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout
+of the page.
+
+ \flushbottom: Make all text pages the same height.
+ \onecolumn: Use one-column layout.
+ \raggedbottom: Allow text pages of differing height.
+ \twocolumn: Use two-column layout.
+
+############################################################
+ \flushbottom ::flushbottom::
+############################################################
+The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same
+height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill
+out the page. This is the standard if twocolumn mode is
+selected.
+############################################################
+ \onecolumn ::onecolumn::
+############################################################
+The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+single-column output.
+############################################################
+ \raggedbottom ::raggedbottom::
+############################################################
+The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the height of
+the text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
+############################################################
+ \twocolumn ::twocolumn::
+############################################################
+\twocolumn[text]
+The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+two-column output. If the optional text argument is present,
+it is typeset in one-column mode.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Lengths.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Lengths.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..50c6f0d12d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Lengths.txt @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +
+############################################################
+Lengths
+############################################################
+
+A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take
+a length as an argument.
+
+ \newlength: Define a new length.
+ \setlength: Set the value of a length.
+ \addtolength: Add a quantity to a length.
+ \settodepth: Set a length to the depth of something.
+ \settoheight: Set a length to the height of something.
+ \settowidth: Set a length to the width of something.
+ Predefined lengths: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+
+############################################################
+ \newlength ::newlength::
+############################################################
+\newlength{\gnat}
+The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument, \gnat,
+as a length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a
+\gnat command already exists.
+############################################################
+ \setlength ::setlength::
+############################################################
+\setlength{\gnat}{length}
+The \setlength command is used to set the value of a length
+command. The length argument can be expressed in any terms
+of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (in),
+millimetres (mm), points (pt), etc.
+############################################################
+ \addtolength ::addtolength::
+############################################################
+\addtolength{\gnat}{length}
+The \addtolength command increments a "length command" by the
+amount specified in the length argument. It can be a negative
+amount.
+############################################################
+ \settodepth ::settodepth::
+############################################################
+\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the depth of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settoheight ::settoheight::
+############################################################
+\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
+The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the height of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settowidth ::settowidth::
+############################################################
+\settowidth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settowidth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the width of the text argument.
+
+Predefined lengths
+
+ \width ::width::
+ \height ::height::
+ \depth ::depth::
+ \totalheight ::totalheight::
+
+These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands
+
+See section Spaces & Boxes.
+
+They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box.
+\totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the
+text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Letters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Letters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5163868d91 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Letters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +############################################################
+Letters
+############################################################
+You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+business. The letter document class is designed to make a
+number of letters at once, although you can make just one if
+you so desire.
+
+Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the
+other document classes, i.e., you must have the following
+commands as a minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+ \end{document}
+
+Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the
+name and address of the recipient. For example, you might
+have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+ \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text
+of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input.
+Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not
+work. The letter closes with a \closing command.
+After the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc
+command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar
+\encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands,
+use \\ to separate the items.
+
+These commands are used with the letter class:
+
+ \address: Your return address.
+ \cc: Cc list.
+ \closing: Saying goodbye.
+ \encl: List of enclosed material.
+ \location: Your organisation's address.
+ \makelabels: Making address labels.
+ \name: Your name, for the return address.
+ \opening: Saying hello.
+ \ps: Adding a postscript.
+ \signature: Your signature.
+ \startbreaks: Allow page breaks.
+ \stopbreaks: Disallow page breaks.
+ \telephone: Your phone number.
+
+############################################################
+ \address ::address::
+############################################################
+\address{Return address}
+The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated
+by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration,
+then the letter will be formatted for copying onto your
+organisation's standard letterhead. (See section Overview of
+LaTeX and Local Guide, for details on your local implementation).
+If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be
+formatted as a personal letter.
+############################################################
+ \cc ::cc::
+############################################################
+\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}
+Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+name is printed on a separate line.
+############################################################
+ \closing ::closing::
+############################################################
+\closing{text}
+The letter closes with a \closing command, i.e.,
+ \closing{Best Regards,}
+\encl
+\encl{CV\\Certificates}
+Generate a list of enclosed material.
+############################################################
+ \location ::location::
+############################################################
+\location{address}
+This modifies your organisation's standard address. This
+only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+############################################################
+ \makelabels ::makelabels::
+############################################################
+\makelabels{number}
+If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create
+a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before
+the letters.
+############################################################
+ \name ::name::
+############################################################
+\name{June Davenport}
+Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with
+the return address.
+############################################################
+ \opening ::opening::
+############################################################
+\opening{text}
+The letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory
+argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your
+letter, i.e.,
+ \opening{Dear Joe,}
+############################################################
+ \ps ::ps::
+############################################################
+\ps
+Use this command before a postscript.
+############################################################
+ \signature ::sinature::
+############################################################
+\signature{Harvey Swick}
+Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+underneath the space for your signature. Items that should
+go on separate lines should be separated by \\ commands.
+############################################################
+ \startbreaks ::startbreaks::
+############################################################
+\startbreaks
+Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again.
+############################################################
+ \stopbreaks ::stopbreaks::
+############################################################
+\stopbreaks
+Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs.
+############################################################
+ \telephone ::telephone::
+############################################################
+\telephone{number}
+This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+firstpage pagestyle is selected.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Margin.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Margin.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..291c0e15a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Margin.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +############################################################
+Margin Notes ::marginpar::reversemarginpar::
+############################################################
+
+The command \marginpar[left]{right} creates a note in the
+margin. The first line will be at the same height as the line
+in the text where the \marginpar occurs.
+When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text
+will be placed
+ 1. in the right margin for one-sided layout
+ 2. in the outside margin for two-sided layout
+ 3. in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+ 4. By issuing the command \reversemarginpar, you can
+ force the marginal notes to go into the opposite
+ (inside) margin.
+When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left
+margin, and right is used for the right margin.
+The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can
+enable hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a
+\hspace{0pt} command.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Math.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Math.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0b33dfb937 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Math.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +############################################################
+Math Formulae ::(::)::[::]::$::
+############################################################
+
+There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+ math For Formulae that appear right in the text.
+ displaymath For Formulae that appear on their own line.
+ equation The same as the displaymath environment
+ except that it adds an equation number in
+ the right margin.
+The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only
+in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are
+used so often that they have the following short forms:
+
+ \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+ \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even
+shorter form:
+
+ $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+ Subscripts & Superscripts: Also known as exponent or index.
+ Math Symbols: Various mathematical squiggles.
+ Spacing in Math Mode: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+ Math Miscellany: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+
+############################################################
+ Subscripts & Superscripts ::_::^::
+############################################################
+To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just
+type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
+^{exp}. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
+that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right
+thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript.
+############################################################
+ Math Symbols
+############################################################
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely
+to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in
+math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source,
+you will get the symbol in your output.
+############################################################
+ Spacing in Math Mode
+############################################################
+In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and
+puts in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats
+mathematics the way it's done in mathematics texts. If you
+want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following four
+commands for use in math mode:
+
+ \; - a thick space ::;::
+ \: - a medium space :::::
+ \, - a thin space ::,::
+ \! - a negative thin space ::!::
+
+############################################################
+ Math Miscellany
+############################################################
+ \cdots ::cdots::
+Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to
+the centre of the line. eg.
+ \ddots ::ddots::
+Produces a diagonal ellipsis. eg.
+ \frac{num}{den} ::frac::
+Produces the fraction num divided by den. eg.
+ \ldots ::ldots::
+Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode, not
+just math mode. eg.
+ \overbrace{text} ::overbrace::
+Generates a brace over text. eg.
+ \overline{text} ::overline::
+Causes the argument text to be overlined. eg.
+ \sqrt[root]{arg} ::sqrt::
+Produces the square root of its argument. The optional argument,
+root, determines what root to produce, i.e., the cube root
+of x+y would be typed
+as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. eg.
+ \underbrace{text} ::underbrace::
+Generates text with a brace underneath. eg.
+ \underline{text} ::underline::
+Causes the argument text to be underlined. This command can
+also be used in paragraph and LR modes. eg.
+ \vdots ::vdots::
+Produces a vertical ellipsis. eg.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Modes.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Modes.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fd8358fedf --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Modes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +############################################################
+Modes
+############################################################
+When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one
+of three modes:
+
+ Paragraph mode
+ Math mode
+ Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
+LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase
+to a different level, though not all level changes produce
+mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or
+leaving an environment, or when LaTeX is processing the
+argument of certain text-producing commands.
+
+"Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is
+in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks
+your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX
+is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula.
+In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output
+that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between
+them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from
+left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if
+you put a hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep
+typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and
+then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit
+on the line.
+
+LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox
+command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the
+box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
+formula in the box. There are also several text-producing
+commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in
+paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+environments will be called a parbox. When LaTeX is in paragraph
+mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner paragraph
+mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
+called "outer paragraph mode".
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Overview.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3b0bea43b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Overview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +############################################################
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+############################################################
+
+The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+formatted. It produces at least three files as output:
+
+ 1. A "Device Independent", or `.dvi' file. This contains
+commands that can be translated into commands for a variety
+of output devices. You can view the output of LaTeX by using
+a program such as xdvi, which actually uses the `.dvi' file.
+ 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered
+in the input file.
+ 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX
+itself, for things such as sectioning.
+
+For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should
+consult The TeXbook by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9,
+published jointly by the American Mathematical Society
+and Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
+
+For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
+ LaTeX: A Document Preparation System, by Leslie Lamport,
+Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
+ The LaTeX Companion, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach,
+and Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
+
+############################################################
+Commands
+############################################################
+
+A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists
+of a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or
+(b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets,
+[], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {},
+are required.
+
+NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower
+case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
+
+ Counters: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+ Cross References: Automatic referencing.
+ Definitions: Define your own commands etc.
+ Document Classes: Some of the various classes available.
+ Environments: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+ Footnotes: How to produce footnotes.
+ Layout: Controlling the page layout.
+ Lengths: The length commands.
+ Letters: The letter class.
+ Line & Page Breaking: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
+ Making Paragraphs: Paragraph commands.
+ Margin Notes: Putting remarks in the margin.
+ Math Formulae: How to create mathematical formulae.
+ Modes: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+ Page Styles: Various styles of page layout.
+ Sectioning: How to section properly.
+ Spaces & Boxes: All the associated commands.
+ Special Characters: Special reserved characters.
+ Splitting the Input: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+ Starting & Ending: The formal start & end layouts.
+ Table of Contents: How to create a table of contents.
+ Terminal Input/Output: User interaction.
+ Typefaces: Such as bold, italics etc.
+
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Paragraphs.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Paragraphs.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b127d75429 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Paragraphs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +############################################################
+Making Paragraphs
+############################################################
+
+A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines
+-- lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not
+appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in
+math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command.
+
+ \indent: Indent this paragraph.
+ \noindent: Do not indent this paragraph.
+ \par: Another way of writing a blank line.
+
+############################################################
+ \indent ::indent:
+############################################################
+\indent
+This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width
+of the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph
+indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+############################################################
+ \noindent ::noindent::
+############################################################
+\noindent
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses
+the paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the
+middle of a paragraph.
+############################################################
+ \par ::par::
+############################################################
+Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+environment definitions easier to read.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Parameters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Parameters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee764281a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Parameters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,484 @@ +############################################################
+Parameters
+############################################################
+
+The input file specification indicates the file to be
+formatted; TeX uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If
+you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the
+terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string
+as a parameter to the command; e.g.
+
+ latex "\scrollmode\input foo.tex"
+
+will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error.
+Output files are always created in the current directory.
+When you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the
+output names on the file specification associated with the
+logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically texput.log.
+############################################################
+Concept Index
+a
+Accessing any character of a font
+Aligning Equations
+Appendix, creating
+Arrays, math
+article class
+Author, for titlepage
+b
+Bibliography, creating (automatically)
+Bibliography, creating (manually)
+BibTeX, using
+book class
+Boxes
+c
+Cc list
+Centering text
+Centering text, environment for
+Characters, reserved
+Characters, special
+Classes of document
+Commands, defining new ones
+Computer programs, typesetting
+Counters, a list of
+Counters, creating
+Counters, getting the value of
+Counters, setting
+Creating letters
+Creating pictures
+Creating tables
+Cross referencing
+Cross referencing using page number
+Cross referencing using section number
+d
+Date, for titlepage
+Defining a new command
+Defining new environments
+Defining new fonts
+Defining new theorems
+Displaying quoted text
+Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
+Document Classes
+e
+Enclosed material
+Ending & Starting
+Enlarge current page
+Environments
+Environments, defining
+Equations, aligning
+Equations, environment for
+exponent
+f
+Figures, footnotes in
+Flushing a page
+Font commands, low-level
+Font Sizes
+Font Styles
+Fonts
+Fonts, new commands for
+Footnotes in figures
+Footnotes, creating
+Formatting Text
+Formulae, environment for
+Formulae, maths
+g
+Global options
+Greek letters
+h
+Hyphenation, defining
+Hyphenation, forcing
+i
+Indent, forcing
+Indent, suppressing
+Input file, splitting
+Input/Output
+Inserting figures
+j
+Justification, ragged left
+Justification, ragged right
+l
+Labelled lists, creating
+LaTeX overview
+Layout commands
+Left-justifying text
+Left-justifying text, environment for
+Left-to-right mode
+Lengths, adding to
+Lengths, defining a new
+Lengths, defining and using
+Lengths, predefined
+Lengths, setting value of
+letter class
+Letters
+Letters, ending
+Letters, starting
+Line Breaking
+Line breaks
+Lines in tables
+Lining text up in columns using tab stops
+Lining text up in tables
+Lists of items
+Lists of items, generic
+Lists of items, numbered
+Loading additional packages
+Low-level font commands
+LR mode
+m
+Making a title page
+Making paragraphs
+Margin Notes
+Math Formulae
+Math mode
+Math mode, entering
+Math mode, spacing
+Maths Miscellany
+Maths symbols
+Minipage, creating a
+Modes
+Multicolumn text
+n
+New line, starting
+New line, starting (paragraph mode)
+New Page
+Notes in the margin
+o
+Options, global
+Overview of LaTeX
+p
+Packages, loading
+Page break, forcing
+Page Breaking
+Page Formatting
+Page numbering
+Page styles
+Paragraph mode
+Paragraph, starting a new
+Paragraphs
+Pictures, creating
+Poetry, an environment for
+Predefined lengths
+Programs, typesetting
+q
+Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
+Quoted text, displaying
+r
+Ragged left text
+Ragged left text, environment for
+Ragged right text
+Ragged right text, environment for
+Remarks in the margin
+report class
+Reserved Characters
+Right-justifying text
+Right-justifying text, environment for
+s
+Sectioning
+Simulating typed text
+Sizes of text
+Space, inserting vertical
+Spaces
+Spacing, within Math mode
+Special Characters
+Splitting the input file
+Starting & Ending
+Starting on a right-hand page
+Styles of text
+Styles, page
+Subscript
+Superscript
+Symbols
+t
+Tab stops, using
+Table of Contents, creating
+Tables, creating
+Terminal Input/Output
+Thanks, for titlepage
+Theorems, defining
+Theorems, typesetting
+Title making
+Title pages, creating
+Title, for titlepage
+Typed text, simulating
+Typeface Sizes
+Typeface Styles
+Typefaces
+u
+Using BibTeX
+v
+Variables, a list of
+Verbatim text
+Vertical space, inserting
+Command Index
+$
+$
+\
+\!
+\' (tabbing)
+\(
+\)
+\+
+\,
+\- (hyphenation)
+\- (tabbing)
+\;
+\<
+\=
+\>
+\[
+\\
+\]
+\` (tabbing)
+\a
+\addcontentsline
+\address
+\addtocontents
+\addtocounter
+\addtolength
+\addvspace
+\alph
+\Alph
+\appendix
+\arabic
+\author
+\backslash
+\begin
+\bfseries
+\bibitem
+\bibliography
+\bibliographystyle
+\bigskip
+\caption
+\cc
+\cdots
+\centering
+\chapter
+\circle
+\cite
+\cleardoublepage
+\clearpage
+\cline
+\closing
+\COLON
+\dashbox
+\date
+\ddots
+\depth
+\documentclass
+\dotfill
+\emph
+\encl
+\end
+\enlargethispage
+\fbox
+\flushbottom
+\fnsymbol
+\fontencoding
+\fontfamily
+\fontseries
+\fontshape
+\fontsize
+\footnote
+\footnotemark
+\footnotesize
+\footnotetext
+\frac
+\frame
+\framebox, \framebox
+\fussy
+\height
+\hfill
+\hline
+\hrulefill
+\hspace
+\Huge
+\huge
+\hyphenation
+\include
+\includeonly
+\indent
+\input
+\item
+\itshape
+\kill
+\label
+\large
+\LARGE
+\Large
+\ldots
+\lefteqn
+\line
+\linebreak
+\linethickness
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+\location
+\makebox
+\makebox (picture)
+\makelabels
+\maketitle
+\markboth
+\markright
+\mathbf
+\mathcal
+\mathit
+\mathnormal
+\mathrm
+\mathsf
+\mathtt
+\mathversion
+\mbox
+\mdseries
+\medskip
+\multicolumn
+\multiput
+\name
+\newcommand
+\newcounter
+\newenvironment
+\newfont
+\newlength
+\newline
+\newpage
+\newsavebox
+\newtheorem
+\nocite
+\nofiles
+\noindent
+\nolinebreak
+\nopagebreak
+\normalfont
+\normalsize
+\onecolumn
+\opening
+\oval
+\overbrace
+\overline
+\pagebreak
+\pagenumbering
+\pageref
+\pagestyle
+\par
+\paragraph
+\parbox
+\ps
+\pushtabs, \pushtabs
+\put
+\raggedbottom
+\raggedleft
+\raggedright
+\raisebox
+\ref
+\refstepcounter
+\rmfamily
+\roman
+\Roman
+\rule
+\savebox
+\sbox
+\scriptsize
+\scshape
+\selectfont
+\setcounter
+\setlength
+\settodepth
+\settoheight
+\settowidth
+\sffamily
+\shortstack
+\signature
+\sloppy
+\slshape
+\small
+\smallskip
+\sqrt
+\startbreaks
+\stepcounter
+\stopbreaks
+\subparagraph
+\subsection
+\subsubsection
+\symbol
+\tableofcontents
+\telephone
+\textbf
+\textit
+\textmd
+\textnormal
+\textrm
+\textsc
+\textsf
+\textsl
+\texttt
+\textup
+\thanks
+\thispagestyle
+\tiny
+\title
+\today
+\totalheight
+\ttfamily
+\twocolumn
+\typein
+\typeout
+\underbrace
+\underline
+\upshape
+\usebox
+\usecounter
+\usefont
+\usepackage
+\value
+\vdots
+\vector
+\verb
+\vfill
+\vline
+\vspace
+\width
+^
+^
+_
+_
+a
+array
+c
+center
+d
+description
+e
+enumerate
+eqnarray
+equation
+f
+figure
+flushleft
+flushright
+i
+itemize
+l
+letter
+list
+lrbox
+m
+minipage
+p
+picture
+q
+quotation
+quote
+t
+tabbing
+table
+tabular
+thebibliography
+theorem
+titlepage
+v
+verbatim
+verse
+
+
+
+This document was generated on 8 July 1996 using the texi2html translator
+version 1.50.
+
+
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Breaking.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Breaking.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d9df0a2519 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Breaking.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Line & Page Breaking
+############################################################
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is
+to translate your input file into a string of glyphs and
+spaces. To produce a printed document, this string must be
+broken into lines, and these lines must be broken into pages.
+In some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with
+the \\ command, but LaTeX usually does it for you.
+
+ \\: Start a new line.
+ \- (hyphenation): Insert explicit hyphenation.
+ \cleardoublepage: Start a new right-hand page.
+ \clearpage: Start a new page.
+ \enlargethispage: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+ \fussy: Be fussy about line breaking.
+ \hyphenation: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+ \linebreak: Break the line.
+ \newline: Break the line prematurely.
+ \newpage: Start a new page.
+ \nolinebreak: Don't break the current line.
+ \nopagebreak: Don't make a page break here.
+ \pagebreak: Please make a page break here.
+ \sloppy: Be sloppy about line breaking.
+
+############################################################
+ \\ ::\::
+############################################################
+\\[*][extra-space]
+The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
+optional argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra
+vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This
+can be a negative amount.
+The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except
+that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at
+that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will
+usually find all correct hyphenation points. The \- command
+is used for the exceptional cases.
+
+Note that when you insert \- commands in a word, the word
+will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the
+hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+############################################################
+ \cleardoublepage ::cleardoublepage::
+############################################################
+The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes
+all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input
+to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes
+the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a
+blank page if necessary.
+############################################################
+ \clearpage ::clearpage::
+############################################################
+The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all
+figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to
+be printed.
+############################################################
+ \enlargethispage ::enlargethispage::
+############################################################
+\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified
+amount; e.g.
+\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line.
+The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on
+the page as much as possible. This is normally used together
+with an explicit \pagebreak.
+############################################################
+ \fussy ::fussy::
+############################################################
+\fussy
+This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between
+words, but may produce overfull boxes.
+This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command.
+section \sloppy
+############################################################
+ \hyphenation ::hypentation::
+############################################################
+\hyphenation{words}
+The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points,
+where words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
+each hyphenation point is indicated by a - character.
+############################################################
+ \linebreak ::linebreak::
+############################################################
+\linebreak[number]
+The \linebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current line
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \linebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+The \linebreak command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
+extends to the right margin.
+############################################################
+ \newline ::newline::
+############################################################
+The \newline command breaks the line right where it is. It
+can only be used in paragraph mode.
+############################################################
+ \newpage ::newpage::
+############################################################
+The \newpage command ends the current page.
+############################################################
+ \nolinebreak ::nolinebreak::
+############################################################
+\nolinebreak[number]
+The \nolinebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current line at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nolinebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \nopagebreak ::nopagebreak::
+############################################################
+\nopagebreak[number]
+The \nopagebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current page at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nopagebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \pagebreak ::pagebreak::
+############################################################
+\pagebreak[number]
+The \pagebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current page
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+############################################################
+ \sloppy ::sloppy::
+############################################################
+\sloppy
+This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
+This can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space
+between words. Lasts until a \fussy command is issued.
+section \fussy.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Characters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Characters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9747024003 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Characters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Special Characters ::#::%::symbol::
+############################################################
+
+The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+called "special printing characters", or simply
+"special characters".
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+Whenever you put one of these special characters into your
+file, you are doing something special. If you simply want
+the character to be printed just as any other letter, include
+a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce
+$ in your output.
+
+One exception to this rule is the \ itself because \\ has its
+own special meaning. A \ is produced by typing $\backslash$
+in your file.
+Also, \~ means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
+so you will probably want to use \verb instead.
+
+In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+know its number by using the \symbol command. For example,
+the character used for displaying spaces in the \verb*
+command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+\symbol{32}.
+
+You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal
+numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written
+ as \symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Contents.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Contents.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6aed95d968 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Contents.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Table of Contents
+############################################################
+::tableofcontents::listoffigures::listoftables::
+A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
+command. You put the command right where you want the table
+of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces
+a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page.
+If you want a new page after the table of contents, include
+a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command.
+
+There are similar commands \listoffigures and \listoftables
+for producing a list of figures and a list of tables,
+respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the
+table of contents.
+
+NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you
+cannot have the \nofiles command in your document.
+
+ \addcontentsline: Add an entry to table of
+ contents etc.
+ \addtocontents: Add text directly to table of
+ contents file etc.
+
+############################################################
+ \addcontentsline ::addcontentsline::
+############################################################
+\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}
+The \addcontentsline command adds an entry to the specified
+list or table where:
+
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ sec_unit controls the formatting of the entry. It
+ should be one of the following, depending upon
+ the value of the file argument:
+ toc -- the name of the sectional unit, such
+ as part or subsection.
+ lof -- figure
+ lot -- table
+ entry is the text of the entry.
+############################################################
+ \addtocontents ::addtocontents::
+############################################################
+\addtocontents{file}{text}
+The \addtocontents command adds text (or formatting commands)
+directly to the file that generates the table of contents or
+list of figures or tables.
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ text is the information to be written.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Counters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Counters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67a9b180d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Counters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Counters
+############################################################
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated
+with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name
+of the environment or command that produces the number,
+except with no \. (enumi - enumiv are used for the nested
+enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters
+used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control
+numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+ \addtocounter: Add a quantity to a counter.
+ \alph: Print value of a counter using letters.
+ \arabic: Print value of a counter using numerals.
+ \fnsymbol: Print value of a counter using symbols.
+ \newcounter: Define a new counter.
+ \refstepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \roman: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
+ \setcounter: Set the value of a counter.
+ \stepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \usecounter: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+ \value: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+
+############################################################
+ \addtocounter ::addtocounter::
+############################################################
+\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+The \addtocounter command increments the counter by the
+amount specified by the value argument. The value argument
+can be negative.
+############################################################
+ \alph ::alph::
+############################################################
+\alph{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in alphabetic characters. The \alph command uses lower case
+alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., a, b, c... while the
+\Alph command uses upper case alphabetic characters,
+i.e., A, B, C....
+############################################################
+ \arabic ::arabic::
+############################################################
+\arabic{counter}
+The \arabic command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
+############################################################
+ \fnsymbol ::fnsymbol::
+############################################################
+\fnsymbol{counter}
+The \fnsymbol command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be
+used for numbering footnotes. eg. From 1-9:
+NB. counter must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
+############################################################
+ \newcounter ::newcounter::
+############################################################
+\newcounter{foo}[counter]
+The \newcounter command defines a new counter named foo. The
+counter is initialized to zero.
+The optional argument [counter] causes the counter foo to be
+reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
+incremented.
+############################################################
+ \refstepcounter ::refstepcounter::
+############################################################
+\refstepcounter{counter}
+The \refstepcounter command works like \stepcounter See
+section \stepcounter, except it also defines the current
+\ref value to be the result of \thecounter.
+############################################################
+ \roman ::roman
+############################################################
+\roman{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in Roman numerals. The \roman command uses lower case Roman
+numerals, i.e., i, ii, iii..., while the \Roman command uses
+upper case Roman numerals, i.e., I, II, III....
+############################################################
+ \stepcounter ::stepcounter::
+############################################################
+\stepcounter{counter}
+The \stepcounter command adds one to the counter and resets
+all subsidiary counters.
+############################################################
+ \setcounter ::setcounter::
+############################################################
+\setcounter{counter}{value}
+The \setcounter command sets the value of the counter to that
+specified by the value argument.
+############################################################
+ \usecounter ::usecounter::
+############################################################
+\usecounter{counter}
+The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the
+list environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
+number the list items.
+############################################################
+ \value ::value::
+############################################################
+\value{counter}
+The \value command produces the value of the counter named
+in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects
+an integer or number, such as the second argument of a
+\setcounter or \addtocounter command, or in:
+ \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Definitions.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Definitions.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b9755f280a --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Definitions.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Definitions
+############################################################
+
+\newcommand: Define a new command.
+\newenvironment: Define a new environment.
+\newtheorem: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+\newfont: Define a new font name.
+
+############################################################
+ \newcommand ::newcommand::renewcommand::
+############################################################
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+These commands define (or redefine) a command.
+ cmd A command name beginning with a \. For
+ \newcommand it must not be already defined and
+ must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand it
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the command being defined. The
+ default is for the command to have no arguments.
+ def If this optional parameter is present, it means
+ that the command's first argument is optional.
+ The default value of the optional argument is def.
+ definition The text to be substituted for every
+ occurrence of cmd; a parameter of the form #n in
+ cmd is replaced by the text of the nth argument
+ when this substitution takes place.
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment ::newenvironment::renewenvironment::
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+These commands define or redefine an environment.
+ nam The name of the environment. For \newenvironment
+ there must be no currently defined environment
+ by that name, and the command \nam must be
+ undefined. For \renewenvironment the environment
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the newly-defined environment.
+ The default is no arguments.
+ default If this is specified, the first argument
+ is optional, and default gives the default value
+ for that argument.
+ begdef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \begin{nam}; a parameter of the form #n in cmd
+ is replaced by the text of the nth argument when
+ this substitution takes place.
+ enddef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \end{nam}. It may not contain any argument
+ parameters.
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem ::newtheorem::
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+ \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+This command defines a theorem-like environment.
+ env_name The name of the environment to be defined.
+ A string of letters. It must not be the
+ name of an existing environment or counter.
+ caption The text printed at the beginning of the
+ environment, right before the number.
+ This may simply say "Theorem", for example.
+ within The name of an already defined counter,
+ usually of a sectional unit. Provides a
+ means of resetting the new theorem counter
+ within the sectional unit.
+ numbered_like The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment.
+The \newtheorem command may have at most one optional argument.
+############################################################
+ \newfont ::newfont::
+############################################################
+\newfont{cmd}{font_name}
+Defines the command name cmd, which must not be currently
+defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
+font_name to be the current font.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Document.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Document.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a90954c521 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Document.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Document Classes
+############################################################
+
+Valid LaTeX document classes include:
+ article
+ report
+ letter
+ book
+ slides
+Other document classes are often available. See section
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide, for details. They are
+selected with the following command:
+
+ \documentclass [options] {class} ::documentclass::
+
+All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+options for
+selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
+ 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+(default is letter):
+ a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper,
+ legalpaper, executivepaper
+Miscellaneous options:
+ landscape -- selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
+ titlepage, notitlepage -- selects if there should be a
+ separate title page.
+ leqno -- equation number on left side of equations. Default
+ is right side.
+ fleqn -- displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
+ openbib -- use "open" bibliography format.
+ draft, final -- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
+ Default is final.
+These options are not available with the slides class:
+ oneside, twoside -- selects one- or twosided layout.
+ Default is oneside, except for the book class.
+ openright, openany -- determines if a chapter should
+ start on a right-hand page. Default is
+ openright for book.
+ onecolumn, twocolumn -- one or two columns. Defaults
+ to one column.
+The slides class offers the option clock for printing the
+time at the bottom of each note.
+
+If you specify more than one option, they must be separated
+by a comma. Additional packages are loaded by a
+
+ \usepackage[options]{pkg} ::usepackage::
+
+command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+separated by a comma.
+
+Any options given in the \documentclass command that are
+unknown by the selected document class are passed on to
+the packages loaded with \usepackage.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Environments.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Environments.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3068d8e7fa --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Environments.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,967 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Environments ::begin::end::
+############################################################
+
+LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+manner.
+
+ \begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{environment-name}
+
+ array: Math arrays.
+ center: Centred lines.
+ description: Labelled lists.
+ enumerate: Numbered lists.
+ eqnarray: Sequences of aligned equations.
+ equation: Displayed equation.
+ figure: Floating figures.
+ flushleft: Flushed left lines.
+ flushright: Flushed right lines.
+ itemize: Bulleted lists.
+ letter: Letters.
+ list: Generic list environment.
+ minipage: Miniature page.
+ picture: Picture with text, arrows, lines and
+ circles.
+ quotation: Indented environment with paragraph
+ indentation.
+ quote: Indented environment with no paragraph
+ indentation.
+ tabbing: Align text arbitrarily.
+ table: Floating tables.
+ tabular: Align text in columns.
+ thebibliography: Bibliography or reference list.
+ theorem: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+ titlepage: For hand crafted title pages.
+ verbatim: Simulating typed input.
+ verse: For poetry and other things.
+
+############################################################
+ array ::array::
+############################################################
+
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+
+Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has
+a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns
+and the alignment within them. Each column, coln, is specified
+by a single letter that tells how items in that row should
+be formatted.
+
+ c -- for centred
+ l -- for flush left
+ r -- for flush right
+
+Column entries must be separated by an &. Column entries may
+include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+Note that the array environment can only be used in math mode,
+so normally it is used inside an equation environment.
+############################################################
+ center ::center::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{center}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{center}
+
+The center environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are centred within the left and
+right margins on the current page. Each line must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+\centering: The declaration form of the center environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \centering ::centering::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the center environment. This
+declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote
+or in a parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centred
+on the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning
+of the figure or table environment.
+
+Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does
+not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ description ::discription::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [label] First item
+ \item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{description}
+
+The description environment is used to make labelled lists.
+The label is bold face and flushed right.
+############################################################
+ enumerate ::enumerate::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+The enumerate environment produces a numbered list.
+Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments.
+
+Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command.
+There must be at least one \item command within the environment.
+The enumerate environment uses the enumi through enumiv
+counters (see section Counters). The type of numbering can be
+changed by redefining \theenumi etc.
+############################################################
+ eqnarray ::eqnarray::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ math formula 1 \\
+ math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of
+equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
+array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and
+consecutive items within a row separated by an &.
+
+An equation number is placed on every line unless that line
+has a \nonumber command.
+
+The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas
+across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush
+left in a box of zero width.
+############################################################
+ equation ::equation::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ math formula
+ \end{equation}
+
+The equation environment centres your equation on the page
+and places the equation number in the right margin.
+############################################################
+ figure ::figure::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+ \caption{figure title}
+ \end{figure}
+
+Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Figures will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h (Here) - at the position in the text where the
+ figure environment appears.
+ t (Top) - at the top of a text page.
+ b (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement tbp.
+
+The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc. you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your figure.
+############################################################
+ flushleft ::flushleft::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated
+with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedright: The declaration form of the flushleft
+ environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedright ::raggedright::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ flushright ::flushright::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushright}
+
+The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedleft: The declaration form of the flushright environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedleft ::raggedleft::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushright environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ itemize ::itemize::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{itemize}
+
+The itemize environment produces a "bulleted" list.
+Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments. Each item of an itemized list
+begins with an \item command. There must be at least one
+\item command within the environment. The itemize environment
+uses the itemi through itemiv counters (see section Counters).
+The type of numbering can be changed by redefining \theitemi
+etc.
+############################################################
+ letter ::letter::
+############################################################
+This environment is used for creating letters. See section
+Letters.
+############################################################
+ list ::list::item::
+############################################################
+The list environment is a generic environment which is used
+for defining many of the more specific environments. It is
+seldom used in documents, but often in macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{list}
+
+The {label} argument specifies how items should be labelled.
+This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box
+to form the label. This argument can and usually does contain
+other LaTeX commands.
+
+The {spacing} argument contains commands to change the spacing
+parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
+null, i.e., {}. This will select all default spacing which
+should suffice for most cases.
+############################################################
+ minipage ::minipage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
+ text
+ \end{minipage}
+
+The minipage environment is similar to a \parbox command. It
+takes the same optional position argument and mandatory width
+argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
+inside a minipage. Footnotes in a minipage environment are
+handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting
+footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext
+command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage
+instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter
+
+See section Counters.
+
+NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+minipage.
+############################################################
+ picture ::picture::
+############################################################
+ \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+ \end{picture}
+The picture environment allows you to create just about any
+kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and
+circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture
+by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number
+that may have a decimal point and a minus sign -- a number
+like 5, 2.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength
+has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
+length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of
+\unitlength anywhere you want, using the \setlength command,
+but strange things will happen if you try changing it inside
+the picture environment.
+
+A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5),
+specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5.
+Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to
+an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the
+picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it
+is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit
+the argument.
+
+The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is
+a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The
+environment produces a rectangular box with width and height
+determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+
+The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
+following the size argument, that can change the origin.
+(Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has
+been set to 1mm, the command
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and
+whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When
+you first draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument,
+leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to
+modify your picture by shifting everything, you just add the
+appropriate optional argument. The environment's mandatory
+argument determines the nominal size of the picture.
+
+This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
+LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture,
+or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX
+in determining how much room to leave for it.
+
+Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command.
+The command
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference
+point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
+objects will be described below. The \put command creates an LR box.
+You can put anything in the text argument of the \put command that
+you'd put into the argument of an \mbox and related commands. When
+you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of
+the box.
+
+Picture commands:
+
+ \circle: Draw a circle.
+ \dashbox: Draw a dashed box.
+ \frame: Draw a frame around an object.
+ \framebox (picture): Draw a box with a frame around it.
+ \line: Draw a straight line.
+ \linethickness: Set the line thickness.
+ \makebox (picture): Draw a box of the specified size.
+ \multiput: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+ \oval: Draw an ellipse.
+ \put: Place an object at a specified place.
+ \shortstack: Make a pile of objects.
+ \vector: Draw a line with an arrow.
+
+############################################################
+ \circle ::circle::
+############################################################
+\circle[*]{diameter}
+The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as
+close to the specified one as possible. If the *-form of the
+command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
+Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
+############################################################
+ \dashbox ::dashbox::
+############################################################
+Draws a box with a dashed line.
+\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}
+The \dashbox has an extra argument which specifies the width
+of each dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and
+height are multiples of the dash_length.
+############################################################
+ \frame ::frame::
+############################################################
+\frame{...}
+The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around the object
+specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom
+left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the
+frame and the object.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents
+of the box.
+############################################################
+ \line ::line::
+############################################################
+\line(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \line command draws a line of the specified length and
+slope.
+Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where
+x and y have integer values from -6 through 6.
+############################################################
+ \linethickness ::linethickness::
+############################################################
+\linethickness{dimension}
+Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture environment to be dimension, which must be a positive
+length. It does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and
+circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval to form the
+corners of an oval.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar
+to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify
+a width and height in multiples of \unitlength.
+The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant
+that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the
+following:
+ t - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+ b - Moves the item to the bottom
+ l - Moves the item to the left
+ r - Moves the item to the right
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \multiput ::multiput::
+############################################################
+\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}
+The \multiput command can be used when you are putting the
+same object in a regular pattern across a picture.
+############################################################
+ \oval ::oval::
+############################################################
+\oval(width,height)[portion]
+The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.
+The optional argument, [portion], allows you to select part
+of the oval.
+ t - Selects the top portion
+ b - Selects the bottom portion
+ r - Selects the right portion
+ l - Selects the left portion
+Note that the "corners" of the oval are made with quarter
+circles with a maximum
+
+radius of 20 pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes
+with rounded corners.
+############################################################
+ \put ::put::
+############################################################
+\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
+The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory
+argument at the given coordinates.
+############################################################
+ \shortstack ::shortstack::
+############################################################
+\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}
+The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The
+valid positions are:
+ r - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
+ l - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
+ c - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack
+ (default)
+############################################################
+ \vector ::vector::
+############################################################
+\vector(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the
+specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie
+between -4 and +4, inclusive.
+
+############################################################
+ quotation ::quotation::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quotation}
+ text
+ \end{quotation}
+The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the
+left and the right.
+
+The text is justified at both margins and there is paragraph
+indentation.
+
+Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ quote ::quote::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quote}
+ text
+ \end{quote}
+The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left
+and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving
+a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ tabbing ::tabbing::
+############################################################
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+ second row \> \> more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabbing}
+The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in
+columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them
+much the way you do with an ordinary typewriter.
+
+It is best suited for cases where the width of each column
+is constant and known in advance.
+
+This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular
+environment.
+
+The following commands can be used inside a tabbing
+enviroment:
+
+############################################################
+ \= ::=::
+############################################################
+Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+############################################################
+ \> ::>::
+############################################################
+Advances to the next tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \< ::<::
+############################################################
+This command allows you to put something to the left of the
+local margin without changing the margin. Can only be used
+at the start of the line.
+############################################################
+ \+ ::+::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the right.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the left.
+############################################################
+ \' ::'::
+############################################################
+Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current
+column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\,
+or \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+against the current column's tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \` ::`::
+############################################################
+Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop,
+including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
+of the last column because here's no tab stop there. The \`
+command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or
+\end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command
+between the \` and the command that ends the line.
+############################################################
+ \kill ::kill::
+############################################################
+Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
+except that it throws away the current line instead of
+producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \-
+commands in that line remain in effect.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs ::pushtabs::
+############################################################
+Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing
+environment.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs
+############################################################
+Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs.
+############################################################
+ \a ::a::
+############################################################
+In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not
+produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands \a=, \a'
+and \a` are used.
+
+This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+format:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+############################################################
+ table ::table::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+ \caption{table title}
+ \end{table}
+
+Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Tables will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h : Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+ t : Top - at the top of a text page.
+ b : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement [tbp].
+
+The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your table.
+############################################################
+ tabular ::tabular::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory
+and optional arguments consist of:
+ width Specifies the width of the tabular* environment.
+ There must be rubber space between columns that
+ can stretch to fill out the specified width.
+ pos Specifies the vertical position; default is
+ alignment on the centre of the environment.
+ t - align on top row
+ b - align on bottom row
+ cols Specifies the column formatting. It consists of
+ a sequence of the following specifiers,
+ corresponding to the sequence of columns and
+ intercolumn material.
+ l - A column of left-aligned items.
+ r - A column of right-aligned items.
+ c - A column of centred items.
+ | - A vertical line the full height and depth of
+ the environment.
+ @@{text} - This inserts text in every row. An
+ @@-expression suppresses the intercolumn space
+ normally inserted between columns; any desired
+ space between the inserted text and the adjacent
+ items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd}
+ command in an @@-expression causes an extra space
+ of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent
+ columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
+ command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this
+ extra space is not suppressed by an @@-expression.
+ An \extracolsep command can be used only in an
+ @@-expression in the cols argument.
+ p{wd} - Produces a column with each item typeset in
+ a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument
+ of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not
+ appear in the item, except in the following
+ situations:
+ 1. inside an environment like minipage,
+ array, or tabular.
+ 2. inside an explicit \parbox.
+ 3. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright,
+ or \raggedleft
+ declaration. The latter declarations must appear
+ inside braces or an environment when used in a
+ p-column element.
+ *{num}{cols} - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where
+ num is any positive integer and cols is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another
+ *-expression.
+
+These commands can be used inside a tabular environment:
+
+ \cline: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+ \hline: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+ \multicolumn: Make an item spanning several columns.
+ \vline: Draw a vertical line.
+
+############################################################
+ \cline ::cline::
+############################################################
+\cline{i-j}
+The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j,
+which are identified in the mandatory argument.
+############################################################
+ \hline ::hline::
+############################################################
+The \hline command will draw a horizontal line the width of
+the table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top,
+bottom, and between the rows of the table.
+############################################################
+ \multicolumn ::multicolumn::
+############################################################
+\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+The \multicolumn is used to make an entry that spans several
+columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the
+number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos,
+specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centred, l for
+flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
+text, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
+############################################################
+ \vline ::vline::
+############################################################
+The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the
+full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be
+used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also
+be used in an @@-expression.
+############################################################
+ thebibliography ::thebibliography::
+############################################################
+ \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+ \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{thebibliography}
+The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or
+reference list. In the article class, this reference list is
+labelled "References"; in the report class, it is labelled
+"Bibliography".
+
+ widest-label: Text that, when printed, is
+ approximately as wide as the widest item
+ label produces by the \bibitem commands.
+ \bibitem: Specify a bibliography item.
+ \cite: Refer to a bibliography item.
+ \nocite: Include an item in the bibliography.
+ Using BibTeX: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+############################################################
+ \bibitem ::bibitem::
+############################################################
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label.
+If the label argument is missing, a number is generated as
+the label, using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any
+sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not
+containing a comma. This command writes an entry on the `.aux'
+file containing cite_key and the item's label. When this
+`.aux' file is read by the \begin{document} command, the
+item's label is associated with cite_key, causing the
+reference to cite_key by a \cite command to produce the
+associated label.
+############################################################
+ \cite ::cite::
+############################################################
+\cite[text]{key_list}
+The key_list argument is a list of citation keys. This command
+generates an in-text citation to the references associated
+with the keys in key_list by entries on the `.aux' file read
+by the \begin{document} command. The optional text argument
+will appear after the citation, i.e. \cite[p. 2]{knuth} might
+produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
+############################################################
+ \nocite ::nocite::
+############################################################
+\nocite{key_list}
+The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list,
+which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux'
+file.
+############################################################
+ Using BibTeX
+############################################################
+If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple
+of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+thebibliography environment. Instead, you include the lines
+
+ \bibliographystyle{style} ::bibliographystyle::
+ \bibliography{bibfile} ::bibliography::
+
+where style refers to a file style.bst, which defines how
+your citations will look. The standard styles distributed
+with BibTeX are:
+
+ alpha Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed
+ from name of author and year of publication.
+ plain Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+ unsrt Like plain, but entries are in order of
+ citation.
+ abbrv Like plain, but more compact labels.
+
+In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored
+to the demands of various publications.
+The argument to \bibliography refers to the file bibfile.bib,
+which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the
+entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in
+the bibliography.
+############################################################
+ theorem ::theorem::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+ \end{theorem}
+
+The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface
+followed by your theorem text.
+############################################################
+ titlepage ::titlepage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ text
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page
+with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the
+following page to be numbered page one.
+
+Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command
+comes in handy for title pages.
+
+Note that you can use the \maketitle (see section \maketitle)
+command to produce a standard title page.
+############################################################
+ verbatim ::verbatim::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ text
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment
+that gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns
+LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks
+having the same effect that they would on a typewriter.
+
+ \verb: The macro form of the verbatim environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \verb ::verb::
+############################################################
+\verb char literal_text char
+\verb*char literal_text char
+Typesets literal_text exactly as typed, including special
+characters and spaces, using a typewriter (\tt) type style.
+There may be no space between \verb or \verb* and char
+(space is shown here only for clarity). The *-form differs
+only in that spaces are printed as `\verb*| |'.
+############################################################
+ verse ::verse::
+############################################################
+ \begin{verse}
+ text
+ \end{verse}
+The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may
+find other uses for it.
+The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate
+the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank
+lines to separate the stanzas.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Footnotes.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Footnotes.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c1a925ef3f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Footnotes.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Footnotes
+############################################################
+
+Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can
+also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the
+\footnotetext commands. See the specific command for
+information on why you would use one over the other.
+
+ \footnote: Insert a footnote.
+ \footnotemark: Insert footnote mark only.
+ \footnotetext: Insert footnote text only.
+
+############################################################
+ \footnote ::footnote::
+############################################################
+\footnote[number]{text}
+The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at
+the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, number,
+is used to change the default footnote number. This command
+can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot
+use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures,
+tables or in a tabular environment.
+############################################################
+ \footnotemark ::footnotemark::
+############################################################
+The \footnotemark command puts the footnote number in the
+text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The
+text of the footnote is supplied by the \footnotetext command.
+This command can be used to produce several consecutive
+footnote markers referring to the same footnote by using
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+after the first \footnote command.
+############################################################
+ \footnotetext ::footnotetext::
+############################################################
+\footnotetext[number]{text}
+The \footnotetext command produces the text to be placed at
+the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after
+the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must
+appear in outer paragraph mode.
+
+The optional argument, number, is used to change the default
+footnote number.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Input.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Input.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..667be91ff1 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Input.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Splitting the Input
+############################################################
+
+A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than
+putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more
+efficient to split it into several smaller ones.
+Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one
+that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when
+you run LaTeX.
+
+ \include: Conditionally include a file.
+ \includeonly: Determine which files are included.
+ \input: Unconditionally include a file.
+
+############################################################
+ \include ::include::
+############################################################
+\include{file}
+The \include command is used in conjunction with the
+\includeonly command for selective inclusion of files. The
+file argument is the first name of a file, denoting `file.tex'.
+If file is one the file names in the file list of the
+\includeonly command or if there is no \includeonly command,
+the \include command is equivalent to
+
+ \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+
+except that if the file `file.tex' does not exist, then a
+warning message rather than an error is produced. If the file
+is not in the file list, the \include command is equivalent
+to \clearpage.
+
+The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a
+file read by another \include command.
+############################################################
+ \includeonly ::includeonly::
+############################################################
+\includeonly{file_list}
+The \includeonly command controls which files will be read
+in by an \include command. file_list should be a
+comma-separated list of filenames. Each filename must match
+exactly a filename specified in a \include command. This
+command can only appear in the preamble.
+############################################################
+ \input ::input::
+############################################################
+\input{file}
+The \input command causes the indicated file to be read and
+processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in
+the current file at that point. The file name may be a
+complete file name with extension or just a first name, in
+which case the file `file.tex' is used.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Layout.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Layout.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6408324b11 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Layout.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Layout
+############################################################
+
+Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout
+of the page.
+
+ \flushbottom: Make all text pages the same height.
+ \onecolumn: Use one-column layout.
+ \raggedbottom: Allow text pages of differing height.
+ \twocolumn: Use two-column layout.
+
+############################################################
+ \flushbottom ::flushbottom::
+############################################################
+The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same
+height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill
+out the page. This is the standard if twocolumn mode is
+selected.
+############################################################
+ \onecolumn ::onecolumn::
+############################################################
+The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+single-column output.
+############################################################
+ \raggedbottom ::raggedbottom::
+############################################################
+The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the height of
+the text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
+############################################################
+ \twocolumn ::twocolumn::
+############################################################
+\twocolumn[text]
+The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+two-column output. If the optional text argument is present,
+it is typeset in one-column mode.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Lengths.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Lengths.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..316439178d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Lengths.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@
+############################################################
+Lengths
+############################################################
+
+A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take
+a length as an argument.
+
+ \newlength: Define a new length.
+ \setlength: Set the value of a length.
+ \addtolength: Add a quantity to a length.
+ \settodepth: Set a length to the depth of something.
+ \settoheight: Set a length to the height of something.
+ \settowidth: Set a length to the width of something.
+ Predefined lengths: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+
+############################################################
+ \newlength ::newlength::
+############################################################
+\newlength{\gnat}
+The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument, \gnat,
+as a length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a
+\gnat command already exists.
+############################################################
+ \setlength ::setlength::
+############################################################
+\setlength{\gnat}{length}
+The \setlength command is used to set the value of a length
+command. The length argument can be expressed in any terms
+of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (in),
+millimetres (mm), points (pt), etc.
+############################################################
+ \addtolength ::addtolength::
+############################################################
+\addtolength{\gnat}{length}
+The \addtolength command increments a "length command" by the
+amount specified in the length argument. It can be a negative
+amount.
+############################################################
+ \settodepth ::settodepth::
+############################################################
+\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the depth of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settoheight ::settoheight::
+############################################################
+\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
+The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the height of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settowidth ::settowidth::
+############################################################
+\settowidth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settowidth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the width of the text argument.
+
+Predefined lengths
+
+ \width ::width::
+ \height ::height::
+ \depth ::depth::
+ \totalheight ::totalheight::
+
+These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands
+
+See section Spaces & Boxes.
+
+They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box.
+\totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the
+text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Letters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Letters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9facb5ff98 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Letters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Letters
+############################################################
+You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+business. The letter document class is designed to make a
+number of letters at once, although you can make just one if
+you so desire.
+
+Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the
+other document classes, i.e., you must have the following
+commands as a minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+ \end{document}
+
+Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the
+name and address of the recipient. For example, you might
+have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+ \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text
+of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input.
+Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not
+work. The letter closes with a \closing command.
+After the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc
+command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar
+\encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands,
+use \\ to separate the items.
+
+These commands are used with the letter class:
+
+ \address: Your return address.
+ \cc: Cc list.
+ \closing: Saying goodbye.
+ \encl: List of enclosed material.
+ \location: Your organisation's address.
+ \makelabels: Making address labels.
+ \name: Your name, for the return address.
+ \opening: Saying hello.
+ \ps: Adding a postscript.
+ \signature: Your signature.
+ \startbreaks: Allow page breaks.
+ \stopbreaks: Disallow page breaks.
+ \telephone: Your phone number.
+
+############################################################
+ \address ::address::
+############################################################
+\address{Return address}
+The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated
+by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration,
+then the letter will be formatted for copying onto your
+organisation's standard letterhead. (See section Overview of
+LaTeX and Local Guide, for details on your local implementation).
+If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be
+formatted as a personal letter.
+############################################################
+ \cc ::cc::
+############################################################
+\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}
+Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+name is printed on a separate line.
+############################################################
+ \closing ::closing::
+############################################################
+\closing{text}
+The letter closes with a \closing command, i.e.,
+ \closing{Best Regards,}
+\encl
+\encl{CV\\Certificates}
+Generate a list of enclosed material.
+############################################################
+ \location ::location::
+############################################################
+\location{address}
+This modifies your organisation's standard address. This
+only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+############################################################
+ \makelabels ::makelabels::
+############################################################
+\makelabels{number}
+If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create
+a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before
+the letters.
+############################################################
+ \name ::name::
+############################################################
+\name{June Davenport}
+Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with
+the return address.
+############################################################
+ \opening ::opening::
+############################################################
+\opening{text}
+The letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory
+argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your
+letter, i.e.,
+ \opening{Dear Joe,}
+############################################################
+ \ps ::ps::
+############################################################
+\ps
+Use this command before a postscript.
+############################################################
+ \signature ::sinature::
+############################################################
+\signature{Harvey Swick}
+Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+underneath the space for your signature. Items that should
+go on separate lines should be separated by \\ commands.
+############################################################
+ \startbreaks ::startbreaks::
+############################################################
+\startbreaks
+Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again.
+############################################################
+ \stopbreaks ::stopbreaks::
+############################################################
+\stopbreaks
+Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs.
+############################################################
+ \telephone ::telephone::
+############################################################
+\telephone{number}
+This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Margin.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Margin.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c7ea4a45b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Margin.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Margin Notes ::marginpar::reversemarginpar::
+############################################################
+
+The command \marginpar[left]{right} creates a note in the
+margin. The first line will be at the same height as the line
+in the text where the \marginpar occurs.
+When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text
+will be placed
+ 1. in the right margin for one-sided layout
+ 2. in the outside margin for two-sided layout
+ 3. in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+ 4. By issuing the command \reversemarginpar, you can
+ force the marginal notes to go into the opposite
+ (inside) margin.
+When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left
+margin, and right is used for the right margin.
+The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can
+enable hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a
+\hspace{0pt} command.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Math.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Math.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ad4cb39a21 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Math.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Math Formulae ::(::)::[::]::$::
+############################################################
+
+There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+ math For Formulae that appear right in the text.
+ displaymath For Formulae that appear on their own line.
+ equation The same as the displaymath environment
+ except that it adds an equation number in
+ the right margin.
+The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only
+in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are
+used so often that they have the following short forms:
+
+ \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+ \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even
+shorter form:
+
+ $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+ Subscripts & Superscripts: Also known as exponent or index.
+ Math Symbols: Various mathematical squiggles.
+ Spacing in Math Mode: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+ Math Miscellany: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+
+############################################################
+ Subscripts & Superscripts ::_::^::
+############################################################
+To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just
+type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
+^{exp}. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
+that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right
+thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript.
+############################################################
+ Math Symbols
+############################################################
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely
+to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in
+math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source,
+you will get the symbol in your output.
+############################################################
+ Spacing in Math Mode
+############################################################
+In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and
+puts in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats
+mathematics the way it's done in mathematics texts. If you
+want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following four
+commands for use in math mode:
+
+ \; - a thick space ::;::
+ \: - a medium space :::::
+ \, - a thin space ::,::
+ \! - a negative thin space ::!::
+
+############################################################
+ Math Miscellany
+############################################################
+ \cdots ::cdots::
+Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to
+the centre of the line. eg.
+ \ddots ::ddots::
+Produces a diagonal ellipsis. eg.
+ \frac{num}{den} ::frac::
+Produces the fraction num divided by den. eg.
+ \ldots ::ldots::
+Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode, not
+just math mode. eg.
+ \overbrace{text} ::overbrace::
+Generates a brace over text. eg.
+ \overline{text} ::overline::
+Causes the argument text to be overlined. eg.
+ \sqrt[root]{arg} ::sqrt::
+Produces the square root of its argument. The optional argument,
+root, determines what root to produce, i.e., the cube root
+of x+y would be typed
+as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. eg.
+ \underbrace{text} ::underbrace::
+Generates text with a brace underneath. eg.
+ \underline{text} ::underline::
+Causes the argument text to be underlined. This command can
+also be used in paragraph and LR modes. eg.
+ \vdots ::vdots::
+Produces a vertical ellipsis. eg.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Modes.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Modes.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..55b108b597 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Modes.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Modes
+############################################################
+When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one
+of three modes:
+
+ Paragraph mode
+ Math mode
+ Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
+LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase
+to a different level, though not all level changes produce
+mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or
+leaving an environment, or when LaTeX is processing the
+argument of certain text-producing commands.
+
+"Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is
+in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks
+your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX
+is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula.
+In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output
+that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between
+them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from
+left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if
+you put a hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep
+typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and
+then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit
+on the line.
+
+LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox
+command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the
+box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
+formula in the box. There are also several text-producing
+commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in
+paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+environments will be called a parbox. When LaTeX is in paragraph
+mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner paragraph
+mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
+called "outer paragraph mode".
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Overview.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Overview.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ecb11b9a2d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Overview.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+############################################################
+
+The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+formatted. It produces at least three files as output:
+
+ 1. A "Device Independent", or `.dvi' file. This contains
+commands that can be translated into commands for a variety
+of output devices. You can view the output of LaTeX by using
+a program such as xdvi, which actually uses the `.dvi' file.
+ 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered
+in the input file.
+ 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX
+itself, for things such as sectioning.
+
+For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should
+consult The TeXbook by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9,
+published jointly by the American Mathematical Society
+and Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
+
+For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
+ LaTeX: A Document Preparation System, by Leslie Lamport,
+Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
+ The LaTeX Companion, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach,
+and Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
+
+############################################################
+Commands
+############################################################
+
+A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists
+of a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or
+(b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets,
+[], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {},
+are required.
+
+NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower
+case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
+
+ Counters: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+ Cross References: Automatic referencing.
+ Definitions: Define your own commands etc.
+ Document Classes: Some of the various classes available.
+ Environments: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+ Footnotes: How to produce footnotes.
+ Layout: Controlling the page layout.
+ Lengths: The length commands.
+ Letters: The letter class.
+ Line & Page Breaking: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
+ Making Paragraphs: Paragraph commands.
+ Margin Notes: Putting remarks in the margin.
+ Math Formulae: How to create mathematical formulae.
+ Modes: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+ Page Styles: Various styles of page layout.
+ Sectioning: How to section properly.
+ Spaces & Boxes: All the associated commands.
+ Special Characters: Special reserved characters.
+ Splitting the Input: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+ Starting & Ending: The formal start & end layouts.
+ Table of Contents: How to create a table of contents.
+ Terminal Input/Output: User interaction.
+ Typefaces: Such as bold, italics etc.
+
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Paragraphs.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Paragraphs.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..168478799d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Paragraphs.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Making Paragraphs
+############################################################
+
+A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines
+-- lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not
+appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in
+math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command.
+
+ \indent: Indent this paragraph.
+ \noindent: Do not indent this paragraph.
+ \par: Another way of writing a blank line.
+
+############################################################
+ \indent ::indent:
+############################################################
+\indent
+This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width
+of the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph
+indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+############################################################
+ \noindent ::noindent::
+############################################################
+\noindent
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses
+the paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the
+middle of a paragraph.
+############################################################
+ \par ::par::
+############################################################
+Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+environment definitions easier to read.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Parameters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Parameters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f4a63ed27 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Parameters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,508 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Parameters
+############################################################
+
+The input file specification indicates the file to be
+formatted; TeX uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If
+you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the
+terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string
+as a parameter to the command; e.g.
+
+ latex "\scrollmode\input foo.tex"
+
+will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error.
+Output files are always created in the current directory.
+When you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the
+output names on the file specification associated with the
+logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically texput.log.
+############################################################
+Concept Index
+a
+Accessing any character of a font
+Aligning Equations
+Appendix, creating
+Arrays, math
+article class
+Author, for titlepage
+b
+Bibliography, creating (automatically)
+Bibliography, creating (manually)
+BibTeX, using
+book class
+Boxes
+c
+Cc list
+Centering text
+Centering text, environment for
+Characters, reserved
+Characters, special
+Classes of document
+Commands, defining new ones
+Computer programs, typesetting
+Counters, a list of
+Counters, creating
+Counters, getting the value of
+Counters, setting
+Creating letters
+Creating pictures
+Creating tables
+Cross referencing
+Cross referencing using page number
+Cross referencing using section number
+d
+Date, for titlepage
+Defining a new command
+Defining new environments
+Defining new fonts
+Defining new theorems
+Displaying quoted text
+Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
+Document Classes
+e
+Enclosed material
+Ending & Starting
+Enlarge current page
+Environments
+Environments, defining
+Equations, aligning
+Equations, environment for
+exponent
+f
+Figures, footnotes in
+Flushing a page
+Font commands, low-level
+Font Sizes
+Font Styles
+Fonts
+Fonts, new commands for
+Footnotes in figures
+Footnotes, creating
+Formatting Text
+Formulae, environment for
+Formulae, maths
+g
+Global options
+Greek letters
+h
+Hyphenation, defining
+Hyphenation, forcing
+i
+Indent, forcing
+Indent, suppressing
+Input file, splitting
+Input/Output
+Inserting figures
+j
+Justification, ragged left
+Justification, ragged right
+l
+Labelled lists, creating
+LaTeX overview
+Layout commands
+Left-justifying text
+Left-justifying text, environment for
+Left-to-right mode
+Lengths, adding to
+Lengths, defining a new
+Lengths, defining and using
+Lengths, predefined
+Lengths, setting value of
+letter class
+Letters
+Letters, ending
+Letters, starting
+Line Breaking
+Line breaks
+Lines in tables
+Lining text up in columns using tab stops
+Lining text up in tables
+Lists of items
+Lists of items, generic
+Lists of items, numbered
+Loading additional packages
+Low-level font commands
+LR mode
+m
+Making a title page
+Making paragraphs
+Margin Notes
+Math Formulae
+Math mode
+Math mode, entering
+Math mode, spacing
+Maths Miscellany
+Maths symbols
+Minipage, creating a
+Modes
+Multicolumn text
+n
+New line, starting
+New line, starting (paragraph mode)
+New Page
+Notes in the margin
+o
+Options, global
+Overview of LaTeX
+p
+Packages, loading
+Page break, forcing
+Page Breaking
+Page Formatting
+Page numbering
+Page styles
+Paragraph mode
+Paragraph, starting a new
+Paragraphs
+Pictures, creating
+Poetry, an environment for
+Predefined lengths
+Programs, typesetting
+q
+Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
+Quoted text, displaying
+r
+Ragged left text
+Ragged left text, environment for
+Ragged right text
+Ragged right text, environment for
+Remarks in the margin
+report class
+Reserved Characters
+Right-justifying text
+Right-justifying text, environment for
+s
+Sectioning
+Simulating typed text
+Sizes of text
+Space, inserting vertical
+Spaces
+Spacing, within Math mode
+Special Characters
+Splitting the input file
+Starting & Ending
+Starting on a right-hand page
+Styles of text
+Styles, page
+Subscript
+Superscript
+Symbols
+t
+Tab stops, using
+Table of Contents, creating
+Tables, creating
+Terminal Input/Output
+Thanks, for titlepage
+Theorems, defining
+Theorems, typesetting
+Title making
+Title pages, creating
+Title, for titlepage
+Typed text, simulating
+Typeface Sizes
+Typeface Styles
+Typefaces
+u
+Using BibTeX
+v
+Variables, a list of
+Verbatim text
+Vertical space, inserting
+Command Index
+$
+$
+\
+\!
+\' (tabbing)
+\(
+\)
+\+
+\,
+\- (hyphenation)
+\- (tabbing)
+\;
+\<
+\=
+\>
+\[
+\\
+\]
+\` (tabbing)
+\a
+\addcontentsline
+\address
+\addtocontents
+\addtocounter
+\addtolength
+\addvspace
+\alph
+\Alph
+\appendix
+\arabic
+\author
+\backslash
+\begin
+\bfseries
+\bibitem
+\bibliography
+\bibliographystyle
+\bigskip
+\caption
+\cc
+\cdots
+\centering
+\chapter
+\circle
+\cite
+\cleardoublepage
+\clearpage
+\cline
+\closing
+\COLON
+\dashbox
+\date
+\ddots
+\depth
+\documentclass
+\dotfill
+\emph
+\encl
+\end
+\enlargethispage
+\fbox
+\flushbottom
+\fnsymbol
+\fontencoding
+\fontfamily
+\fontseries
+\fontshape
+\fontsize
+\footnote
+\footnotemark
+\footnotesize
+\footnotetext
+\frac
+\frame
+\framebox, \framebox
+\fussy
+\height
+\hfill
+\hline
+\hrulefill
+\hspace
+\Huge
+\huge
+\hyphenation
+\include
+\includeonly
+\indent
+\input
+\item
+\itshape
+\kill
+\label
+\large
+\LARGE
+\Large
+\ldots
+\lefteqn
+\line
+\linebreak
+\linethickness
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+\location
+\makebox
+\makebox (picture)
+\makelabels
+\maketitle
+\markboth
+\markright
+\mathbf
+\mathcal
+\mathit
+\mathnormal
+\mathrm
+\mathsf
+\mathtt
+\mathversion
+\mbox
+\mdseries
+\medskip
+\multicolumn
+\multiput
+\name
+\newcommand
+\newcounter
+\newenvironment
+\newfont
+\newlength
+\newline
+\newpage
+\newsavebox
+\newtheorem
+\nocite
+\nofiles
+\noindent
+\nolinebreak
+\nopagebreak
+\normalfont
+\normalsize
+\onecolumn
+\opening
+\oval
+\overbrace
+\overline
+\pagebreak
+\pagenumbering
+\pageref
+\pagestyle
+\par
+\paragraph
+\parbox
+\ps
+\pushtabs, \pushtabs
+\put
+\raggedbottom
+\raggedleft
+\raggedright
+\raisebox
+\ref
+\refstepcounter
+\rmfamily
+\roman
+\Roman
+\rule
+\savebox
+\sbox
+\scriptsize
+\scshape
+\selectfont
+\setcounter
+\setlength
+\settodepth
+\settoheight
+\settowidth
+\sffamily
+\shortstack
+\signature
+\sloppy
+\slshape
+\small
+\smallskip
+\sqrt
+\startbreaks
+\stepcounter
+\stopbreaks
+\subparagraph
+\subsection
+\subsubsection
+\symbol
+\tableofcontents
+\telephone
+\textbf
+\textit
+\textmd
+\textnormal
+\textrm
+\textsc
+\textsf
+\textsl
+\texttt
+\textup
+\thanks
+\thispagestyle
+\tiny
+\title
+\today
+\totalheight
+\ttfamily
+\twocolumn
+\typein
+\typeout
+\underbrace
+\underline
+\upshape
+\usebox
+\usecounter
+\usefont
+\usepackage
+\value
+\vdots
+\vector
+\verb
+\vfill
+\vline
+\vspace
+\width
+^
+^
+_
+_
+a
+array
+c
+center
+d
+description
+e
+enumerate
+eqnarray
+equation
+f
+figure
+flushleft
+flushright
+i
+itemize
+l
+letter
+list
+lrbox
+m
+minipage
+p
+picture
+q
+quotation
+quote
+t
+tabbing
+table
+tabular
+thebibliography
+theorem
+titlepage
+v
+verbatim
+verse
+
+
+
+This document was generated on 8 July 1996 using the texi2html translator
+version 1.50.
+
+
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/References.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/References.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c623dbc9a --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/References.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Cross References
+############################################################
+
+One reason for numbering things like figures and equations
+is to refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more
+details."
+
+\label: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+\pageref: Refer to a page number.
+\ref: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+############################################################
+ \label ::label::
+############################################################
+\label{key}
+A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
+key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
+inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the key.
+
+A key can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+punctuation characters.
+
+Upper and lowercase letters are different.
+
+To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name,
+it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
+ cha for chapters
+ sec for lower-level sectioning commands
+ fig for figures
+ tab for tables
+ eq for equations
+Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:bandersnatch.
+############################################################
+ \pageref ::pageref::
+############################################################
+\pageref{key}
+The \pageref command produces the page number of the place
+in the text where the corresponding \label command appears.
+ie. where \label{key} appears.
+############################################################
+ \ref ::ref::
+############################################################
+\ref{key}
+The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation number, ... of the corresponding \label command.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Sectioning.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Sectioning.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3fa739b871 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Sectioning.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Sectioning
+############################################################
+
+Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+into units.
+
+ \part ::part::
+ \chapter (report and book class only) ::chapter::
+ \section ::section::
+ \subsection ::subsection::
+ \subsubsection ::subsubsection::
+ \paragraph ::paragraph::
+ \subparagraph ::subparagraph::
+
+All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
+
+ \chapter[optional]{title}
+
+In addition to providing the heading in the text, the
+mandatory argument of the sectioning command can appear in
+two other places:
+
+ 1. The table of contents
+ 2. The running head at the top of the page
+
+You may not want the same thing to appear in these other
+two places as appears in the text heading. To handle this
+situation, the sectioning commands have an optional
+argument that provides the text for these other two
+purposes.
+
+All sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title,
+but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the
+table of contents.
+############################################################
+ \appendix ::appendix::
+############################################################
+The \appendix command changes the way sectional units are
+numbered. The \appendix command generates no text and does
+not affect the numbering of parts.
+
+The normal use of this command is something like
+
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Spaces.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Spaces.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..30fc6ed246 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Spaces.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Spaces & Boxes
+############################################################
+
+All the predefined length parameters See section Predefined
+lengths can be used in the arguments of the box-making
+commands.
+
+Horizontal space
+
+ \dotfill: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+ \hfill: Stretchable horizontal space.
+ \hrulefill: Stretchable horizontal rule.
+ \hspace: Fixed horizontal space. Vertical space
+ \addvspace: Fixed vertical space.
+ \bigskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \medskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \smallskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \vfill: Stretchable vertical space.
+ \vspace: Fixed vertical space. Boxes
+ \fbox: Framebox.
+ \framebox: Framebox, adjustable position.
+ lrbox: An environment like \sbox.
+ \makebox: Box, adjustable position.
+ \mbox: Box.
+ \newsavebox: Declare a name for saving a box.
+ \parbox: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+ \raisebox: Raise or lower text.
+ \rule: Lines and squares.
+ \savebox: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+ \sbox: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+ \usebox: Print saved text.
+
+############################################################
+ \dotfill ::dotfill::
+############################################################
+The \dotfill command produces a "rubber length" that produces
+dots instead of just spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hfill ::hfill::
+############################################################
+The \hfill fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hrulefill ::hrulefill::
+############################################################
+The \hrulefill fill command produces a "rubber length" which
+can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a
+horizontal rule.
+############################################################
+ \hspace ::hspace::
+############################################################
+\hspace[*]{length}
+The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \hspace command. Adding negative space
+is like backspacing.
+
+LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a
+line. If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include
+the optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \addvspace ::addvspace::
+############################################################
+\addvspace{length}
+The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of
+height length. However, if vertical space has already been
+added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace
+command, then this command will not add more space than
+needed to make the natural length of the total vertical space
+equal to length.
+############################################################
+ \bigskip ::bigskip::
+############################################################
+The \bigskip command is equivalent to \vspace{bigskipamount}
+where bigskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \medskip ::medskip::
+############################################################
+The \medskip command is equivalent to \vspace{medskipamount}
+where medskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \smallskip ::smallskip::
+############################################################
+\smallskip
+The \smallskip command is equivalent to \vspace{smallskipamount}
+where smallskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \vfill ::vfill::
+############################################################
+The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+stretch or shrink vertically.
+############################################################
+ \vspace ::vspace::
+############################################################
+\vspace[*]{length}
+The \vspace command adds vertical space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \vspace command.
+
+LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page.
+If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the
+optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \fbox ::fbox::
+############################################################
+\fbox{text}
+The \fbox command is exactly the same as the \mbox command,
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
+that it creates.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox[width][position]{text}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the
+contents of the box.
+############################################################
+ lrbox ::lrbox::
+############################################################
+\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
+This is the environment form of \sbox.
+The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd,
+which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox[width][position]{text}
+The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain
+the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the
+optional width argument. The position of the text within the
+box is determined by the optional position argument.
+
+ c -- centred (default)
+ l -- flushleft
+ r -- flushright
+ s -- stretch from left to right margin. The text must
+ contain stretchable space for this to work.
+
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \mbox ::mbox::
+############################################################
+\mbox{text}
+The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+text created by its argument.
+Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
+############################################################
+ \newsavebox ::newsavebox::
+############################################################
+\newsavebox{cmd}
+Declares cmd, which must be a command name that is not already
+defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
+############################################################
+ \parbox ::parbox::
+############################################################
+\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph
+mode. The \parbox has two mandatory arguments:
+
+ width - specifies the width of the parbox, and
+ text - the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
+LaTeX will position a parbox so its centre lines up with the
+centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows
+you to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox
+(default is top). If the height argument is not given, the
+box will have the natural height of the text.
+
+The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text
+inside the box. If it is not specified, position is used.
+
+ t -- text is placed at the top of the box.
+ c -- text is centred in the box.
+ b -- text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+ s -- stretch vertically. The text must contain
+ vertically stretchable space for this to work.
+
+A \parbox command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
+of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't
+use any of the paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox
+argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing
+a paragraph-making environment, you should use a minipage
+environment
+See section minipage.
+############################################################
+ \raisebox ::raisebox::
+############################################################
+\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}
+The \raisebox command is used to raise or lower text. The
+first mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to
+be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). The text
+itself is processed in LR mode.
+
+Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+different size than it really does - or a different size
+than LaTeX would normally think it has. The \raisebox
+command lets you tell LaTeX how tall it is. The first
+optional argument, extend-above, makes LaTeX think that the
+text extends above the line by the amount specified. The
+second optional argument, extend-below, makes LaTeX think
+that the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
+############################################################
+ \rule ::rule::
+############################################################
+\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}
+The \rule command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
+arguments are defined as follows:
+
+ raise-height - specifies how high to raise the rule
+ (optional)
+ width - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
+ thickness - specifies the thickness of the rule
+ (mandatory)
+
+############################################################
+ \savebox ::savebox::
+############################################################
+\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
+This command typeset text in a box just as for \makebox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \sbox ::sbox::
+############################################################
+\sbox{text}
+This commands typeset text in a box just as for \mbox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \usebox ::usebox::
+############################################################
+\usebox{cmd}
+Prints the box most recently saved in bin cmd by a \savebox
+command.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Starting.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Starting.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca09d87751 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Starting.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Starting & Ending ::document::
+############################################################
+
+Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{class}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+ \end{document}
+
+where the class selected is one of the valid classes for
+LaTeX. See section
+
+Document Classes (and see section Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide), for details of the various document classes
+available locally.
+
+You may include other LaTeX commands between the
+\documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (i.e., in
+the `preamble').
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Styles.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Styles.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9fc42f66e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Styles.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Page Styles
+############################################################
+
+The \documentclass command determines the size and position
+of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what
+goes in them.
+
+ \maketitle: Generate a title page.
+ \pagenumbering: Set the style used for page numbers.
+ \pagestyle: Change the headings/footings style.
+ \thispagestyle: Change the headings/footings style for
+ this page.
+
+############################################################
+ \maketitle ::maketitle::
+############################################################
+\maketitle
+The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title
+page - except in the article class, where the title normally
+goes at the top of the first page.
+Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+following declarations:
+
+See section Page Styles for the commands to give the information.
+
+ \author: Who wrote this stuff?
+ \date: The date the document was created.
+ \thanks: A special form of footnote.
+ \title: How to set the document title.
+
+############################################################
+ \author ::author::
+############################################################
+\author{names}
+The \author command declares the author(s), where names is a
+list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate
+lines within a single author's entry -- for example, to give
+the author's institution or address.
+############################################################
+ \date ::date::
+############################################################
+\date{text}
+The \date command declares text to be the document's date.
+With no \date command, the current date is used.
+############################################################
+ \thanks ::thanks::
+############################################################
+\thanks{text}
+The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title.
+############################################################
+ \title ::title::
+############################################################
+\title{text}
+The \title command declares text to be the title. Use \\ to
+tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
+############################################################
+ \pagenumbering ::pagenumbering::
+############################################################
+\pagenumbering{num_style}
+Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+num_style are:
+
+ arabic - Arabic numerals
+ roman - Lowercase Roman numerals
+ Roman - Uppercase Roman numerals
+ alph - Lowercase letters
+ Alph - Uppercase letters
+
+############################################################
+ \pagestyle ::pagestyle::
+############################################################
+\pagestyle{option}
+The \pagestyle command changes the style from the current
+page on throughout the remainder of your document.
+The valid options are:
+
+ plain - Just a plain page number.
+ empty - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
+ headings - Puts running headings on each page. The
+ document style specifies what goes in the headings.
+ myheadings - You specify what is to go in the heading
+ with the \markboth or the \markright commands.
+
+ \markboth: Set left and right headings.
+ \markright: Set right heading only.
+
+############################################################
+ \markboth ::markboth::
+############################################################
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+The \markboth command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting both the left and the right
+heading. You should note that a "left-hand heading" is
+generated by the last \markboth command before the end of
+the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated by the
+first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if
+there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \markright ::markright::
+############################################################
+\markright{right head}
+The \markright command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting the right heading, leaving the
+left heading unchanged. You should note that a "left-hand
+heading" is generated by the last \markboth command before
+the end of the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated
+by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page
+if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \thispagestyle ::thispagestyle::
+############################################################
+\thispagestyle{option}
+The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the
+\pagestyle command except that it changes the style for the
+current page only.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Terminal.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Terminal.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c0b6eb3ae7 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Terminal.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Terminal Input/Output
+############################################################
+
+ \typein: Read text from the terminal.
+ \typeout: Write text to the terminal.
+
+############################################################
+ \typein ::typein::
+############################################################
+\typein[cmd]{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait
+for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the
+cmd argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if
+it had been included in the input file in place of the
+\typein command. If the cmd argument is present, it must be
+a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined
+to be the typed input.
+############################################################
+ \typeout ::typeout::
+############################################################
+\typeout{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in
+msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand are
+replaced by their definitions before being printed.
+
+LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg.
+A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed.
+A ^^J in msg prints a newline.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Typefaces.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Typefaces.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..25179a894d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/Typefaces.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Typefaces
+############################################################
+
+The typeface is specified by giving the "size" and "style".
+A typeface is also called a "font".
+
+ Styles: Select roman, italics etc.
+ Sizes: Select point size.
+ Low-level font commands: Commands for wizards.
+
+############################################################
+ Styles
+############################################################
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+These commands are used like \textit{italics text}. The
+corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form",
+which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the
+current group.
+
+The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+\sffamily\bfseries to get sans serif boldface.
+
+You can also use the environment form of the declaration
+forms; e.g. \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}.
+
+ \textrm (\rmfamily) ::textrm::rmfamily::
+Roman.
+ \textit (\itshape) ::textit::itshape::
+ \emph ::emph::
+Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
+ \textmd (\mdseries) ::textmd::mdseries::
+Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
+ \textbf (\bfseries) ::textbf::bfseries::
+Boldface.
+ \textup (\upshape) ::textup::upshape::
+Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ \textsl (\slshape) ::textsl::slshape::
+Slanted.
+ \textsf (\sffamily) ::textsf::sffamily::
+Sans serif.
+ \textsc (\scshape) ::textsc::scshape::
+Small caps.
+ \texttt (\ttfamily) ::texttt::ttfamily::
+Typewriter.
+ \textnormal (\normalfont) ::textnormal::normalfont::
+Main document font.
+ \mathrm ::mathrm::
+Roman, for use in math mode.
+ \mathbf ::mathbf::
+Boldface, for use in math mode.
+ \mathsf ::mathsf::
+Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+ \mathtt ::mathtt::
+Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+ \mathit ::mathit::
+Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names
+with several letters.
+ \mathnormal ::mathnormal::
+For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style
+declaration.
+ \mathcal ::mathcal::
+`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+::mathversion::
+In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+\mathversion{normal} restores the default.
+
+############################################################
+ Sizes
+############################################################
+The following standard type size commands are supported by
+LaTeX. The commands as listed here are "declaration forms".
+The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type
+style command or the end of the current group.
+
+You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}.
+
+ \tiny ::tiny::
+ \scriptsize ::scriptsize::
+ \footnotesize ::footnotesize::
+ \small ::small::
+ \normalsize (default) ::normalsize::
+ \large ::large::
+ \Large ::Large::
+ \LARGE ::LARGE::
+ \huge ::huge::
+ \Huge ::Huge::
+
+############################################################
+ Low-level font commands
+############################################################
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros
+and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of
+the available ones. For full details, you should consult
+Chapter 7 of The LaTeX Companion.
+
+ \fontencoding{enc} ::fontencoding::
+
+Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1.
+
+ \fontfamily{family} ::fontfamily::
+
+Select font family. Valid families include:
+ cmr for Computer Modern Roman
+ cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter
+and numerous others.
+
+ \fontseries{series} ::fontseries::
+
+Select font series. Valid series include:
+ m Medium (normal)
+ b Bold
+ c Condensed
+ bc Bold condensed
+ bx Bold extended
+and various other combinations.
+
+ \fontshape{shape} ::fontshape::
+
+Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+ n Upright (normal)
+ it Italic
+ sl Slanted (oblique)
+ sc Small caps
+ ui Upright italics
+ ol Outline
+The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
+
+ \fontsize{size}{skip} ::fontsize::
+
+Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to
+switch to; the second is the \baselineskip to use. The unit
+of both parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that
+the baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size.
+
+ \selectfont ::selectfont::
+
+The changes made by calling the four font commands described
+above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called.
+
+ \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} ::usefont::
+
+Equivalent to calling \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries
+and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amscd.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amscd.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d47d278659 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amscd.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amscd.
+\usepackage{amscd} ::amscd::
+
+#################################################################
+diagrams ::CD::
+#################################################################
+subenviroment :
+CD
+example :
+\begin{CD}
+ A @@>>> B @@>>> C
+ D @@AAA E @@VVV F
+ G @@= H @@<<< I
+\end{CD}
+
+enviroment for diagrams
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@>textabove>textbelow>
+
+arrow to the right with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@<textabove<textbelow<
+
+arrow to the left with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@AtextleftAtextrightA
+
+arrow up with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@VtextleftVtextrightV
+
+arrow down with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@=
+
+equal symbol instead of an arrow
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7866cf81ba --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsfonts.
+\usepackage{amsfonts} ::amsfonts::
+
+#################################################################
+fonts
+#################################################################
+\mathbb{text} ::mathbb::
+
+supplies text as mathematical field letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\mathfrak{text} ::mathfrak::
+
+supplies text as fracture letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boldsymbol{symbol} ::boldsymbol::
+
+supplies a bold variant of symbol
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsmath.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsmath.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0b3aaa61f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsmath.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsmath.
+\usepackage{amsmath} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+mathematical subenviroments
+#################################################################
+Subenviroments must be invoked within a mathmatical enviroment.
+for example :
+\[\begin{split} ... \end{split}\]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : split ::split::
+\[\begin{split}
+ a&=b\\
+ c&=d
+\end{split}\]
+
+allows multible formulas with only one number.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : multline ::multline::
+\begin{multine}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{multine}
+
+for breaking one formula into several lines with only one number
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : gather ::gather::
+\begin{gather}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{gather}
+
+
+a group of formulas
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : align ::align::
+\begin{align}
+ a&=b & c&=d \\
+ e&=f & g&=h \\
+ \intertext{and}
+ i&=j & k&=l
+\end{align}
+
+an array of formulas
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+\intertext{text} ::intertext::
+
+allows normal textoutput within this mathmatical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : subequation ::subequation::
+
+mainnumbering gets an additional subnumbering with small letters
+\label{} does not distinguish between subnumbers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : ?matrix
+::matrix::pmatrix::bmatrix::vmatrix::Vmatrix::
+\[\begin{matrix}
+ 1 & 2 & 3 & a \\
+ 4 & 5 & 6 & b \\
+ 7 & 8 & 9 & c
+\end{matrix}\]
+
+produces a matrix
+matrix : without brackets
+pmatrik : with round brackets
+bmatrix : with angular brackets
+vmatrix : with vertical lines
+Vmatrix : with doubled vertical lines
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : cases ::cases::
+\[sgn(x)=\begin{cases}
+ -1 & \forall\ x<0 \\
+ 0 & x=0 \\
+ 1 & \forall\ x>0
+\end{cases}\]
+
+for "Cases" constructions
+#################################################################
+Sonstige Hilfen
+#################################################################
+size of brackets :
+\bigl \bigr little bit larger ::bigl::bigr::
+\Bigl \Bigr faktor 1.5 ::Bigl::Bigr::
+\biggl \biggr faktor 2 ::biggl::biggr::
+\Biggl \Biggr faktor 2.5 ::Biggl::Biggr::
+left right of the formula
+
+behind this should follow one of these bracket forms "(" "|" "[" ... "]" ")"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\substack{ \\ ...\\ \text{Hi} ... \\ } ::substack::
+example :
+\sum_\substack{i=0\\j=1}^\substack{10\\100}
+
+Pushes several lines of indices above or below.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\text{text} ::text::
+
+text within a mathematical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sideset{}{} ::sideset::
+example :
+\sideset{^1_2}{^3_4}\sum
+
+sets indices at the corners ..
+left above 1, left below 2, right above 3 and right below 4
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+xleftarrow{above} ::xleftarrow::xrightarrow::
+xleftarrow[below]{above}
+xrightarrow{above}
+xrightarrow[below]{above}
+
+
+An arrow which adapting the necessary length for displaying a text
+above itself and optionaly below, too.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boxed{formula} ::boxed::
+
+formula with a frame
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareMathOperator{latex-command}{output}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{latex-command}{output}
+::DeclareMathOperator::
+
+
+Allows the declaration of own new mathematical functions like
+ \sin \cos etc.
+* makes it display indices like \lim with in math enviroment.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amssymb.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amssymb.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..11accc23d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amssymb.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#########################################################
+\usepackage{amssymb} ::amssymb::
+#########################################################
+One symbol out of many supplied by the package amssymb.
+#########################################################
+One of the many symbols for which I didn't create a
+picture, because it would have been an endless work
+and boring, too. (mys)
+#########################################################@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsthm.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsthm.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3444018ad0 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/amsthm.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsthm.
+\usepackage{amsthm} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+Erstellen von Theoremen ::newtheorem::
+#################################################################
+
+\newtheorem{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}[latex-synonym2]{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}[section]
+
+Defines a new enviroment latex-synonym which is numbered as
+theorem with name "name" (f.e. axiom).
+\begin{latex-synonym}
+ bla
+\end{latex-synonym}
+for useing the new theorem
+
+* subdues the numbering.
+latex-synonym2 : uses the counter from this theorem
+section : an incretion of this counter would set the
+theorem counter to the value null
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\theoremstyle{style} ::theoremstyle::
+
+style :
+ plain (default)
+ definition
+ remark
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\swapnumbers ::swapnumbers::
+
+numbering on the left side of the theorem@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..489fe6ce70 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Tcltexed | Version 2.3 | 1. Feb. 1999 | Martin Strauss
+::copyright_hlp::
+A plaintexteditor for LaTeX based on scriptlanguage tcl/tk (8.x)
+
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauss
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f994b3e3f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +head 1.2; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.2; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.2 +date 2000.08.15.22.33.43; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next 1.1; + +1.1 +date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc
+@@
+ +1.2 +log +@*** empty log message *** +@ +text +@############################################################
+#::editor_hlp::
+# The Editorwindow
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+What's an Editorwindow ?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+For me a editorwindow is a window where I am able to work on
+a text under Tcltexed. Each editorwindow is assigned to one
+text. Two attributs ar important several editorwindows exist:
+ the focus
+ and the marking of one of them to be the maindocument
+-----
+The focus ownes the editorwindow, which was at last in the
+forground. All actions outside of the editorwindows opened
+will effect only the one having the focus. An Example for
+actions may be "text searching". One way to give one
+editorwindow the focus is by mousebuttons.
+-----
+If you have made on editorwindow a maindocument, all calls
+for extern programms like latex, xdvi, dvips and ghostview
+are directed to this document. In this case only the document
+of the maindocument gets compiled, so it should be executable
+for latex, while the others don't need to. If no editorwindow
+is declared to be the maindocument, each editorwindow
+behaves as if it is the only one.
+-----
+The window consists of the following components :
+ a menubar / popupbar (Only Windows)
+ a buttonbar
+ and an input field.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+usage of the buttonbar
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+From left to right :
+a "picture", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, ispell, Syntax, Quit
+and last but not least a display "L.C. ?.?"
+-----
+ "picture"
+The picture shows you the attributes of the editorwindow.
+If it has the focus it you see a picture of some circular waves.
+If it is colored (yellow/red) it is marked to be the maindocument.
+You can make an editorwindow a maindocument by mouse click
+on the picture. A second click removes the attribute to be
+a maindocument.
+-----
+ Save
+You know this, simply save this document in a file assignend
+to the editorwindow. If there is no file assigned "Save As"
+is executed instead.
+-----
+ Save As
+Save a document into a file you choose and assign
+it the actual editorwindow.
+-----
+ latex
+Executes "Save" for this editorwindow. Only it's document get's saved.
+Then the program latex is executed with the assigned file.
+If a maindocument exists as defined above the file assigned to
+it is executed instead. latex produces the file with extention dvi,
+the error output of latex is piped into the helpwindow of Tcltexed.
+(if there accures an error under unix you must stop latex
+by pressing "q" and "RETURN")
+To make it easier to create an index, with the latex-commands
+\makeindex \index etc. the program makeindex is started automaticly
+if a suiting filename with extension idx exists.
+-----
+ xdvi
+Executes xdvi (or an other viewer) for to view the last latex outputfile.
+Normaly the viewers reload the actual document if you produce
+a new dvi file, so you have to start this only on time.
+-----
+ dvips
+Makes a output for ghostscript printer out of the dvi file.
+The output will be saved into a file with extension ps.
+-----
+ ghostview
+Executes ghostview a viewer for ghostscript files with the last
+dvips outputfile.
+-----
+ ispell
+Executes "Save" for this editorwindow. Only it's document get's saved.
+Then ispell an interactive spell checker is executed and it's output
+reloaded into the editorwindow.
+-----
+ Syntax
+Syntax Highlightning, all textarrays starting with \ are supposed
+to be LaTeX-commands.
+If this command is known it's letters gets green, if not red.
+But be carefull, it doesn't look after the number of brackets behind
+the command. (latex will do that for you !)
+If it's text to be ignored (starting with %), the text get blue.
+For many green marked commands exists a short description.
+-----
+ Quit
+Close this editorwindow. If modified it request's if it realy
+should do so without saving before.
+-----
+ Display
+Shows you the position of the curser (line and row).
+One "line" is here defined as a number of letters follewd
+by a "RETURN", not as the number of real lines displayed by the
+editorwindow.
+If you press this Button, a window opens, with which you can
+change the position of the curser manualy by numbers.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Usage of th menubar / popupbar
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The menubar exists only if you use Windows and tcl/tk 8.x.
+Menubar and popupbar implement the same functions.
+Pressing the right mousebutton opens the popupbar.
+From top to bottom listed (left to right) :
+Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, Block, + % und - %.
+-----
+ Undo
+For to undo most of your last actions within the text. (I hopfully
+think so) In lack of infinity memory recources you can't undo
+everything.
+-----
+ Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear
+Bearbeitet den mit Maus selektierten Bereich, ratet mal was da
+passiert ... . Die Aktionen sind Windows und X-Window kompatibel.
+(theoretisch)
+-----
+ Spell
+Marks all not right spelled words in your text with a red color.
+-----
+ Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser is within and displays a list of
+words which nearly match this word.
+-----
+ Block
+Makes out of the selected aria a "Block - aria" ala Borland.
+-----
+ + %
+Inserts at the beginning of each selected line %, but only
+if there doesn't exist one.
+-> easy way to mark lines for latex to be ignored
+-----
+ - %
+The other way around as "+ %".
+-----
+ ...
+Looks for LaTeX-command matching with letters between
+the last "\" and the curser.
+Only commands marked under "Options -> packages"
+are listed here.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Usage of the inputfield
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Hey that's the part each editor has, don't ask silly questions.
+(look for Editor-keymap for some key combinations)
+-----
+ Spelling
+If you wanna register a word as right spelled, you have to set
+the curser on it and make a double click on the left button of
+your mouse.
+-----
+Examples for automatical complition of LaTeX-commands
+\fra ---> \frac{}{}
+\enumerate --->
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item
+ \end{enumerate}
+Compiltion of brackets
+{ ---> {}
+$ ---> $$
+-----
+For \begin and \end the name of the enviroment will be inserted
+as below :
+\beg --->
+ \begin{}
+ \end{}
+\bege --->
+ \begin{e}
+ \end{e}
+\begenum --->
+ \begin{enum}
+ \end{enum}
+-----
+If some text is selected by mouse and you press "\"
+than gets this not deleted as usualy done, but gets
+some brackets inserted around the selected text.
+@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision
+@ +text +@d38 1 +a38 1 +a "picture", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, Syntax, Quit
+d82 5 +@ + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0361a6066f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+#::editort_hlp::
+# keyboardmap for editorwindows
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+key bindings from Borland etc :
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block
+ <Control-k><b> Block Begin
+ <Control-k><k> Block End
+ <Control-k><c> Block Copy
+ <Control-k><m> Block Move
+ <Control-k><v> Block Move
+ <Control-k><y> Block Remove
+ <Control-k><%> Block (=> latex ignores this lines)
+ <Control-k><space> Block (opposite of binding above)
+more
+ <F1> Help
+ <F2> Save
+ <F3> Open file
+ <F4> Goto Curser
+ <F9> Excute latex
+ <Control-k><x> Save
+ <Control-k><h> Help
+ <Control-y> remove line
+ <Alt-BackSpace> Undo
+ <Shift-Delete> Cut
+ <Control-Insert> Copy
+ <Shift-Insert> Paste
+ <Control-Delete> Clear
+ <Control-l> Search again
+ <Alt-x> total termination of tcltexed
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Some from me :
+ <Control-w> Listing of all possible complitions
+ of a LaTeX-Command.
+ <Control-d> If the curser is within a known LaTeX-command,
+ tcltexed will search for the next occurrence of the command
+ within the text. If the curser is not within a known
+ LaTeX-command tcltexed will search for the next occurence of
+ \section
+ <Control-u> The same as <Control-d> but tcltexed will search backwards.
+ <Control-b> line breaking for a section
+ <Alt-b> line breaking for current line
+ <Control-B> opposite of <Control-b>
+ <Alt-B> opposite of <Alt-b>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block, Selection and Clipboard are normaly independent :
+ <Control-k><p> Insert from Clipboard
+ <Control-k><g> Copy to Clipboard
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Windows - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Press right mousebutton to open a menu with following entries
+ Cut Cut selected into Clipboard
+ Copy Copy selected into Clipboard
+ Paste insert text from Clipboard
+ Clear Remove selected
+ Block Make selected to Block
+ + % Make text to be ignored by latex
+ - % opposite of above
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Motif - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Press left mousebutton
+ one time Undo selection
+ twice Select whole word
+ trible Select whole line
+ Shift-einfach Change aria of selection
+ Shift-zweifach Complete selection aria to whole words
+ Shift-dreifach Complete selection aria to whole lines
+ Control Change curser position without losing the selection
+Curserkeys (CT)
+ <Shift-CT> Select aria (letters/lines)
+ <Control-CT> Shift Curser in steps
+ <Shift-Control-CT> Select aria (word/paragraph)
+[Up,Down] page up down (ST)
+ <Shift-ST> Select aria (pages)
+[Home,End] line start end (ZT)
+ <Shift-ZT> Select aria (until linestart/-end)
+ <Control-ZT> Shift curser to documentbegin/-end
+ <Shift-Control-ZT> Select aria (until documentbegin/-end)
+sonstige
+ <Shift-slash> Select whole document
+ <Insert> Insert selection
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+emacs-like
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ <Control-a> = Home
+ <Control-b> = Left
+ <Control-d> = Delete
+ <Control-e> = End
+ <Control-f> = Right
+ (<Control-k> other binding)
+ <Control-n> = Up
+ <Control-o> = Return+Left
+ <Control-p> = Down
+ <Control-t>
+ <Control-v> = Page up
+ <Meta-b>
+ <Meta-d>
+ <Meta-f>
+ <Meta-less> Shift Curser to text begin
+ <Meta-greater> Shift Curser to text begin
+ <Meta-Backspace>
+ <Meta-Delete>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/epsf.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/epsf.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..78fe5fb0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/epsf.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+package epsf
+############################################################
+\usepackage{epsf} ::epsf::
+\epsfxsize ::epsfxsize::
+\epsfbox{} ::epsfbox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I don't now how these commands work, you could include
+eps-pictures into your document.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I personaly use the latex2e package graphicx for that
+and it works quite fine.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d630439995 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,449 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@GNU General Public License - GNU Project - Free Software Foundation (FSF)
+::gpl_hlp::
+Table of Contents
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+
+Preamble
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE | Version 2, June 1991
+
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+0.
+ This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+
+1.
+ You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+
+2.
+ You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+
+2.a)
+ You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+2.b)
+ You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+2.c)
+ If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+
+3.
+ You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+
+3.a)
+ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.b)
+ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.c)
+ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+4.
+ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+5.
+ You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+
+6.
+ Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+
+7.
+ If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+8.
+ If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+
+9.
+ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+
+10.
+ If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+NO WARRANTY
+
+
+11.
+ BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+12.
+ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+- one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does. -
+Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+
+
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
+`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
+suits your program.
+
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+
+A copy of
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+
+GNU's home page
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html
+
+FSF & GNU inquiries & questions to
+gnu@@gnu.org"
+Other ways to contact
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html#ContactInfo
+
+Copyright notice above.
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA
+
+Updated:
+16 Feb 1998 tower
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a653cf3b03 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@ Tcltexed a LaTeX-Editor
+
+ !!! Take care, this program is under construction !!!!
+ In the meantime I have worked a lot with this program
+ but should you still find some errors, please contact me.
+ The easiest way is by email : mys@@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+
+ Short introduction :
+ A description of the program as a whole can be found under
+ "Help" - "Tcltexed".
+ It is always useful to try to press <F1>.
+ For all LaTeX-commands (I know) there exists a short description,
+ but I have only translated half of them so far.
+ The keymap is motif-like, emacs-like and joe-like (as in Borland Pascal).
+ Additionally some key-shortcuts of my own exist.
+ If you open an editor window, you will find a tiny picure in the upper
+ left hand corner. If it is coloured (click on it with mouse) this
+ window is marked as the main document.
+ If you click on a picture in the mathematics collection the
+ corresponding LaTeX-command will be inserted in the currently active
+ editor window. (The window where the picture (top left) shows some
+ circular waves)
+ If you insert a LaTeX-command tcltexed tries to complete this command.
+ (i.e. \G could only be \Gamma)
+ If you don't find that useful you can stop this behaviour using the menu
+ options.
+ The row of buttons at the top can be used to start the corresponding
+ programs using the document as source file.
+
+ This program will run on Unix, Linux, Windows 9x, Windows NT etc.
+ I just don't know anyone who will try it on a Macintosh as well ...
+ If you want to try, please contact me.
+
+ All you need to run this program is the script language Tcl/Tk, which
+ you can download for free.
+ You want to use my program? It is already available for "free":
+
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+
+ Questions? Found some errors? Some ideas for future developments?
+ feel free to send an email :
+
+ Martin Strauss
+ mys@@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/sonder.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/sonder.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..01da5add41 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/sonder.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Hae ?
+############################################################
+\today ::today::
+
+insert date of compilation into the document
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX ::LaTeX::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX2e ::LaTeX2e::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX2e
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d6c82f7da8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +head 1.2; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.2; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.2 +date 2000.08.15.21.26.27; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next 1.1; + +1.1 +date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc
+@@
+ +1.2 +log +@*** empty log message *** +@ +text +@############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed stands for tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Tcltexed is seprated into two parts. On one side the windows
+were you could edit a text, as described in "Editor", on
+the other side a lot of functions connected only to the base
+of the program, the main window.
+All actions which should work with a editorwindow will use
+the window which has had at last the focus. A clearer
+definiton of this made in "Editor".
+
+Below I will discribe and list all the functions you could
+start from the main window.
+
+menu items of the main window
+1. File
+ a) New
+Start a new LaTeX-document. There exists a predefined plain
+document within the source of Tcltexed. If the file etc/default.tex
+exists in the path were Tcltexed was installed this file will
+be used as default document.
+ b) Load
+Load a file into the editor ...
+ c) Append
+Append the text of the file at the position of the curser.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Save a text.
+ f) Quit
+Quit Tcltexed. All windows will get closed (if necessary a request
+for saveing the files in work is made)
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Clear the whole text.
+ b) line breaking
+Choose to break lines in the whole text, the current section or the
+current line. Each line which follows a line which ends with "space"
+will be interpreted as a continuition. Befor a line gets broken all
+continuation lines will be appended to it.
+With the last three menu items it is possible to append all continuition
+lines without breaking the whole line after it.
+If there are some spaces at the beginning of the first line, then
+all continuations will have these spaces as first letters.
+ c) Spelling
+Marks all not right spelled words in your current text with a red color.
+ d) add word
+For to register a word as spelled right, you must set
+the curser in the current text within it. To make sense the word
+must be marked to be misspelled ;-), or not ?
+ e) \"a..\ss -> ä..ß
+Translates latex commands for displaying special characters into
+their corresponding characters.
+ f) ä..ß -> \"a..\ss
+Translate none ascii characters into their corresponding latex commands.
+ g) "a.."s -> ä..ß
+Translates latex commands out of package [german]{babel} for displaying
+special characters into their corresponding characters.
+ h) ä..ß -> "a.."s
+Translate none ascii characters into their corresponding latex commands
+out of package [german]{babel}. This format is iutable for
+"ispell -t -d deutsch file.tex"
+ i) Search
+Search and Replace within a text.
+ j) My Own
+Here you can define your own LaTeX-sequences to be inserted into the
+text, if you press the button befor the entry. This definitions
+will besaved if you "Save Options". With the next start of Tcltexed
+this definitions will be the start values.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoBrackets
+If this button is aktivated, each inserted bracket to open ({[$
+will be followed by a bracket to close )}]$.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packages/etc
+Here you could activate several packages for automatical completion
+of it's LaTeX-commands.
+An example for complition :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+The more LaTeX-commands Tcltexed should recognise the later they
+get complited, because they look to similar for Tcltexed.
+ c) language
+Set here your favorite language for texts, buttons and help.
+A change here will only apear with the next start of Tcltexed,
+so you have to save the current options as discribed below.
+ d) font size
+Set font size for the editorwindows.
+ e) Save Options
+Save all configurations made by a user. This configuration
+will be loaded at the beginning of the next start of Tcltexed.
+(The file with the configurations is with unix .tcltexed,
+ with Windows tcltexed.ini . But please don't edit it yourself.
+Configurationfiles of older Tcltexedversion will be ignored
+and later overwriten.)
+
+4. Mathematics
+A gallery of pictures of the ouput of commands of the mathmatical
+enviroments. A press on a pictur will insert the command,
+represented by the picture, on the position of the curser.
+
+5. general
+Like 4. , but other common commands.
+
+6. Help
+ a) Tcltexed
+Under this you will find the description of Tcltexed itself.
+ b) LaTeX
+A index of all LaTeX-commands I have heard of.
+For a lot of LaTeX-commands I have writen a short help.
+ + <Return> + left mousebutton displays the help text
+ right mousebutton insert command
+ a keystroke A-Z a-z forces the list to jumb to commands
+ with this as first letter
+@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision
+@ +text +@d53 13 +a65 4 + e) Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser of the current text is within and
+displays a list of words which nearly match this word.
+ f) Search
+d67 1 +a67 1 + g) My Own
+@ + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt~,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt~,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c171925d1e --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt~,v @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed stands for tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Tcltexed is seprated into two parts. On one side the windows
+were you could edit a text, as described in "Editor", on
+the other side a lot of functions connected only to the base
+of the program, the main window.
+All actions which should work with a editorwindow will use
+the window which has had at last the focus. A clearer
+definiton of this made in "Editor".
+
+Below I will discribe and list all the functions you could
+start from the main window.
+
+menu items of the main window
+1. File
+ a) New
+Start a new LaTeX-document. There exists a predefined plain
+document within the source of Tcltexed. If the file etc/default.tex
+exists in the path were Tcltexed was installed this file will
+be used as default document.
+ b) Load
+Load a file into the editor ...
+ c) Append
+Append the text of the file at the position of the curser.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Save a text.
+ f) Quit
+Quit Tcltexed. All windows will get closed (if necessary a request
+for saveing the files in work is made)
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Clear the whole text.
+ b) line breaking
+Choose to break lines in the whole text, the current section or the
+current line. Each line which follows a line which ends with "space"
+will be interpreted as a continuition. Befor a line gets broken all
+continuition lines will be appended to it.
+With the last three menu items it is possible to append all continuition
+lines without breaking the whole line after it.
+ c) Spelling
+Marks all not right spelled words in your current text with a red color.
+ d) add word
+For to register a word as spelled right, you must set
+the curser in the current text within it. To make sense the word
+must be marked to be misspelled ;-), or not ?
+ e) Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser of the current text is within and
+displays a list of words which nearly match this word.
+ f) Search
+Search and Replace within a text.
+ g) My Own
+Here you can define your own LaTeX-sequences to be inserted into the
+text, if you press the button befor the entry. This definitions
+will besaved if you "Save Options". With the next start of Tcltexed
+this definitions will be the start values.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoBrackets
+If this button is aktivated, each inserted bracket to open ({[$
+will be followed by a bracket to close )}]$.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packages/etc
+Here you could activate several packages for automatical completion
+of it's LaTeX-commands.
+An example for complition :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+The more LaTeX-commands Tcltexed should recognise the later they
+get complited, because they look to similar for Tcltexed.
+ c) language
+Set here your favorite language for texts, buttons and help.
+A change here will only apear with the next start of Tcltexed,
+so you have to save the current options as discribed below.
+ d) font size
+Set font size for the editorwindows.
+ e) Save Options
+Save all configurations made by a user. This configuration
+will be loaded at the beginning of the next start of Tcltexed.
+(The file with the configurations is with unix .tcltexed,
+ with Windows tcltexed.ini . But please don't edit it yourself.
+Configurationfiles of older Tcltexedversion will be ignored
+and later overwriten.)
+
+4. Mathematics
+A gallery of pictures of the ouput of commands of the mathmatical
+enviroments. A press on a pictur will insert the command,
+represented by the picture, on the position of the curser.
+
+5. general
+Like 4. , but other common commands.
+
+6. Help
+ a) Tcltexed
+Under this you will find the description of Tcltexed itself.
+ b) LaTeX
+A index of all LaTeX-commands I have heard of.
+For a lot of LaTeX-commands I have writen a short help.
+ + <Return> + left mousebutton displays the help text
+ right mousebutton insert command
+ a keystroke A-Z a-z forces the list to jumb to commands
+ with this as first letter
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/References.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/References.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..612b4a8392 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/References.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +############################################################
+Cross References
+############################################################
+
+One reason for numbering things like figures and equations
+is to refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more
+details."
+
+\label: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+\pageref: Refer to a page number.
+\ref: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+############################################################
+ \label ::label::
+############################################################
+\label{key}
+A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
+key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
+inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the key.
+
+A key can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+punctuation characters.
+
+Upper and lowercase letters are different.
+
+To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name,
+it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
+ cha for chapters
+ sec for lower-level sectioning commands
+ fig for figures
+ tab for tables
+ eq for equations
+Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:bandersnatch.
+############################################################
+ \pageref ::pageref::
+############################################################
+\pageref{key}
+The \pageref command produces the page number of the place
+in the text where the corresponding \label command appears.
+ie. where \label{key} appears.
+############################################################
+ \ref ::ref::
+############################################################
+\ref{key}
+The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation number, ... of the corresponding \label command.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Sectioning.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Sectioning.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b70df63e72 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Sectioning.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +############################################################
+Sectioning
+############################################################
+
+Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+into units.
+
+ \part ::part::
+ \chapter (report and book class only) ::chapter::
+ \section ::section::
+ \subsection ::subsection::
+ \subsubsection ::subsubsection::
+ \paragraph ::paragraph::
+ \subparagraph ::subparagraph::
+
+All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
+
+ \chapter[optional]{title}
+
+In addition to providing the heading in the text, the
+mandatory argument of the sectioning command can appear in
+two other places:
+
+ 1. The table of contents
+ 2. The running head at the top of the page
+
+You may not want the same thing to appear in these other
+two places as appears in the text heading. To handle this
+situation, the sectioning commands have an optional
+argument that provides the text for these other two
+purposes.
+
+All sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title,
+but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the
+table of contents.
+############################################################
+ \appendix ::appendix::
+############################################################
+The \appendix command changes the way sectional units are
+numbered. The \appendix command generates no text and does
+not affect the numbering of parts.
+
+The normal use of this command is something like
+
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Spaces.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Spaces.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..598574f89c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Spaces.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +############################################################
+Spaces & Boxes
+############################################################
+
+All the predefined length parameters See section Predefined
+lengths can be used in the arguments of the box-making
+commands.
+
+Horizontal space
+
+ \dotfill: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+ \hfill: Stretchable horizontal space.
+ \hrulefill: Stretchable horizontal rule.
+ \hspace: Fixed horizontal space. Vertical space
+ \addvspace: Fixed vertical space.
+ \bigskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \medskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \smallskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \vfill: Stretchable vertical space.
+ \vspace: Fixed vertical space. Boxes
+ \fbox: Framebox.
+ \framebox: Framebox, adjustable position.
+ lrbox: An environment like \sbox.
+ \makebox: Box, adjustable position.
+ \mbox: Box.
+ \newsavebox: Declare a name for saving a box.
+ \parbox: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+ \raisebox: Raise or lower text.
+ \rule: Lines and squares.
+ \savebox: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+ \sbox: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+ \usebox: Print saved text.
+
+############################################################
+ \dotfill ::dotfill::
+############################################################
+The \dotfill command produces a "rubber length" that produces
+dots instead of just spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hfill ::hfill::
+############################################################
+The \hfill fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hrulefill ::hrulefill::
+############################################################
+The \hrulefill fill command produces a "rubber length" which
+can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a
+horizontal rule.
+############################################################
+ \hspace ::hspace::
+############################################################
+\hspace[*]{length}
+The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \hspace command. Adding negative space
+is like backspacing.
+
+LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a
+line. If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include
+the optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \addvspace ::addvspace::
+############################################################
+\addvspace{length}
+The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of
+height length. However, if vertical space has already been
+added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace
+command, then this command will not add more space than
+needed to make the natural length of the total vertical space
+equal to length.
+############################################################
+ \bigskip ::bigskip::
+############################################################
+The \bigskip command is equivalent to \vspace{bigskipamount}
+where bigskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \medskip ::medskip::
+############################################################
+The \medskip command is equivalent to \vspace{medskipamount}
+where medskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \smallskip ::smallskip::
+############################################################
+\smallskip
+The \smallskip command is equivalent to \vspace{smallskipamount}
+where smallskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \vfill ::vfill::
+############################################################
+The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+stretch or shrink vertically.
+############################################################
+ \vspace ::vspace::
+############################################################
+\vspace[*]{length}
+The \vspace command adds vertical space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \vspace command.
+
+LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page.
+If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the
+optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \fbox ::fbox::
+############################################################
+\fbox{text}
+The \fbox command is exactly the same as the \mbox command,
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
+that it creates.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox[width][position]{text}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the
+contents of the box.
+############################################################
+ lrbox ::lrbox::
+############################################################
+\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
+This is the environment form of \sbox.
+The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd,
+which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox[width][position]{text}
+The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain
+the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the
+optional width argument. The position of the text within the
+box is determined by the optional position argument.
+
+ c -- centred (default)
+ l -- flushleft
+ r -- flushright
+ s -- stretch from left to right margin. The text must
+ contain stretchable space for this to work.
+
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \mbox ::mbox::
+############################################################
+\mbox{text}
+The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+text created by its argument.
+Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
+############################################################
+ \newsavebox ::newsavebox::
+############################################################
+\newsavebox{cmd}
+Declares cmd, which must be a command name that is not already
+defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
+############################################################
+ \parbox ::parbox::
+############################################################
+\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph
+mode. The \parbox has two mandatory arguments:
+
+ width - specifies the width of the parbox, and
+ text - the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
+LaTeX will position a parbox so its centre lines up with the
+centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows
+you to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox
+(default is top). If the height argument is not given, the
+box will have the natural height of the text.
+
+The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text
+inside the box. If it is not specified, position is used.
+
+ t -- text is placed at the top of the box.
+ c -- text is centred in the box.
+ b -- text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+ s -- stretch vertically. The text must contain
+ vertically stretchable space for this to work.
+
+A \parbox command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
+of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't
+use any of the paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox
+argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing
+a paragraph-making environment, you should use a minipage
+environment
+See section minipage.
+############################################################
+ \raisebox ::raisebox::
+############################################################
+\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}
+The \raisebox command is used to raise or lower text. The
+first mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to
+be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). The text
+itself is processed in LR mode.
+
+Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+different size than it really does - or a different size
+than LaTeX would normally think it has. The \raisebox
+command lets you tell LaTeX how tall it is. The first
+optional argument, extend-above, makes LaTeX think that the
+text extends above the line by the amount specified. The
+second optional argument, extend-below, makes LaTeX think
+that the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
+############################################################
+ \rule ::rule::
+############################################################
+\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}
+The \rule command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
+arguments are defined as follows:
+
+ raise-height - specifies how high to raise the rule
+ (optional)
+ width - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
+ thickness - specifies the thickness of the rule
+ (mandatory)
+
+############################################################
+ \savebox ::savebox::
+############################################################
+\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
+This command typeset text in a box just as for \makebox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \sbox ::sbox::
+############################################################
+\sbox{text}
+This commands typeset text in a box just as for \mbox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \usebox ::usebox::
+############################################################
+\usebox{cmd}
+Prints the box most recently saved in bin cmd by a \savebox
+command.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Starting.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Starting.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..84db129051 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Starting.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +############################################################
+Starting & Ending ::document::
+############################################################
+
+Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{class}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+ \end{document}
+
+where the class selected is one of the valid classes for
+LaTeX. See section
+
+Document Classes (and see section Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide), for details of the various document classes
+available locally.
+
+You may include other LaTeX commands between the
+\documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (i.e., in
+the `preamble').
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Styles.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Styles.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fee57f61fa --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Styles.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +############################################################
+Page Styles
+############################################################
+
+The \documentclass command determines the size and position
+of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what
+goes in them.
+
+ \maketitle: Generate a title page.
+ \pagenumbering: Set the style used for page numbers.
+ \pagestyle: Change the headings/footings style.
+ \thispagestyle: Change the headings/footings style for
+ this page.
+
+############################################################
+ \maketitle ::maketitle::
+############################################################
+\maketitle
+The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title
+page - except in the article class, where the title normally
+goes at the top of the first page.
+Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+following declarations:
+
+See section Page Styles for the commands to give the information.
+
+ \author: Who wrote this stuff?
+ \date: The date the document was created.
+ \thanks: A special form of footnote.
+ \title: How to set the document title.
+
+############################################################
+ \author ::author::
+############################################################
+\author{names}
+The \author command declares the author(s), where names is a
+list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate
+lines within a single author's entry -- for example, to give
+the author's institution or address.
+############################################################
+ \date ::date::
+############################################################
+\date{text}
+The \date command declares text to be the document's date.
+With no \date command, the current date is used.
+############################################################
+ \thanks ::thanks::
+############################################################
+\thanks{text}
+The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title.
+############################################################
+ \title ::title::
+############################################################
+\title{text}
+The \title command declares text to be the title. Use \\ to
+tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
+############################################################
+ \pagenumbering ::pagenumbering::
+############################################################
+\pagenumbering{num_style}
+Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+num_style are:
+
+ arabic - Arabic numerals
+ roman - Lowercase Roman numerals
+ Roman - Uppercase Roman numerals
+ alph - Lowercase letters
+ Alph - Uppercase letters
+
+############################################################
+ \pagestyle ::pagestyle::
+############################################################
+\pagestyle{option}
+The \pagestyle command changes the style from the current
+page on throughout the remainder of your document.
+The valid options are:
+
+ plain - Just a plain page number.
+ empty - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
+ headings - Puts running headings on each page. The
+ document style specifies what goes in the headings.
+ myheadings - You specify what is to go in the heading
+ with the \markboth or the \markright commands.
+
+ \markboth: Set left and right headings.
+ \markright: Set right heading only.
+
+############################################################
+ \markboth ::markboth::
+############################################################
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+The \markboth command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting both the left and the right
+heading. You should note that a "left-hand heading" is
+generated by the last \markboth command before the end of
+the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated by the
+first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if
+there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \markright ::markright::
+############################################################
+\markright{right head}
+The \markright command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting the right heading, leaving the
+left heading unchanged. You should note that a "left-hand
+heading" is generated by the last \markboth command before
+the end of the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated
+by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page
+if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \thispagestyle ::thispagestyle::
+############################################################
+\thispagestyle{option}
+The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the
+\pagestyle command except that it changes the style for the
+current page only.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Terminal.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Terminal.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a2551a0cf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Terminal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +############################################################
+Terminal Input/Output
+############################################################
+
+ \typein: Read text from the terminal.
+ \typeout: Write text to the terminal.
+
+############################################################
+ \typein ::typein::
+############################################################
+\typein[cmd]{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait
+for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the
+cmd argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if
+it had been included in the input file in place of the
+\typein command. If the cmd argument is present, it must be
+a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined
+to be the typed input.
+############################################################
+ \typeout ::typeout::
+############################################################
+\typeout{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in
+msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand are
+replaced by their definitions before being printed.
+
+LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg.
+A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed.
+A ^^J in msg prints a newline.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Typefaces.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Typefaces.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0bb3fedf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/Typefaces.txt @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +############################################################
+Typefaces
+############################################################
+
+The typeface is specified by giving the "size" and "style".
+A typeface is also called a "font".
+
+ Styles: Select roman, italics etc.
+ Sizes: Select point size.
+ Low-level font commands: Commands for wizards.
+
+############################################################
+ Styles
+############################################################
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+These commands are used like \textit{italics text}. The
+corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form",
+which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the
+current group.
+
+The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+\sffamily\bfseries to get sans serif boldface.
+
+You can also use the environment form of the declaration
+forms; e.g. \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}.
+
+ \textrm (\rmfamily) ::textrm::rmfamily::
+Roman.
+ \textit (\itshape) ::textit::itshape::
+ \emph ::emph::
+Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
+ \textmd (\mdseries) ::textmd::mdseries::
+Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
+ \textbf (\bfseries) ::textbf::bfseries::
+Boldface.
+ \textup (\upshape) ::textup::upshape::
+Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ \textsl (\slshape) ::textsl::slshape::
+Slanted.
+ \textsf (\sffamily) ::textsf::sffamily::
+Sans serif.
+ \textsc (\scshape) ::textsc::scshape::
+Small caps.
+ \texttt (\ttfamily) ::texttt::ttfamily::
+Typewriter.
+ \textnormal (\normalfont) ::textnormal::normalfont::
+Main document font.
+ \mathrm ::mathrm::
+Roman, for use in math mode.
+ \mathbf ::mathbf::
+Boldface, for use in math mode.
+ \mathsf ::mathsf::
+Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+ \mathtt ::mathtt::
+Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+ \mathit ::mathit::
+Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names
+with several letters.
+ \mathnormal ::mathnormal::
+For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style
+declaration.
+ \mathcal ::mathcal::
+`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+::mathversion::
+In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+\mathversion{normal} restores the default.
+
+############################################################
+ Sizes
+############################################################
+The following standard type size commands are supported by
+LaTeX. The commands as listed here are "declaration forms".
+The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type
+style command or the end of the current group.
+
+You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}.
+
+ \tiny ::tiny::
+ \scriptsize ::scriptsize::
+ \footnotesize ::footnotesize::
+ \small ::small::
+ \normalsize (default) ::normalsize::
+ \large ::large::
+ \Large ::Large::
+ \LARGE ::LARGE::
+ \huge ::huge::
+ \Huge ::Huge::
+
+############################################################
+ Low-level font commands
+############################################################
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros
+and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of
+the available ones. For full details, you should consult
+Chapter 7 of The LaTeX Companion.
+
+ \fontencoding{enc} ::fontencoding::
+
+Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1.
+
+ \fontfamily{family} ::fontfamily::
+
+Select font family. Valid families include:
+ cmr for Computer Modern Roman
+ cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter
+and numerous others.
+
+ \fontseries{series} ::fontseries::
+
+Select font series. Valid series include:
+ m Medium (normal)
+ b Bold
+ c Condensed
+ bc Bold condensed
+ bx Bold extended
+and various other combinations.
+
+ \fontshape{shape} ::fontshape::
+
+Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+ n Upright (normal)
+ it Italic
+ sl Slanted (oblique)
+ sc Small caps
+ ui Upright italics
+ ol Outline
+The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
+
+ \fontsize{size}{skip} ::fontsize::
+
+Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to
+switch to; the second is the \baselineskip to use. The unit
+of both parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that
+the baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size.
+
+ \selectfont ::selectfont::
+
+The changes made by calling the four font commands described
+above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called.
+
+ \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} ::usefont::
+
+Equivalent to calling \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries
+and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amscd.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amscd.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b8369e1cc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amscd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amscd.
+\usepackage{amscd} ::amscd::
+
+#################################################################
+diagrams ::CD::
+#################################################################
+subenviroment :
+CD
+example :
+\begin{CD}
+ A @>>> B @>>> C
+ D @AAA E @VVV F
+ G @= H @<<< I
+\end{CD}
+
+enviroment for diagrams
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@>textabove>textbelow>
+
+arrow to the right with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@<textabove<textbelow<
+
+arrow to the left with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@AtextleftAtextrightA
+
+arrow up with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@VtextleftVtextrightV
+
+arrow down with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@=
+
+equal symbol instead of an arrow
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsfonts.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsfonts.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ab340e27c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsfonts.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsfonts.
+\usepackage{amsfonts} ::amsfonts::
+
+#################################################################
+fonts
+#################################################################
+\mathbb{text} ::mathbb::
+
+supplies text as mathematical field letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\mathfrak{text} ::mathfrak::
+
+supplies text as fracture letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boldsymbol{symbol} ::boldsymbol::
+
+supplies a bold variant of symbol
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsmath.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsmath.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3c33ff86cf --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsmath.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsmath.
+\usepackage{amsmath} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+mathematical subenviroments
+#################################################################
+Subenviroments must be invoked within a mathmatical enviroment.
+for example :
+\[\begin{split} ... \end{split}\]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : split ::split::
+\[\begin{split}
+ a&=b\\
+ c&=d
+\end{split}\]
+
+allows multible formulas with only one number.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : multline ::multline::
+\begin{multine}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{multine}
+
+for breaking one formula into several lines with only one number
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : gather ::gather::
+\begin{gather}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{gather}
+
+
+a group of formulas
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : align ::align::
+\begin{align}
+ a&=b & c&=d \\
+ e&=f & g&=h \\
+ \intertext{and}
+ i&=j & k&=l
+\end{align}
+
+an array of formulas
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+\intertext{text} ::intertext::
+
+allows normal textoutput within this mathmatical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : subequation ::subequation::
+
+mainnumbering gets an additional subnumbering with small letters
+\label{} does not distinguish between subnumbers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : ?matrix
+::matrix::pmatrix::bmatrix::vmatrix::Vmatrix::
+\[\begin{matrix}
+ 1 & 2 & 3 & a \\
+ 4 & 5 & 6 & b \\
+ 7 & 8 & 9 & c
+\end{matrix}\]
+
+produces a matrix
+matrix : without brackets
+pmatrik : with round brackets
+bmatrix : with angular brackets
+vmatrix : with vertical lines
+Vmatrix : with doubled vertical lines
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : cases ::cases::
+\[sgn(x)=\begin{cases}
+ -1 & \forall\ x<0 \\
+ 0 & x=0 \\
+ 1 & \forall\ x>0
+\end{cases}\]
+
+for "Cases" constructions
+#################################################################
+Sonstige Hilfen
+#################################################################
+size of brackets :
+\bigl \bigr little bit larger ::bigl::bigr::
+\Bigl \Bigr faktor 1.5 ::Bigl::Bigr::
+\biggl \biggr faktor 2 ::biggl::biggr::
+\Biggl \Biggr faktor 2.5 ::Biggl::Biggr::
+left right of the formula
+
+behind this should follow one of these bracket forms "(" "|" "[" ... "]" ")"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\substack{ \\ ...\\ \text{Hi} ... \\ } ::substack::
+example :
+\sum_\substack{i=0\\j=1}^\substack{10\\100}
+
+Pushes several lines of indices above or below.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\text{text} ::text::
+
+text within a mathematical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sideset{}{} ::sideset::
+example :
+\sideset{^1_2}{^3_4}\sum
+
+sets indices at the corners ..
+left above 1, left below 2, right above 3 and right below 4
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+xleftarrow{above} ::xleftarrow::xrightarrow::
+xleftarrow[below]{above}
+xrightarrow{above}
+xrightarrow[below]{above}
+
+
+An arrow which adapting the necessary length for displaying a text
+above itself and optionaly below, too.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boxed{formula} ::boxed::
+
+formula with a frame
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareMathOperator{latex-command}{output}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{latex-command}{output}
+::DeclareMathOperator::
+
+
+Allows the declaration of own new mathematical functions like
+ \sin \cos etc.
+* makes it display indices like \lim with in math enviroment.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amssymb.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amssymb.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b1cd209fcd --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amssymb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +#########################################################
+\usepackage{amssymb} ::amssymb::
+#########################################################
+One symbol out of many supplied by the package amssymb.
+#########################################################
+One of the many symbols for which I didn't create a
+picture, because it would have been an endless work
+and boring, too. (mys)
+#########################################################
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsthm.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsthm.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af361c593c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/amsthm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsthm.
+\usepackage{amsthm} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+Erstellen von Theoremen ::newtheorem::
+#################################################################
+
+\newtheorem{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}[latex-synonym2]{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}[section]
+
+Defines a new enviroment latex-synonym which is numbered as
+theorem with name "name" (f.e. axiom).
+\begin{latex-synonym}
+ bla
+\end{latex-synonym}
+for useing the new theorem
+
+* subdues the numbering.
+latex-synonym2 : uses the counter from this theorem
+section : an incretion of this counter would set the
+theorem counter to the value null
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\theoremstyle{style} ::theoremstyle::
+
+style :
+ plain (default)
+ definition
+ remark
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\swapnumbers ::swapnumbers::
+
+numbering on the left side of the theorem
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/copyright_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/copyright_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df07b73c38 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/copyright_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Tcltexed | Version 2.8 | 02. Nov 2006 | Martin Strauss
+::copyright_hlp::
+A plaintexteditor for LaTeX based on scriptlanguage tcl/tk (8.x)
+
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauss
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/editor_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/editor_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5505130293 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/editor_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,243 @@ +############################################################ +#::editor_hlp:: +# A janela do Editor +# +############################################################ + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +O que é uma janela do editor ? +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +É uma janela onde é possível trabalhar com um texto dentro +do tcltexed. Cada janela do editor contem um texto. Dois +atributos importantes que podemos identificar são quando +trabalhamos com varias janelas de editores: + +-> Primeiro plano (focos) +-> E uma marca que indica que aquela janela é a do documento + principal. + +>> Primeiro plano + +A janela do editor que tem o focos é aquela que ira receber +os comandos dados fora da janela do editor. Ela é a ultima +janela que estava em "foreground". Um exemplos de ação pode +ser procurar por uma sequencia de texto; Uma maneira de dar +o focos para uma janela é através dos botões do "mouse". + +>> Janela do documento principal + +Se você fez a janela do editor a janela principal, todas as +chamadas para programas externos como o latex, xdvi e gv +são direcionadas para esse documento. neste caso somente a +janela do documento principal é compilada, caso não seja +definida a janela principal cada janela atua como se ela +fosse a única. + +>> A janela é composta pelos seguintes componentes: + + -> uma barra de menu/popupbar ( somente a janela ) + -> uma barra de botões + -> e um campo de entrada + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Uso da barra de botões +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Da esquerda para a direita: + +uma "figura", Salvar, Salvar como, latex, xdvi, dvips, +ghostview, ispell, Syntax, Sair e finalmente "L.C. ?.?" + +>> "figura" + +A figura mostra os atributos da janela do editor. Caso a +janela em questão tenha o focos você verá na figura algumas +ondas circulares. Se ela esta colorida ( amarela e vermelha +) ela esta marcada para ser o documento principal. Você +pode fazer um documento o documento principal "clickando" +na figura, um segundo click remove o atributo de janela +principal. + +>> Salvar + +Esse você já sabe, simplesmente salva o documento no +arquivo especificado na janela do editor. Se não há nenhum +arquivo especificado "Salvar como" será executado. + +>> Salvar como + +Salva o documento dentro de um arquivo que você deve +especificar para a janela de documento atual. + +>> latex + +Salva o documento para esta janela. Somente esse documento +será salvo. E então o programa "latex" será executado para +o arquivo especificado. Caso esteja especificado quem é o +documento principal então será executado o latex para o +documento principal ao invés do arquivo dessa janela. +O latex produzira um arquivo com a extensão dvi e a saída +de erro do latex será mostrada no arquivo de ajuda do +tcltexed caso esteja ativada a opção mostrar log no menu de +opções. +Para facilitar a criação de índices, com os comandos do +latex \makeindex \index etc. o programa makeindex é chamado +automaticamente se existe um arquivo com extensão idx. + +>> xdvi + +Executa o xdvi ( ou um outro visualizador ) para ver a +saída do ultimo comando latex executado. normalmente o +visualizador recarrega o documento atual se você produz um novo +arquivo dvi, então você apenas precisa executa-lo uma vez. + +>> dvips + +Produz uma saída a partir do arquivo dvi para uma +impressora ghostscript. A saída ira ser gravada em um +arquivo com extensão ps. + +>> ghostview + +Executa o ghostview, um visualizador para arquivos +ghostscript que foram podem ser gerados com o comando +anterior. + +>> ispell + +Salva o documento para essa janela do editor. Somente esse +documento será salvo. E então ispell, um "shell" interativo +para checagem ortográfica é executado e a saída será +novamente carregada na janela do editor. + +>> Sintaxe + +Realce de sintaxe, todas sequencias de texto começando por +\ são entendidos para ser comandos de Latex. +Se este comando é conhecido essas letras ficam verdes, caso +contrário ficam vermelhas. Mas tome cuidado, ele não olha +atrás dos números de colchetes após os comandos ( latex ira +fazer isso para você ! ) +Se o texto é para ser ignorado ( começando por % ), ele +ficara azul. Para muitos dos comandos marcados em verde +existe uma breve descrissão. + +>> Sair + +Fecha esta janela. Se ela foi modificada ele pergunta se +gostaria de sair sem salvar realmente. + +>> "L.C ?.?" + +Mostra a posição do cursor (linha e coluna). +Uma linha é definida como um número de letras seguidas por +um "ENTER", não o número real de linhas mostrada pela +janela do editor. +Se você clicar neste botão aparecera uma janela onde você +pode definir a posição do cursor manualmente por números. + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Uso da barra de menus/popupbar + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Essa barra de menu somente existe se você usa Windows e +tcl/tk 8.x Elas implementam as mesmas funções. pressionando +o botão direito do mouse abrira a "popupbar". De cima para +baixo ( esquerda para a direita ): + +-> Desfazer +-> Recortar +-> Copiar +-> Limpar +-> Bloco +-> + % +-> - % + + +>> Desfazer + +Para desfazer a maioria das suas ultimas ações com o texto. +( Pelo menos é o que penso ) Na falta de infinita memória +não é possível desfazer tudo. + +>> Recortar, copiar, colar e limpar + +Apaga o texto selecionado guardando-o em outra área na +memória (recortar) , copia o texto selecionado para outra +área de memória (copiar), copia dessa outra área da memória +para a janela do editor(colar), e finalmente apaga o texto +selecionado sem salva-lo. + +>> Spell + +Marcas todas as palavras não escritas corretamente no seu +texto em vermelho. + +>> Nearly + +Marca a palavra que o cursor esta próximo e mostra uma +lista de palavras que estão próximas. + +>> Bloco + +Faz um texto selecionado um "Bloco - aria" ala Borland. + +>> + % + +Insere no começo da linha % somente se no começo da linha +não existe %. +-> uma maneira fácil de comentar regiões em latex. + +>> - % + +mesmo que "+ %" + +>> ... + +Procura por comandos do Latex que coincidem com as letras +entre a última "\" e o cursor. somente os comandos sobre +"Options -> packages" serão listados. + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Como usar o campo de entrada +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Ei esta é a parte que cada editor tem, não faça perguntas +bobas. ( olhe por editor-keymap por algumas combinações de +teclas. ) + +>> Spelling + +Se você deseja registrar uma palavra como corretamente +digitado você deve colocar o cursor sobre ela e dar um click +duplo no botão esquerdo do seu mouse. + +-> Exemplos para o auto preenchimento com comandos do Latex + +\fra ---> \frac{}{} +\enumerate ---> + \begin{enumerate} + \item + \end{enumerate} + +Auto-preenchimento de parentesis + +{ ---> {} +$ ---> $$ + +--> Para \begin e \end o nome do ambiente será inserido +como mostrado a seguir. + +\beg ---> + \begin{} + \end{} +\bege ---> + \begin{e} + \end{e} +\begenum ---> + \begin{enum} + \end{enum} + +-> Caso algum texto seja selecionado pelo mouse e +pressionando "\" ele não será deletado como de costume mas +será inserido colchetes ao redor do texto. diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/editort_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/editort_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..de6e15032c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/editort_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +############################################################ +#::editort_hlp:: +# teclas de atalho para a janela do editor +# +############################################################ + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +teclas do Borland etc: +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Bloco + <Control-k><b> Começar Bloco + <Control-k><k> terminar Bloco
+ <Control-k><c> Copiar Bloco
+ <Control-k><m> Mover Bloco + <Control-k><v> Mover Bloco + <Control-k><y> Apagar Bloco
+ <Control-k><%> Bloco (=> latex ignora essas linhas)
+ <Control-k><space> Bloco (oposto do comando acima)
+mais + <F1> Ajuda + <F2> Salvar + <F3> Abrir Arquivo + <F4> Ir para ( cursor ) + <F9> Compilar o Latex + <Control-k><x> Salvar
+ <Control-k><h> Ajuda
+ <Control-y> Apagar linha
+ <Alt-BackSpace> Desfazer
+ <Shift-Delete> Recortar
+ <Control-Insert>Copiar
+ <Shift-Insert> Colar
+ <Control-Delete>Limpar
+ <Control-l> Procurar novamente
+ <Alt-x> Sair completamente do programa
+ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ +Algumas que eu fiz :
+ <Control-w> Listar todas as posíveis opções para + completar comandos do Latex. + <Control-d> Se o cursor estiver sobre um comando + do Latex ele procura pela próximo comando igual, ou se + estiver sobre um texto qualquer ele ira procurar pelo + próximo \section. + <Control-u> Igual <Control-d> mas procura para trás + <Control-b> quebra de linha para uma seção + <Alt-b> quebra de linha para a linha corrente + <Control-B> oposto de <Control-b> + <Alt-B> oposto de <Alt-b> + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Blocos, Seleção e Área de transferencia são normalmente +independentes. + + <Control-k><p> Insere do clipboard + <Control-k><g> Copia para o clipboard + + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Padrão Windows +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ +precione o botão direito do mouse para abrir um menu com as +seguinte funções + Recortar Recorta o texto selecionado para Área de + transferencia + Copiar Copia o texto selecionado para o Área de + transferencia + Colar Insere o texto da área da Área de + transferencia + Apagar Apaga Selecionado + Bloco Seleciona + + % Comenta para o latex (%) + - % Remove comentário para o latex (%) + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Padrão Motif +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Precione o botão esquerdo do mouse + uma vez Desfazer Seleção + duas vezes Seleciona palavra + tres vezes Seleciona a linha + Shift-einfach Muda area de seleção + Shift-zweifach Completa area de seleção para palavras completas + Shift-dreifach Completa area de seleção para linhas completas + Control Muda a posição do cursor sem perder seleção +Setas (CT) + <Shift-CT> Seleciona areas (letras/linhas) + <Control-CT> Desloca o cursor em passos + <Shift-Control-CT> Seleciona area (palavras/parágrafos) + [Up,Down] pagína acima abaixo (ST) + <Shift-ST> Seleciona area (páginas) + [Home,End] começo fim da linha (ZT) + <Shift-ZT> Seleciona area (até linestart/-end) + <Control-ZT> Desloca o cursor até documentbegin/-end + <Shift-Control-ZT> Seleciona area (até documentbegin/-end) +sonstige + <Shift-slash> Seleciona todo o documento + <Insert> Insere seleção + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Modo-emacs +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + <Control-a> = Começo da linha + <Control-b> = esquerda + <Control-d> = Apaga + <Control-e> = Fim da linha + <Control-f> = Direita + (<Control-k> outra associação) + <Control-n> = Acima + <Control-o> = Return+Left + <Control-p> = Abaixo + <Control-t> + <Control-v> = Uma página acima + <Meta-b> + <Meta-d> + <Meta-f> + <Meta-less> move o cursor para o começo do texto + <Meta-greater> move o cursor para o começo do texto + <Meta-Backspace> + <Meta-Delete> +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/epsf.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/epsf.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c83e63d32c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/epsf.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +############################################################
+package epsf
+############################################################
+\usepackage{epsf} ::epsf::
+\epsfxsize ::epsfxsize::
+\epsfbox{} ::epsfbox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I don't now how these commands work, you could include
+eps-pictures into your document.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I personaly use the latex2e package graphicx for that
+and it works quite fine.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/gpl_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/gpl_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e04861aa1d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/gpl_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +GNU General Public License - GNU Project - Free Software Foundation (FSF)
+::gpl_hlp::
+Table of Contents
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+
+Preamble
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE | Version 2, June 1991
+
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+0.
+ This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+
+1.
+ You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+
+2.
+ You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+
+2.a)
+ You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+2.b)
+ You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+2.c)
+ If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+
+3.
+ You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+
+3.a)
+ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.b)
+ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.c)
+ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+4.
+ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+5.
+ You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+
+6.
+ Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+
+7.
+ If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+8.
+ If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+
+9.
+ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+
+10.
+ If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+NO WARRANTY
+
+
+11.
+ BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+12.
+ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+- one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does. -
+Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+
+
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
+`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
+suits your program.
+
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+
+A copy of
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+
+GNU's home page
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html
+
+FSF & GNU inquiries & questions to
+gnu@gnu.org"
+Other ways to contact
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html#ContactInfo
+
+Copyright notice above.
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA
+
+Updated:
+16 Feb 1998 tower
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/readme_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/readme_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cd06aea28a --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/readme_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + Tcltexed é um editor de LaTeX + + + !!! Tome cuidado, este programa esta em construção !!!! + Tenho trabalhado bastante no desenvolvimento mas ainda + podem haver erros, por favor entre em contato comigo, o + jeito mais fácil é pelo meu endereço eletrônico: + mys@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de + + Rápida introdução : + + Uma descrição do programa pode ser achado em : + "Ajuda" - "Tcltexed". + + Você sempre pode pressionar F1 + Para todos os comandos Latex (que eu conheço) existe uma curta descrição, + mas eu apenas escrevi sobre metade deles. + Os atalhos usados no tcltexed são parecidos com Motif, + Emacs, joe ( como no Borlland Pascal), adicionalmente + existem alguns atalhos adicionados por mim mesmo. + Ao abrir a janela do editor você ira achar uma pequena + imagem no canto superior esquerdo, se ela esta colorida ( + click com o mouse ) esta será a janela do documento + principal. Se você clicar sobre um comando na seção + matemática ele será inserido na janela do editor que tem o + foco ( mostra na imagem do canto esquerdo uma imagens com + ondas circulares) . + Se você começar a inserir um comando Latex tcltexed irá completar este comando. + (Exemplo: \G somente pode ser \Gamma) + Se você não quiser que isto aconteça pode inibi-lo nas opções + principais. + Os botões no topo da janela do editor podem ser usados para + iniciar os programas correspondentes usando o documento como + argumento. + Este programa pode ser usado em Unix, Windows 9x, Windows NT etc. + Se você quiser tentar executa-lo em Macintosh por favor entre + em contato comigo. + + Para rodar este programa você precisa ter Tcl/Tk instalado, + onde você pode fazer o download pois é aberto. + Você pode utilizar o meu programa? Ele é distribuido de + forma aberta. + + http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html + + Perguntas? Achou algum erro? Alguma idéia para futuro + desenvolvimento? Pode me mandar um mail: + + Martin Strauss + mys@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de + http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/sonder.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/sonder.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..33685acbf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/sonder.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +############################################################
+Hae ?
+############################################################
+\today ::today::
+
+insert date of compilation into the document
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX ::LaTeX::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX2e ::LaTeX2e::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX2e
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/tcltexed_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/tcltexed_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49b96166bc --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/bre/tcltexed_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + ############################################################ +#::tcltexed_hlp:: +# Tcltexed quer dizer tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor) +# +############################################################ + +Tcltexed é separado em duas partes. Uma delas a janela de +edição e a outra é a janela principal com inúmeras funções. + +Todas as funções que deveriam funcionar na janela do editor +irão usar a janela do editor que tem foco. Uma clara +explicação a respeito foi feita na ajuda do editor. + +Estas são as descrições das listas de funções que existem na +janela principal. + +ítens de menu da janela principal + +1. Arquivo + a) Novo + Inicie um novo documento LaTeX. Existe um documento + pré-definido para o iniciar um novo documento. Caso o arquivo + etc/default.tex existir ( dentro da arvore do tcltexed ) este + arquivo será usado. + + b) Abrir + Abre um arquivo no editor ... + + c) Adicionar + Adiciona o texto indicado na posição do cursor. + + d) Salvar e) Salvar como + Salvar o texto. + + f) Fechar + Feche o Tcltexed. Todas as janelas serão fechadas, se + necessário serão perguntadas pelas janelas que precisam ser + salvas. + +2. Editar + + a) Apagar + Apagar todo o texto. + + b) Quebrar linhas + Escolha quebrar linha no texto inteiro, na seção atual ou + na linha atual. Toda linha que é seguida por uma linha que + termina com espaço será interpretada como uma continuação. + Antes de uma linha ser quebrada todas as suas continuação + serão levadas em conta. Com os outros 3 ítens no menu é + possível adicionar todas as continuações a uma linha sem + quebrar a linha inteira depois desta. + Se existir algum espaço no começo da linha estes não serão + ignorados. + + c) Correção ortográfica + Marca todas as palavras no seu texto com problemas de + tipagem. + + d) Adicionar palavra. + Para registrar a palavra como tipada corretamente você deve + colocar o cursor no texto desejado com isso. Para a palavra + fazer sentido ela deve estar marcada como mal digitada. ou + não ?! + + e) \"a..\ss -> ä..ß + Traduz os comandos de latex para serem mostrar caracteres + especiais. + + f) ä..ß -> \"a..\ss + Traduz caracteres para seus comandos em latex. + + g) "a.."s -> ä..ß + Traduz comandos em latex do pacote [german]{babel} para + mostrar caracteres especiais. + + h) ä..ß -> "a.."s + Inverso da opção anterior. + + i) Procurar + Procura e substitui por palavras no texto. + + j) Meus + Aqui você pode definir suas próprias sequencias de Latex a + serem inseridas no texto, se você pressionar o botão antes + da caixa de texto esta definição será salva quando você + mandar salvar opções. + +3. Opções + + a) Parênteses Automáticos. + Se estiver ligado, para cada {([ que você abrir ele ira + completar e fecha-lo. + + b) Packages/etc + Ativar auto-preenchimento de acordo com vários pacotes + disponíveis. + Um, exemplo: + \fra --> \frac{}{} + + Quantos mais comandos o tcltexed deveria reconhecer mais + tempo ele levaria pois eles começam a ficar todos + parecidos para o tcltexed. + + c) Idioma + Escolha o seu idioma preferido, note que as opções somente + irão funcionar na próxima vez que você iniciar o tcltexed, + também irá afetar o dicionário para correção ortográfica. + + d) tamanho da fonte + Acerta o tamanho da fonte para o editor. + + e) Salve as opções + Salve todas as configurações utilizadas. Esta configuração + será aberta durante a próxima inicialização do Tcltexed. + (O arquivo com as configurações para unix é .tcltexed, + e para o Windows é tcltexed.ini . Mas por favor não editar . + Arquivos de configuração das versões anteriores do Tcltexed serão ignorados + (e posteriormente serão sobrescritos.) + +4. Fórmulas matemáticas + A galeria de imagens para a saída de comandos matemáticos + ambiente. Pressione a imagem e será inserido o comando representado, + pela imagem, na posição do cursor. + +5. geral + Como o 4. mas outros comandos. + +6. Ajuda + + a) Tcltexed + Ajuda sobre o próprio tcltexed + + b) LaTeX + Um índice para todos os comandos de Latex que eu já ouvi + falar. + Para todos os comandos de latex que eu escrevi uma pequena + ajuda, + + <Return> + botão esquerdo Mostra a ajuda. + botão direito Insere o comando + pressionando A-Z ou a-z força a lista pular para o + comando com essa primeira letra. + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Breaking.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Breaking.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39b180e3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Breaking.txt @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +############################################################
+Line & Page Breaking
+############################################################
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is
+to translate your input file into a string of glyphs and
+spaces. To produce a printed document, this string must be
+broken into lines, and these lines must be broken into pages.
+In some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with
+the \\ command, but LaTeX usually does it for you.
+
+ \\: Start a new line.
+ \- (hyphenation): Insert explicit hyphenation.
+ \cleardoublepage: Start a new right-hand page.
+ \clearpage: Start a new page.
+ \enlargethispage: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+ \fussy: Be fussy about line breaking.
+ \hyphenation: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+ \linebreak: Break the line.
+ \newline: Break the line prematurely.
+ \newpage: Start a new page.
+ \nolinebreak: Don't break the current line.
+ \nopagebreak: Don't make a page break here.
+ \pagebreak: Please make a page break here.
+ \sloppy: Be sloppy about line breaking.
+
+############################################################
+ \\ ::\::
+############################################################
+\\[*][extra-space]
+The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
+optional argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra
+vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This
+can be a negative amount.
+The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except
+that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at
+that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will
+usually find all correct hyphenation points. The \- command
+is used for the exceptional cases.
+
+Note that when you insert \- commands in a word, the word
+will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the
+hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+############################################################
+ \cleardoublepage ::cleardoublepage::
+############################################################
+The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes
+all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input
+to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes
+the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a
+blank page if necessary.
+############################################################
+ \clearpage ::clearpage::
+############################################################
+The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all
+figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to
+be printed.
+############################################################
+ \enlargethispage ::enlargethispage::
+############################################################
+\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified
+amount; e.g.
+\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line.
+The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on
+the page as much as possible. This is normally used together
+with an explicit \pagebreak.
+############################################################
+ \fussy ::fussy::
+############################################################
+\fussy
+This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between
+words, but may produce overfull boxes.
+This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command.
+section \sloppy
+############################################################
+ \hyphenation ::hypentation::
+############################################################
+\hyphenation{words}
+The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points,
+where words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
+each hyphenation point is indicated by a - character.
+############################################################
+ \linebreak ::linebreak::
+############################################################
+\linebreak[number]
+The \linebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current line
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \linebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+The \linebreak command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
+extends to the right margin.
+############################################################
+ \newline ::newline::
+############################################################
+The \newline command breaks the line right where it is. It
+can only be used in paragraph mode.
+############################################################
+ \newpage ::newpage::
+############################################################
+The \newpage command ends the current page.
+############################################################
+ \nolinebreak ::nolinebreak::
+############################################################
+\nolinebreak[number]
+The \nolinebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current line at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nolinebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \nopagebreak ::nopagebreak::
+############################################################
+\nopagebreak[number]
+The \nopagebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current page at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nopagebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \pagebreak ::pagebreak::
+############################################################
+\pagebreak[number]
+The \pagebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current page
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+############################################################
+ \sloppy ::sloppy::
+############################################################
+\sloppy
+This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
+This can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space
+between words. Lasts until a \fussy command is issued.
+section \fussy.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Characters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Characters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6117d613e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Characters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +############################################################
+Special Characters ::#::%::symbol::
+############################################################
+
+The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+called "special printing characters", or simply
+"special characters".
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+Whenever you put one of these special characters into your
+file, you are doing something special. If you simply want
+the character to be printed just as any other letter, include
+a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce
+$ in your output.
+
+One exception to this rule is the \ itself because \\ has its
+own special meaning. A \ is produced by typing $\backslash$
+in your file.
+Also, \~ means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
+so you will probably want to use \verb instead.
+
+In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+know its number by using the \symbol command. For example,
+the character used for displaying spaces in the \verb*
+command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+\symbol{32}.
+
+You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal
+numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written
+ as \symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Contents.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Contents.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49d35032a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Contents.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +############################################################
+Table of Contents
+############################################################
+::tableofcontents::listoffigures::listoftables::
+A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
+command. You put the command right where you want the table
+of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces
+a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page.
+If you want a new page after the table of contents, include
+a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command.
+
+There are similar commands \listoffigures and \listoftables
+for producing a list of figures and a list of tables,
+respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the
+table of contents.
+
+NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you
+cannot have the \nofiles command in your document.
+
+ \addcontentsline: Add an entry to table of
+ contents etc.
+ \addtocontents: Add text directly to table of
+ contents file etc.
+
+############################################################
+ \addcontentsline ::addcontentsline::
+############################################################
+\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}
+The \addcontentsline command adds an entry to the specified
+list or table where:
+
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ sec_unit controls the formatting of the entry. It
+ should be one of the following, depending upon
+ the value of the file argument:
+ toc -- the name of the sectional unit, such
+ as part or subsection.
+ lof -- figure
+ lot -- table
+ entry is the text of the entry.
+############################################################
+ \addtocontents ::addtocontents::
+############################################################
+\addtocontents{file}{text}
+The \addtocontents command adds text (or formatting commands)
+directly to the file that generates the table of contents or
+list of figures or tables.
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ text is the information to be written.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Counters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Counters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ef4316a446 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Counters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +############################################################
+Counters
+############################################################
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated
+with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name
+of the environment or command that produces the number,
+except with no \. (enumi - enumiv are used for the nested
+enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters
+used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control
+numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+ \addtocounter: Add a quantity to a counter.
+ \alph: Print value of a counter using letters.
+ \arabic: Print value of a counter using numerals.
+ \fnsymbol: Print value of a counter using symbols.
+ \newcounter: Define a new counter.
+ \refstepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \roman: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
+ \setcounter: Set the value of a counter.
+ \stepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \usecounter: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+ \value: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+
+############################################################
+ \addtocounter ::addtocounter::
+############################################################
+\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+The \addtocounter command increments the counter by the
+amount specified by the value argument. The value argument
+can be negative.
+############################################################
+ \alph ::alph::
+############################################################
+\alph{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in alphabetic characters. The \alph command uses lower case
+alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., a, b, c... while the
+\Alph command uses upper case alphabetic characters,
+i.e., A, B, C....
+############################################################
+ \arabic ::arabic::
+############################################################
+\arabic{counter}
+The \arabic command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
+############################################################
+ \fnsymbol ::fnsymbol::
+############################################################
+\fnsymbol{counter}
+The \fnsymbol command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be
+used for numbering footnotes. eg. From 1-9:
+NB. counter must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
+############################################################
+ \newcounter ::newcounter::
+############################################################
+\newcounter{foo}[counter]
+The \newcounter command defines a new counter named foo. The
+counter is initialized to zero.
+The optional argument [counter] causes the counter foo to be
+reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
+incremented.
+############################################################
+ \refstepcounter ::refstepcounter::
+############################################################
+\refstepcounter{counter}
+The \refstepcounter command works like \stepcounter See
+section \stepcounter, except it also defines the current
+\ref value to be the result of \thecounter.
+############################################################
+ \roman ::roman
+############################################################
+\roman{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in Roman numerals. The \roman command uses lower case Roman
+numerals, i.e., i, ii, iii..., while the \Roman command uses
+upper case Roman numerals, i.e., I, II, III....
+############################################################
+ \stepcounter ::stepcounter::
+############################################################
+\stepcounter{counter}
+The \stepcounter command adds one to the counter and resets
+all subsidiary counters.
+############################################################
+ \setcounter ::setcounter::
+############################################################
+\setcounter{counter}{value}
+The \setcounter command sets the value of the counter to that
+specified by the value argument.
+############################################################
+ \usecounter ::usecounter::
+############################################################
+\usecounter{counter}
+The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the
+list environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
+number the list items.
+############################################################
+ \value ::value::
+############################################################
+\value{counter}
+The \value command produces the value of the counter named
+in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects
+an integer or number, such as the second argument of a
+\setcounter or \addtocounter command, or in:
+ \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Definitions.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Definitions.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e2d50c3281 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Definitions.txt @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +############################################################
+Definitions
+############################################################
+
+\newcommand: Define a new command.
+\newenvironment: Define a new environment.
+\newtheorem: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+\newfont: Define a new font name.
+
+############################################################
+ \newcommand ::newcommand::renewcommand::
+############################################################
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+These commands define (or redefine) a command.
+ cmd A command name beginning with a \. For
+ \newcommand it must not be already defined and
+ must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand it
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the command being defined. The
+ default is for the command to have no arguments.
+ def If this optional parameter is present, it means
+ that the command's first argument is optional.
+ The default value of the optional argument is def.
+ definition The text to be substituted for every
+ occurrence of cmd; a parameter of the form #n in
+ cmd is replaced by the text of the nth argument
+ when this substitution takes place.
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment ::newenvironment::renewenvironment::
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+These commands define or redefine an environment.
+ nam The name of the environment. For \newenvironment
+ there must be no currently defined environment
+ by that name, and the command \nam must be
+ undefined. For \renewenvironment the environment
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the newly-defined environment.
+ The default is no arguments.
+ default If this is specified, the first argument
+ is optional, and default gives the default value
+ for that argument.
+ begdef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \begin{nam}; a parameter of the form #n in cmd
+ is replaced by the text of the nth argument when
+ this substitution takes place.
+ enddef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \end{nam}. It may not contain any argument
+ parameters.
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem ::newtheorem::
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+ \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+This command defines a theorem-like environment.
+ env_name The name of the environment to be defined.
+ A string of letters. It must not be the
+ name of an existing environment or counter.
+ caption The text printed at the beginning of the
+ environment, right before the number.
+ This may simply say "Theorem", for example.
+ within The name of an already defined counter,
+ usually of a sectional unit. Provides a
+ means of resetting the new theorem counter
+ within the sectional unit.
+ numbered_like The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment.
+The \newtheorem command may have at most one optional argument.
+############################################################
+ \newfont ::newfont::
+############################################################
+\newfont{cmd}{font_name}
+Defines the command name cmd, which must not be currently
+defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
+font_name to be the current font.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Document.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Document.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3e68a83dc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Document.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +############################################################
+Document Classes
+############################################################
+
+Valid LaTeX document classes include:
+ article
+ report
+ letter
+ book
+ slides
+Other document classes are often available. See section
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide, for details. They are
+selected with the following command:
+
+ \documentclass [options] {class} ::documentclass::
+
+All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+options for
+selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
+ 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+(default is letter):
+ a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper,
+ legalpaper, executivepaper
+Miscellaneous options:
+ landscape -- selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
+ titlepage, notitlepage -- selects if there should be a
+ separate title page.
+ leqno -- equation number on left side of equations. Default
+ is right side.
+ fleqn -- displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
+ openbib -- use "open" bibliography format.
+ draft, final -- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
+ Default is final.
+These options are not available with the slides class:
+ oneside, twoside -- selects one- or twosided layout.
+ Default is oneside, except for the book class.
+ openright, openany -- determines if a chapter should
+ start on a right-hand page. Default is
+ openright for book.
+ onecolumn, twocolumn -- one or two columns. Defaults
+ to one column.
+The slides class offers the option clock for printing the
+time at the bottom of each note.
+
+If you specify more than one option, they must be separated
+by a comma. Additional packages are loaded by a
+
+ \usepackage[options]{pkg} ::usepackage::
+
+command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+separated by a comma.
+
+Any options given in the \documentclass command that are
+unknown by the selected document class are passed on to
+the packages loaded with \usepackage.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Environments.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Environments.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8284905a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Environments.txt @@ -0,0 +1,943 @@ +############################################################
+Environments ::begin::end::
+############################################################
+
+LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+manner.
+
+ \begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{environment-name}
+
+ array: Math arrays.
+ center: Centred lines.
+ description: Labelled lists.
+ enumerate: Numbered lists.
+ eqnarray: Sequences of aligned equations.
+ equation: Displayed equation.
+ figure: Floating figures.
+ flushleft: Flushed left lines.
+ flushright: Flushed right lines.
+ itemize: Bulleted lists.
+ letter: Letters.
+ list: Generic list environment.
+ minipage: Miniature page.
+ picture: Picture with text, arrows, lines and
+ circles.
+ quotation: Indented environment with paragraph
+ indentation.
+ quote: Indented environment with no paragraph
+ indentation.
+ tabbing: Align text arbitrarily.
+ table: Floating tables.
+ tabular: Align text in columns.
+ thebibliography: Bibliography or reference list.
+ theorem: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+ titlepage: For hand crafted title pages.
+ verbatim: Simulating typed input.
+ verse: For poetry and other things.
+
+############################################################
+ array ::array::
+############################################################
+
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+
+Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has
+a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns
+and the alignment within them. Each column, coln, is specified
+by a single letter that tells how items in that row should
+be formatted.
+
+ c -- for centred
+ l -- for flush left
+ r -- for flush right
+
+Column entries must be separated by an &. Column entries may
+include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+Note that the array environment can only be used in math mode,
+so normally it is used inside an equation environment.
+############################################################
+ center ::center::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{center}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{center}
+
+The center environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are centred within the left and
+right margins on the current page. Each line must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+\centering: The declaration form of the center environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \centering ::centering::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the center environment. This
+declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote
+or in a parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centred
+on the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning
+of the figure or table environment.
+
+Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does
+not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ description ::discription::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [label] First item
+ \item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{description}
+
+The description environment is used to make labelled lists.
+The label is bold face and flushed right.
+############################################################
+ enumerate ::enumerate::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+The enumerate environment produces a numbered list.
+Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments.
+
+Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command.
+There must be at least one \item command within the environment.
+The enumerate environment uses the enumi through enumiv
+counters (see section Counters). The type of numbering can be
+changed by redefining \theenumi etc.
+############################################################
+ eqnarray ::eqnarray::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ math formula 1 \\
+ math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of
+equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
+array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and
+consecutive items within a row separated by an &.
+
+An equation number is placed on every line unless that line
+has a \nonumber command.
+
+The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas
+across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush
+left in a box of zero width.
+############################################################
+ equation ::equation::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ math formula
+ \end{equation}
+
+The equation environment centres your equation on the page
+and places the equation number in the right margin.
+############################################################
+ figure ::figure::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+ \caption{figure title}
+ \end{figure}
+
+Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Figures will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h (Here) - at the position in the text where the
+ figure environment appears.
+ t (Top) - at the top of a text page.
+ b (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement tbp.
+
+The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc. you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your figure.
+############################################################
+ flushleft ::flushleft::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated
+with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedright: The declaration form of the flushleft
+ environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedright ::raggedright::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ flushright ::flushright::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushright}
+
+The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedleft: The declaration form of the flushright environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedleft ::raggedleft::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushright environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ itemize ::itemize::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{itemize}
+
+The itemize environment produces a "bulleted" list.
+Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments. Each item of an itemized list
+begins with an \item command. There must be at least one
+\item command within the environment. The itemize environment
+uses the itemi through itemiv counters (see section Counters).
+The type of numbering can be changed by redefining \theitemi
+etc.
+############################################################
+ letter ::letter::
+############################################################
+This environment is used for creating letters. See section
+Letters.
+############################################################
+ list ::list::item::
+############################################################
+The list environment is a generic environment which is used
+for defining many of the more specific environments. It is
+seldom used in documents, but often in macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{list}
+
+The {label} argument specifies how items should be labelled.
+This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box
+to form the label. This argument can and usually does contain
+other LaTeX commands.
+
+The {spacing} argument contains commands to change the spacing
+parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
+null, i.e., {}. This will select all default spacing which
+should suffice for most cases.
+############################################################
+ minipage ::minipage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
+ text
+ \end{minipage}
+
+The minipage environment is similar to a \parbox command. It
+takes the same optional position argument and mandatory width
+argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
+inside a minipage. Footnotes in a minipage environment are
+handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting
+footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext
+command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage
+instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter
+
+See section Counters.
+
+NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+minipage.
+############################################################
+ picture ::picture::
+############################################################
+ \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+ \end{picture}
+The picture environment allows you to create just about any
+kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and
+circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture
+by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number
+that may have a decimal point and a minus sign -- a number
+like 5, 2.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength
+has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
+length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of
+\unitlength anywhere you want, using the \setlength command,
+but strange things will happen if you try changing it inside
+the picture environment.
+
+A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5),
+specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5.
+Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to
+an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the
+picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it
+is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit
+the argument.
+
+The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is
+a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The
+environment produces a rectangular box with width and height
+determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+
+The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
+following the size argument, that can change the origin.
+(Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has
+been set to 1mm, the command
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and
+whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When
+you first draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument,
+leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to
+modify your picture by shifting everything, you just add the
+appropriate optional argument. The environment's mandatory
+argument determines the nominal size of the picture.
+
+This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
+LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture,
+or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX
+in determining how much room to leave for it.
+
+Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command.
+The command
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference
+point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
+objects will be described below. The \put command creates an LR box.
+You can put anything in the text argument of the \put command that
+you'd put into the argument of an \mbox and related commands. When
+you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of
+the box.
+
+Picture commands:
+
+ \circle: Draw a circle.
+ \dashbox: Draw a dashed box.
+ \frame: Draw a frame around an object.
+ \framebox (picture): Draw a box with a frame around it.
+ \line: Draw a straight line.
+ \linethickness: Set the line thickness.
+ \makebox (picture): Draw a box of the specified size.
+ \multiput: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+ \oval: Draw an ellipse.
+ \put: Place an object at a specified place.
+ \shortstack: Make a pile of objects.
+ \vector: Draw a line with an arrow.
+
+############################################################
+ \circle ::circle::
+############################################################
+\circle[*]{diameter}
+The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as
+close to the specified one as possible. If the *-form of the
+command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
+Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
+############################################################
+ \dashbox ::dashbox::
+############################################################
+Draws a box with a dashed line.
+\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}
+The \dashbox has an extra argument which specifies the width
+of each dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and
+height are multiples of the dash_length.
+############################################################
+ \frame ::frame::
+############################################################
+\frame{...}
+The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around the object
+specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom
+left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the
+frame and the object.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents
+of the box.
+############################################################
+ \line ::line::
+############################################################
+\line(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \line command draws a line of the specified length and
+slope.
+Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where
+x and y have integer values from -6 through 6.
+############################################################
+ \linethickness ::linethickness::
+############################################################
+\linethickness{dimension}
+Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture environment to be dimension, which must be a positive
+length. It does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and
+circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval to form the
+corners of an oval.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar
+to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify
+a width and height in multiples of \unitlength.
+The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant
+that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the
+following:
+ t - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+ b - Moves the item to the bottom
+ l - Moves the item to the left
+ r - Moves the item to the right
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \multiput ::multiput::
+############################################################
+\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}
+The \multiput command can be used when you are putting the
+same object in a regular pattern across a picture.
+############################################################
+ \oval ::oval::
+############################################################
+\oval(width,height)[portion]
+The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.
+The optional argument, [portion], allows you to select part
+of the oval.
+ t - Selects the top portion
+ b - Selects the bottom portion
+ r - Selects the right portion
+ l - Selects the left portion
+Note that the "corners" of the oval are made with quarter
+circles with a maximum
+
+radius of 20 pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes
+with rounded corners.
+############################################################
+ \put ::put::
+############################################################
+\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
+The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory
+argument at the given coordinates.
+############################################################
+ \shortstack ::shortstack::
+############################################################
+\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}
+The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The
+valid positions are:
+ r - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
+ l - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
+ c - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack
+ (default)
+############################################################
+ \vector ::vector::
+############################################################
+\vector(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the
+specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie
+between -4 and +4, inclusive.
+
+############################################################
+ quotation ::quotation::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quotation}
+ text
+ \end{quotation}
+The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the
+left and the right.
+
+The text is justified at both margins and there is paragraph
+indentation.
+
+Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ quote ::quote::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quote}
+ text
+ \end{quote}
+The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left
+and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving
+a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ tabbing ::tabbing::
+############################################################
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+ second row \> \> more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabbing}
+The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in
+columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them
+much the way you do with an ordinary typewriter.
+
+It is best suited for cases where the width of each column
+is constant and known in advance.
+
+This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular
+environment.
+
+The following commands can be used inside a tabbing
+enviroment:
+
+############################################################
+ \= ::=::
+############################################################
+Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+############################################################
+ \> ::>::
+############################################################
+Advances to the next tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \< ::<::
+############################################################
+This command allows you to put something to the left of the
+local margin without changing the margin. Can only be used
+at the start of the line.
+############################################################
+ \+ ::+::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the right.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the left.
+############################################################
+ \' ::'::
+############################################################
+Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current
+column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\,
+or \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+against the current column's tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \` ::`::
+############################################################
+Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop,
+including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
+of the last column because here's no tab stop there. The \`
+command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or
+\end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command
+between the \` and the command that ends the line.
+############################################################
+ \kill ::kill::
+############################################################
+Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
+except that it throws away the current line instead of
+producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \-
+commands in that line remain in effect.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs ::pushtabs::
+############################################################
+Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing
+environment.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs
+############################################################
+Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs.
+############################################################
+ \a ::a::
+############################################################
+In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not
+produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands \a=, \a'
+and \a` are used.
+
+This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+format:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+############################################################
+ table ::table::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+ \caption{table title}
+ \end{table}
+
+Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Tables will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h : Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+ t : Top - at the top of a text page.
+ b : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement [tbp].
+
+The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your table.
+############################################################
+ tabular ::tabular::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory
+and optional arguments consist of:
+ width Specifies the width of the tabular* environment.
+ There must be rubber space between columns that
+ can stretch to fill out the specified width.
+ pos Specifies the vertical position; default is
+ alignment on the centre of the environment.
+ t - align on top row
+ b - align on bottom row
+ cols Specifies the column formatting. It consists of
+ a sequence of the following specifiers,
+ corresponding to the sequence of columns and
+ intercolumn material.
+ l - A column of left-aligned items.
+ r - A column of right-aligned items.
+ c - A column of centred items.
+ | - A vertical line the full height and depth of
+ the environment.
+ @{text} - This inserts text in every row. An
+ @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space
+ normally inserted between columns; any desired
+ space between the inserted text and the adjacent
+ items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd}
+ command in an @-expression causes an extra space
+ of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent
+ columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
+ command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this
+ extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression.
+ An \extracolsep command can be used only in an
+ @-expression in the cols argument.
+ p{wd} - Produces a column with each item typeset in
+ a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument
+ of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not
+ appear in the item, except in the following
+ situations:
+ 1. inside an environment like minipage,
+ array, or tabular.
+ 2. inside an explicit \parbox.
+ 3. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright,
+ or \raggedleft
+ declaration. The latter declarations must appear
+ inside braces or an environment when used in a
+ p-column element.
+ *{num}{cols} - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where
+ num is any positive integer and cols is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another
+ *-expression.
+
+These commands can be used inside a tabular environment:
+
+ \cline: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+ \hline: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+ \multicolumn: Make an item spanning several columns.
+ \vline: Draw a vertical line.
+
+############################################################
+ \cline ::cline::
+############################################################
+\cline{i-j}
+The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j,
+which are identified in the mandatory argument.
+############################################################
+ \hline ::hline::
+############################################################
+The \hline command will draw a horizontal line the width of
+the table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top,
+bottom, and between the rows of the table.
+############################################################
+ \multicolumn ::multicolumn::
+############################################################
+\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+The \multicolumn is used to make an entry that spans several
+columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the
+number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos,
+specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centred, l for
+flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
+text, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
+############################################################
+ \vline ::vline::
+############################################################
+The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the
+full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be
+used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also
+be used in an @-expression.
+############################################################
+ thebibliography ::thebibliography::
+############################################################
+ \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+ \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{thebibliography}
+The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or
+reference list. In the article class, this reference list is
+labelled "References"; in the report class, it is labelled
+"Bibliography".
+
+ widest-label: Text that, when printed, is
+ approximately as wide as the widest item
+ label produces by the \bibitem commands.
+ \bibitem: Specify a bibliography item.
+ \cite: Refer to a bibliography item.
+ \nocite: Include an item in the bibliography.
+ Using BibTeX: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+############################################################
+ \bibitem ::bibitem::
+############################################################
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label.
+If the label argument is missing, a number is generated as
+the label, using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any
+sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not
+containing a comma. This command writes an entry on the `.aux'
+file containing cite_key and the item's label. When this
+`.aux' file is read by the \begin{document} command, the
+item's label is associated with cite_key, causing the
+reference to cite_key by a \cite command to produce the
+associated label.
+############################################################
+ \cite ::cite::
+############################################################
+\cite[text]{key_list}
+The key_list argument is a list of citation keys. This command
+generates an in-text citation to the references associated
+with the keys in key_list by entries on the `.aux' file read
+by the \begin{document} command. The optional text argument
+will appear after the citation, i.e. \cite[p. 2]{knuth} might
+produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
+############################################################
+ \nocite ::nocite::
+############################################################
+\nocite{key_list}
+The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list,
+which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux'
+file.
+############################################################
+ Using BibTeX
+############################################################
+If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple
+of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+thebibliography environment. Instead, you include the lines
+
+ \bibliographystyle{style} ::bibliographystyle::
+ \bibliography{bibfile} ::bibliography::
+
+where style refers to a file style.bst, which defines how
+your citations will look. The standard styles distributed
+with BibTeX are:
+
+ alpha Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed
+ from name of author and year of publication.
+ plain Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+ unsrt Like plain, but entries are in order of
+ citation.
+ abbrv Like plain, but more compact labels.
+
+In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored
+to the demands of various publications.
+The argument to \bibliography refers to the file bibfile.bib,
+which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the
+entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in
+the bibliography.
+############################################################
+ theorem ::theorem::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+ \end{theorem}
+
+The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface
+followed by your theorem text.
+############################################################
+ titlepage ::titlepage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ text
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page
+with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the
+following page to be numbered page one.
+
+Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command
+comes in handy for title pages.
+
+Note that you can use the \maketitle (see section \maketitle)
+command to produce a standard title page.
+############################################################
+ verbatim ::verbatim::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ text
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment
+that gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns
+LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks
+having the same effect that they would on a typewriter.
+
+ \verb: The macro form of the verbatim environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \verb ::verb::
+############################################################
+\verb char literal_text char
+\verb*char literal_text char
+Typesets literal_text exactly as typed, including special
+characters and spaces, using a typewriter (\tt) type style.
+There may be no space between \verb or \verb* and char
+(space is shown here only for clarity). The *-form differs
+only in that spaces are printed as `\verb*| |'.
+############################################################
+ verse ::verse::
+############################################################
+ \begin{verse}
+ text
+ \end{verse}
+The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may
+find other uses for it.
+The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate
+the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank
+lines to separate the stanzas.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Footnotes.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Footnotes.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e4655dd0cd --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Footnotes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +############################################################
+Footnotes
+############################################################
+
+Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can
+also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the
+\footnotetext commands. See the specific command for
+information on why you would use one over the other.
+
+ \footnote: Insert a footnote.
+ \footnotemark: Insert footnote mark only.
+ \footnotetext: Insert footnote text only.
+
+############################################################
+ \footnote ::footnote::
+############################################################
+\footnote[number]{text}
+The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at
+the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, number,
+is used to change the default footnote number. This command
+can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot
+use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures,
+tables or in a tabular environment.
+############################################################
+ \footnotemark ::footnotemark::
+############################################################
+The \footnotemark command puts the footnote number in the
+text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The
+text of the footnote is supplied by the \footnotetext command.
+This command can be used to produce several consecutive
+footnote markers referring to the same footnote by using
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+after the first \footnote command.
+############################################################
+ \footnotetext ::footnotetext::
+############################################################
+\footnotetext[number]{text}
+The \footnotetext command produces the text to be placed at
+the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after
+the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must
+appear in outer paragraph mode.
+
+The optional argument, number, is used to change the default
+footnote number.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Input.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Input.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e8da3c1cf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Input.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +############################################################
+Splitting the Input
+############################################################
+
+A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than
+putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more
+efficient to split it into several smaller ones.
+Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one
+that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when
+you run LaTeX.
+
+ \include: Conditionally include a file.
+ \includeonly: Determine which files are included.
+ \input: Unconditionally include a file.
+
+############################################################
+ \include ::include::
+############################################################
+\include{file}
+The \include command is used in conjunction with the
+\includeonly command for selective inclusion of files. The
+file argument is the first name of a file, denoting `file.tex'.
+If file is one the file names in the file list of the
+\includeonly command or if there is no \includeonly command,
+the \include command is equivalent to
+
+ \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+
+except that if the file `file.tex' does not exist, then a
+warning message rather than an error is produced. If the file
+is not in the file list, the \include command is equivalent
+to \clearpage.
+
+The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a
+file read by another \include command.
+############################################################
+ \includeonly ::includeonly::
+############################################################
+\includeonly{file_list}
+The \includeonly command controls which files will be read
+in by an \include command. file_list should be a
+comma-separated list of filenames. Each filename must match
+exactly a filename specified in a \include command. This
+command can only appear in the preamble.
+############################################################
+ \input ::input::
+############################################################
+\input{file}
+The \input command causes the indicated file to be read and
+processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in
+the current file at that point. The file name may be a
+complete file name with extension or just a first name, in
+which case the file `file.tex' is used.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Layout.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Layout.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61559daa09 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Layout.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +############################################################
+Layout
+############################################################
+
+Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout
+of the page.
+
+ \flushbottom: Make all text pages the same height.
+ \onecolumn: Use one-column layout.
+ \raggedbottom: Allow text pages of differing height.
+ \twocolumn: Use two-column layout.
+
+############################################################
+ \flushbottom ::flushbottom::
+############################################################
+The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same
+height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill
+out the page. This is the standard if twocolumn mode is
+selected.
+############################################################
+ \onecolumn ::onecolumn::
+############################################################
+The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+single-column output.
+############################################################
+ \raggedbottom ::raggedbottom::
+############################################################
+The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the height of
+the text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
+############################################################
+ \twocolumn ::twocolumn::
+############################################################
+\twocolumn[text]
+The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+two-column output. If the optional text argument is present,
+it is typeset in one-column mode.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Lengths.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Lengths.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..50c6f0d12d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Lengths.txt @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +
+############################################################
+Lengths
+############################################################
+
+A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take
+a length as an argument.
+
+ \newlength: Define a new length.
+ \setlength: Set the value of a length.
+ \addtolength: Add a quantity to a length.
+ \settodepth: Set a length to the depth of something.
+ \settoheight: Set a length to the height of something.
+ \settowidth: Set a length to the width of something.
+ Predefined lengths: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+
+############################################################
+ \newlength ::newlength::
+############################################################
+\newlength{\gnat}
+The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument, \gnat,
+as a length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a
+\gnat command already exists.
+############################################################
+ \setlength ::setlength::
+############################################################
+\setlength{\gnat}{length}
+The \setlength command is used to set the value of a length
+command. The length argument can be expressed in any terms
+of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (in),
+millimetres (mm), points (pt), etc.
+############################################################
+ \addtolength ::addtolength::
+############################################################
+\addtolength{\gnat}{length}
+The \addtolength command increments a "length command" by the
+amount specified in the length argument. It can be a negative
+amount.
+############################################################
+ \settodepth ::settodepth::
+############################################################
+\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the depth of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settoheight ::settoheight::
+############################################################
+\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
+The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the height of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settowidth ::settowidth::
+############################################################
+\settowidth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settowidth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the width of the text argument.
+
+Predefined lengths
+
+ \width ::width::
+ \height ::height::
+ \depth ::depth::
+ \totalheight ::totalheight::
+
+These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands
+
+See section Spaces & Boxes.
+
+They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box.
+\totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the
+text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Letters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Letters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5163868d91 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Letters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +############################################################
+Letters
+############################################################
+You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+business. The letter document class is designed to make a
+number of letters at once, although you can make just one if
+you so desire.
+
+Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the
+other document classes, i.e., you must have the following
+commands as a minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+ \end{document}
+
+Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the
+name and address of the recipient. For example, you might
+have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+ \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text
+of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input.
+Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not
+work. The letter closes with a \closing command.
+After the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc
+command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar
+\encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands,
+use \\ to separate the items.
+
+These commands are used with the letter class:
+
+ \address: Your return address.
+ \cc: Cc list.
+ \closing: Saying goodbye.
+ \encl: List of enclosed material.
+ \location: Your organisation's address.
+ \makelabels: Making address labels.
+ \name: Your name, for the return address.
+ \opening: Saying hello.
+ \ps: Adding a postscript.
+ \signature: Your signature.
+ \startbreaks: Allow page breaks.
+ \stopbreaks: Disallow page breaks.
+ \telephone: Your phone number.
+
+############################################################
+ \address ::address::
+############################################################
+\address{Return address}
+The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated
+by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration,
+then the letter will be formatted for copying onto your
+organisation's standard letterhead. (See section Overview of
+LaTeX and Local Guide, for details on your local implementation).
+If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be
+formatted as a personal letter.
+############################################################
+ \cc ::cc::
+############################################################
+\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}
+Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+name is printed on a separate line.
+############################################################
+ \closing ::closing::
+############################################################
+\closing{text}
+The letter closes with a \closing command, i.e.,
+ \closing{Best Regards,}
+\encl
+\encl{CV\\Certificates}
+Generate a list of enclosed material.
+############################################################
+ \location ::location::
+############################################################
+\location{address}
+This modifies your organisation's standard address. This
+only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+############################################################
+ \makelabels ::makelabels::
+############################################################
+\makelabels{number}
+If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create
+a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before
+the letters.
+############################################################
+ \name ::name::
+############################################################
+\name{June Davenport}
+Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with
+the return address.
+############################################################
+ \opening ::opening::
+############################################################
+\opening{text}
+The letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory
+argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your
+letter, i.e.,
+ \opening{Dear Joe,}
+############################################################
+ \ps ::ps::
+############################################################
+\ps
+Use this command before a postscript.
+############################################################
+ \signature ::sinature::
+############################################################
+\signature{Harvey Swick}
+Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+underneath the space for your signature. Items that should
+go on separate lines should be separated by \\ commands.
+############################################################
+ \startbreaks ::startbreaks::
+############################################################
+\startbreaks
+Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again.
+############################################################
+ \stopbreaks ::stopbreaks::
+############################################################
+\stopbreaks
+Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs.
+############################################################
+ \telephone ::telephone::
+############################################################
+\telephone{number}
+This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+firstpage pagestyle is selected.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Margin.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Margin.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..291c0e15a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Margin.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +############################################################
+Margin Notes ::marginpar::reversemarginpar::
+############################################################
+
+The command \marginpar[left]{right} creates a note in the
+margin. The first line will be at the same height as the line
+in the text where the \marginpar occurs.
+When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text
+will be placed
+ 1. in the right margin for one-sided layout
+ 2. in the outside margin for two-sided layout
+ 3. in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+ 4. By issuing the command \reversemarginpar, you can
+ force the marginal notes to go into the opposite
+ (inside) margin.
+When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left
+margin, and right is used for the right margin.
+The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can
+enable hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a
+\hspace{0pt} command.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Math.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Math.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0b33dfb937 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Math.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +############################################################
+Math Formulae ::(::)::[::]::$::
+############################################################
+
+There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+ math For Formulae that appear right in the text.
+ displaymath For Formulae that appear on their own line.
+ equation The same as the displaymath environment
+ except that it adds an equation number in
+ the right margin.
+The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only
+in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are
+used so often that they have the following short forms:
+
+ \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+ \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even
+shorter form:
+
+ $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+ Subscripts & Superscripts: Also known as exponent or index.
+ Math Symbols: Various mathematical squiggles.
+ Spacing in Math Mode: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+ Math Miscellany: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+
+############################################################
+ Subscripts & Superscripts ::_::^::
+############################################################
+To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just
+type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
+^{exp}. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
+that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right
+thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript.
+############################################################
+ Math Symbols
+############################################################
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely
+to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in
+math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source,
+you will get the symbol in your output.
+############################################################
+ Spacing in Math Mode
+############################################################
+In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and
+puts in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats
+mathematics the way it's done in mathematics texts. If you
+want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following four
+commands for use in math mode:
+
+ \; - a thick space ::;::
+ \: - a medium space :::::
+ \, - a thin space ::,::
+ \! - a negative thin space ::!::
+
+############################################################
+ Math Miscellany
+############################################################
+ \cdots ::cdots::
+Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to
+the centre of the line. eg.
+ \ddots ::ddots::
+Produces a diagonal ellipsis. eg.
+ \frac{num}{den} ::frac::
+Produces the fraction num divided by den. eg.
+ \ldots ::ldots::
+Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode, not
+just math mode. eg.
+ \overbrace{text} ::overbrace::
+Generates a brace over text. eg.
+ \overline{text} ::overline::
+Causes the argument text to be overlined. eg.
+ \sqrt[root]{arg} ::sqrt::
+Produces the square root of its argument. The optional argument,
+root, determines what root to produce, i.e., the cube root
+of x+y would be typed
+as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. eg.
+ \underbrace{text} ::underbrace::
+Generates text with a brace underneath. eg.
+ \underline{text} ::underline::
+Causes the argument text to be underlined. This command can
+also be used in paragraph and LR modes. eg.
+ \vdots ::vdots::
+Produces a vertical ellipsis. eg.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Modes.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Modes.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fd8358fedf --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Modes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +############################################################
+Modes
+############################################################
+When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one
+of three modes:
+
+ Paragraph mode
+ Math mode
+ Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
+LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase
+to a different level, though not all level changes produce
+mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or
+leaving an environment, or when LaTeX is processing the
+argument of certain text-producing commands.
+
+"Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is
+in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks
+your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX
+is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula.
+In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output
+that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between
+them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from
+left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if
+you put a hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep
+typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and
+then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit
+on the line.
+
+LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox
+command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the
+box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
+formula in the box. There are also several text-producing
+commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in
+paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+environments will be called a parbox. When LaTeX is in paragraph
+mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner paragraph
+mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
+called "outer paragraph mode".
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Overview.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3b0bea43b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Overview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +############################################################
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+############################################################
+
+The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+formatted. It produces at least three files as output:
+
+ 1. A "Device Independent", or `.dvi' file. This contains
+commands that can be translated into commands for a variety
+of output devices. You can view the output of LaTeX by using
+a program such as xdvi, which actually uses the `.dvi' file.
+ 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered
+in the input file.
+ 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX
+itself, for things such as sectioning.
+
+For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should
+consult The TeXbook by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9,
+published jointly by the American Mathematical Society
+and Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
+
+For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
+ LaTeX: A Document Preparation System, by Leslie Lamport,
+Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
+ The LaTeX Companion, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach,
+and Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
+
+############################################################
+Commands
+############################################################
+
+A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists
+of a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or
+(b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets,
+[], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {},
+are required.
+
+NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower
+case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
+
+ Counters: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+ Cross References: Automatic referencing.
+ Definitions: Define your own commands etc.
+ Document Classes: Some of the various classes available.
+ Environments: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+ Footnotes: How to produce footnotes.
+ Layout: Controlling the page layout.
+ Lengths: The length commands.
+ Letters: The letter class.
+ Line & Page Breaking: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
+ Making Paragraphs: Paragraph commands.
+ Margin Notes: Putting remarks in the margin.
+ Math Formulae: How to create mathematical formulae.
+ Modes: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+ Page Styles: Various styles of page layout.
+ Sectioning: How to section properly.
+ Spaces & Boxes: All the associated commands.
+ Special Characters: Special reserved characters.
+ Splitting the Input: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+ Starting & Ending: The formal start & end layouts.
+ Table of Contents: How to create a table of contents.
+ Terminal Input/Output: User interaction.
+ Typefaces: Such as bold, italics etc.
+
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Paragraphs.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Paragraphs.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b127d75429 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Paragraphs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +############################################################
+Making Paragraphs
+############################################################
+
+A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines
+-- lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not
+appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in
+math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command.
+
+ \indent: Indent this paragraph.
+ \noindent: Do not indent this paragraph.
+ \par: Another way of writing a blank line.
+
+############################################################
+ \indent ::indent:
+############################################################
+\indent
+This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width
+of the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph
+indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+############################################################
+ \noindent ::noindent::
+############################################################
+\noindent
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses
+the paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the
+middle of a paragraph.
+############################################################
+ \par ::par::
+############################################################
+Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+environment definitions easier to read.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Parameters.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Parameters.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee764281a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Parameters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,484 @@ +############################################################
+Parameters
+############################################################
+
+The input file specification indicates the file to be
+formatted; TeX uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If
+you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the
+terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string
+as a parameter to the command; e.g.
+
+ latex "\scrollmode\input foo.tex"
+
+will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error.
+Output files are always created in the current directory.
+When you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the
+output names on the file specification associated with the
+logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically texput.log.
+############################################################
+Concept Index
+a
+Accessing any character of a font
+Aligning Equations
+Appendix, creating
+Arrays, math
+article class
+Author, for titlepage
+b
+Bibliography, creating (automatically)
+Bibliography, creating (manually)
+BibTeX, using
+book class
+Boxes
+c
+Cc list
+Centering text
+Centering text, environment for
+Characters, reserved
+Characters, special
+Classes of document
+Commands, defining new ones
+Computer programs, typesetting
+Counters, a list of
+Counters, creating
+Counters, getting the value of
+Counters, setting
+Creating letters
+Creating pictures
+Creating tables
+Cross referencing
+Cross referencing using page number
+Cross referencing using section number
+d
+Date, for titlepage
+Defining a new command
+Defining new environments
+Defining new fonts
+Defining new theorems
+Displaying quoted text
+Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
+Document Classes
+e
+Enclosed material
+Ending & Starting
+Enlarge current page
+Environments
+Environments, defining
+Equations, aligning
+Equations, environment for
+exponent
+f
+Figures, footnotes in
+Flushing a page
+Font commands, low-level
+Font Sizes
+Font Styles
+Fonts
+Fonts, new commands for
+Footnotes in figures
+Footnotes, creating
+Formatting Text
+Formulae, environment for
+Formulae, maths
+g
+Global options
+Greek letters
+h
+Hyphenation, defining
+Hyphenation, forcing
+i
+Indent, forcing
+Indent, suppressing
+Input file, splitting
+Input/Output
+Inserting figures
+j
+Justification, ragged left
+Justification, ragged right
+l
+Labelled lists, creating
+LaTeX overview
+Layout commands
+Left-justifying text
+Left-justifying text, environment for
+Left-to-right mode
+Lengths, adding to
+Lengths, defining a new
+Lengths, defining and using
+Lengths, predefined
+Lengths, setting value of
+letter class
+Letters
+Letters, ending
+Letters, starting
+Line Breaking
+Line breaks
+Lines in tables
+Lining text up in columns using tab stops
+Lining text up in tables
+Lists of items
+Lists of items, generic
+Lists of items, numbered
+Loading additional packages
+Low-level font commands
+LR mode
+m
+Making a title page
+Making paragraphs
+Margin Notes
+Math Formulae
+Math mode
+Math mode, entering
+Math mode, spacing
+Maths Miscellany
+Maths symbols
+Minipage, creating a
+Modes
+Multicolumn text
+n
+New line, starting
+New line, starting (paragraph mode)
+New Page
+Notes in the margin
+o
+Options, global
+Overview of LaTeX
+p
+Packages, loading
+Page break, forcing
+Page Breaking
+Page Formatting
+Page numbering
+Page styles
+Paragraph mode
+Paragraph, starting a new
+Paragraphs
+Pictures, creating
+Poetry, an environment for
+Predefined lengths
+Programs, typesetting
+q
+Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
+Quoted text, displaying
+r
+Ragged left text
+Ragged left text, environment for
+Ragged right text
+Ragged right text, environment for
+Remarks in the margin
+report class
+Reserved Characters
+Right-justifying text
+Right-justifying text, environment for
+s
+Sectioning
+Simulating typed text
+Sizes of text
+Space, inserting vertical
+Spaces
+Spacing, within Math mode
+Special Characters
+Splitting the input file
+Starting & Ending
+Starting on a right-hand page
+Styles of text
+Styles, page
+Subscript
+Superscript
+Symbols
+t
+Tab stops, using
+Table of Contents, creating
+Tables, creating
+Terminal Input/Output
+Thanks, for titlepage
+Theorems, defining
+Theorems, typesetting
+Title making
+Title pages, creating
+Title, for titlepage
+Typed text, simulating
+Typeface Sizes
+Typeface Styles
+Typefaces
+u
+Using BibTeX
+v
+Variables, a list of
+Verbatim text
+Vertical space, inserting
+Command Index
+$
+$
+\
+\!
+\' (tabbing)
+\(
+\)
+\+
+\,
+\- (hyphenation)
+\- (tabbing)
+\;
+\<
+\=
+\>
+\[
+\\
+\]
+\` (tabbing)
+\a
+\addcontentsline
+\address
+\addtocontents
+\addtocounter
+\addtolength
+\addvspace
+\alph
+\Alph
+\appendix
+\arabic
+\author
+\backslash
+\begin
+\bfseries
+\bibitem
+\bibliography
+\bibliographystyle
+\bigskip
+\caption
+\cc
+\cdots
+\centering
+\chapter
+\circle
+\cite
+\cleardoublepage
+\clearpage
+\cline
+\closing
+\COLON
+\dashbox
+\date
+\ddots
+\depth
+\documentclass
+\dotfill
+\emph
+\encl
+\end
+\enlargethispage
+\fbox
+\flushbottom
+\fnsymbol
+\fontencoding
+\fontfamily
+\fontseries
+\fontshape
+\fontsize
+\footnote
+\footnotemark
+\footnotesize
+\footnotetext
+\frac
+\frame
+\framebox, \framebox
+\fussy
+\height
+\hfill
+\hline
+\hrulefill
+\hspace
+\Huge
+\huge
+\hyphenation
+\include
+\includeonly
+\indent
+\input
+\item
+\itshape
+\kill
+\label
+\large
+\LARGE
+\Large
+\ldots
+\lefteqn
+\line
+\linebreak
+\linethickness
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+\location
+\makebox
+\makebox (picture)
+\makelabels
+\maketitle
+\markboth
+\markright
+\mathbf
+\mathcal
+\mathit
+\mathnormal
+\mathrm
+\mathsf
+\mathtt
+\mathversion
+\mbox
+\mdseries
+\medskip
+\multicolumn
+\multiput
+\name
+\newcommand
+\newcounter
+\newenvironment
+\newfont
+\newlength
+\newline
+\newpage
+\newsavebox
+\newtheorem
+\nocite
+\nofiles
+\noindent
+\nolinebreak
+\nopagebreak
+\normalfont
+\normalsize
+\onecolumn
+\opening
+\oval
+\overbrace
+\overline
+\pagebreak
+\pagenumbering
+\pageref
+\pagestyle
+\par
+\paragraph
+\parbox
+\ps
+\pushtabs, \pushtabs
+\put
+\raggedbottom
+\raggedleft
+\raggedright
+\raisebox
+\ref
+\refstepcounter
+\rmfamily
+\roman
+\Roman
+\rule
+\savebox
+\sbox
+\scriptsize
+\scshape
+\selectfont
+\setcounter
+\setlength
+\settodepth
+\settoheight
+\settowidth
+\sffamily
+\shortstack
+\signature
+\sloppy
+\slshape
+\small
+\smallskip
+\sqrt
+\startbreaks
+\stepcounter
+\stopbreaks
+\subparagraph
+\subsection
+\subsubsection
+\symbol
+\tableofcontents
+\telephone
+\textbf
+\textit
+\textmd
+\textnormal
+\textrm
+\textsc
+\textsf
+\textsl
+\texttt
+\textup
+\thanks
+\thispagestyle
+\tiny
+\title
+\today
+\totalheight
+\ttfamily
+\twocolumn
+\typein
+\typeout
+\underbrace
+\underline
+\upshape
+\usebox
+\usecounter
+\usefont
+\usepackage
+\value
+\vdots
+\vector
+\verb
+\vfill
+\vline
+\vspace
+\width
+^
+^
+_
+_
+a
+array
+c
+center
+d
+description
+e
+enumerate
+eqnarray
+equation
+f
+figure
+flushleft
+flushright
+i
+itemize
+l
+letter
+list
+lrbox
+m
+minipage
+p
+picture
+q
+quotation
+quote
+t
+tabbing
+table
+tabular
+thebibliography
+theorem
+titlepage
+v
+verbatim
+verse
+
+
+
+This document was generated on 8 July 1996 using the texi2html translator
+version 1.50.
+
+
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Breaking.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Breaking.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d9df0a2519 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Breaking.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Line & Page Breaking
+############################################################
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is
+to translate your input file into a string of glyphs and
+spaces. To produce a printed document, this string must be
+broken into lines, and these lines must be broken into pages.
+In some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with
+the \\ command, but LaTeX usually does it for you.
+
+ \\: Start a new line.
+ \- (hyphenation): Insert explicit hyphenation.
+ \cleardoublepage: Start a new right-hand page.
+ \clearpage: Start a new page.
+ \enlargethispage: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+ \fussy: Be fussy about line breaking.
+ \hyphenation: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+ \linebreak: Break the line.
+ \newline: Break the line prematurely.
+ \newpage: Start a new page.
+ \nolinebreak: Don't break the current line.
+ \nopagebreak: Don't make a page break here.
+ \pagebreak: Please make a page break here.
+ \sloppy: Be sloppy about line breaking.
+
+############################################################
+ \\ ::\::
+############################################################
+\\[*][extra-space]
+The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
+optional argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra
+vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This
+can be a negative amount.
+The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except
+that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at
+that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will
+usually find all correct hyphenation points. The \- command
+is used for the exceptional cases.
+
+Note that when you insert \- commands in a word, the word
+will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the
+hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+############################################################
+ \cleardoublepage ::cleardoublepage::
+############################################################
+The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes
+all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input
+to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes
+the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a
+blank page if necessary.
+############################################################
+ \clearpage ::clearpage::
+############################################################
+The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all
+figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to
+be printed.
+############################################################
+ \enlargethispage ::enlargethispage::
+############################################################
+\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified
+amount; e.g.
+\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line.
+The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on
+the page as much as possible. This is normally used together
+with an explicit \pagebreak.
+############################################################
+ \fussy ::fussy::
+############################################################
+\fussy
+This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between
+words, but may produce overfull boxes.
+This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command.
+section \sloppy
+############################################################
+ \hyphenation ::hypentation::
+############################################################
+\hyphenation{words}
+The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points,
+where words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
+each hyphenation point is indicated by a - character.
+############################################################
+ \linebreak ::linebreak::
+############################################################
+\linebreak[number]
+The \linebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current line
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \linebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+The \linebreak command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
+extends to the right margin.
+############################################################
+ \newline ::newline::
+############################################################
+The \newline command breaks the line right where it is. It
+can only be used in paragraph mode.
+############################################################
+ \newpage ::newpage::
+############################################################
+The \newpage command ends the current page.
+############################################################
+ \nolinebreak ::nolinebreak::
+############################################################
+\nolinebreak[number]
+The \nolinebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current line at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nolinebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \nopagebreak ::nopagebreak::
+############################################################
+\nopagebreak[number]
+The \nopagebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+current page at the point of the command. With the optional
+argument, number, you can convert the \nopagebreak command
+from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from
+0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+############################################################
+ \pagebreak ::pagebreak::
+############################################################
+\pagebreak[number]
+The \pagebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current page
+at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+number, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand
+to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+############################################################
+ \sloppy ::sloppy::
+############################################################
+\sloppy
+This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
+This can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space
+between words. Lasts until a \fussy command is issued.
+section \fussy.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Characters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Characters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9747024003 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Characters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Special Characters ::#::%::symbol::
+############################################################
+
+The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+called "special printing characters", or simply
+"special characters".
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+Whenever you put one of these special characters into your
+file, you are doing something special. If you simply want
+the character to be printed just as any other letter, include
+a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce
+$ in your output.
+
+One exception to this rule is the \ itself because \\ has its
+own special meaning. A \ is produced by typing $\backslash$
+in your file.
+Also, \~ means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
+so you will probably want to use \verb instead.
+
+In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+know its number by using the \symbol command. For example,
+the character used for displaying spaces in the \verb*
+command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+\symbol{32}.
+
+You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal
+numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written
+ as \symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Contents.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Contents.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6aed95d968 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Contents.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Table of Contents
+############################################################
+::tableofcontents::listoffigures::listoftables::
+A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
+command. You put the command right where you want the table
+of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces
+a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page.
+If you want a new page after the table of contents, include
+a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command.
+
+There are similar commands \listoffigures and \listoftables
+for producing a list of figures and a list of tables,
+respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the
+table of contents.
+
+NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you
+cannot have the \nofiles command in your document.
+
+ \addcontentsline: Add an entry to table of
+ contents etc.
+ \addtocontents: Add text directly to table of
+ contents file etc.
+
+############################################################
+ \addcontentsline ::addcontentsline::
+############################################################
+\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}
+The \addcontentsline command adds an entry to the specified
+list or table where:
+
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ sec_unit controls the formatting of the entry. It
+ should be one of the following, depending upon
+ the value of the file argument:
+ toc -- the name of the sectional unit, such
+ as part or subsection.
+ lof -- figure
+ lot -- table
+ entry is the text of the entry.
+############################################################
+ \addtocontents ::addtocontents::
+############################################################
+\addtocontents{file}{text}
+The \addtocontents command adds text (or formatting commands)
+directly to the file that generates the table of contents or
+list of figures or tables.
+ file is the extension of the file on which information
+ is to be written: toc (table of contents),
+ lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ text is the information to be written.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Counters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Counters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67a9b180d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Counters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Counters
+############################################################
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated
+with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name
+of the environment or command that produces the number,
+except with no \. (enumi - enumiv are used for the nested
+enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters
+used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control
+numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+ \addtocounter: Add a quantity to a counter.
+ \alph: Print value of a counter using letters.
+ \arabic: Print value of a counter using numerals.
+ \fnsymbol: Print value of a counter using symbols.
+ \newcounter: Define a new counter.
+ \refstepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \roman: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
+ \setcounter: Set the value of a counter.
+ \stepcounter: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+ \usecounter: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+ \value: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+
+############################################################
+ \addtocounter ::addtocounter::
+############################################################
+\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+The \addtocounter command increments the counter by the
+amount specified by the value argument. The value argument
+can be negative.
+############################################################
+ \alph ::alph::
+############################################################
+\alph{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in alphabetic characters. The \alph command uses lower case
+alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., a, b, c... while the
+\Alph command uses upper case alphabetic characters,
+i.e., A, B, C....
+############################################################
+ \arabic ::arabic::
+############################################################
+\arabic{counter}
+The \arabic command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
+############################################################
+ \fnsymbol ::fnsymbol::
+############################################################
+\fnsymbol{counter}
+The \fnsymbol command causes the value of the counter to be
+printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be
+used for numbering footnotes. eg. From 1-9:
+NB. counter must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
+############################################################
+ \newcounter ::newcounter::
+############################################################
+\newcounter{foo}[counter]
+The \newcounter command defines a new counter named foo. The
+counter is initialized to zero.
+The optional argument [counter] causes the counter foo to be
+reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
+incremented.
+############################################################
+ \refstepcounter ::refstepcounter::
+############################################################
+\refstepcounter{counter}
+The \refstepcounter command works like \stepcounter See
+section \stepcounter, except it also defines the current
+\ref value to be the result of \thecounter.
+############################################################
+ \roman ::roman
+############################################################
+\roman{counter}
+This command causes the value of the counter to be printed
+in Roman numerals. The \roman command uses lower case Roman
+numerals, i.e., i, ii, iii..., while the \Roman command uses
+upper case Roman numerals, i.e., I, II, III....
+############################################################
+ \stepcounter ::stepcounter::
+############################################################
+\stepcounter{counter}
+The \stepcounter command adds one to the counter and resets
+all subsidiary counters.
+############################################################
+ \setcounter ::setcounter::
+############################################################
+\setcounter{counter}{value}
+The \setcounter command sets the value of the counter to that
+specified by the value argument.
+############################################################
+ \usecounter ::usecounter::
+############################################################
+\usecounter{counter}
+The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the
+list environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
+number the list items.
+############################################################
+ \value ::value::
+############################################################
+\value{counter}
+The \value command produces the value of the counter named
+in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects
+an integer or number, such as the second argument of a
+\setcounter or \addtocounter command, or in:
+ \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Definitions.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Definitions.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b9755f280a --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Definitions.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Definitions
+############################################################
+
+\newcommand: Define a new command.
+\newenvironment: Define a new environment.
+\newtheorem: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+\newfont: Define a new font name.
+
+############################################################
+ \newcommand ::newcommand::renewcommand::
+############################################################
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+ \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+These commands define (or redefine) a command.
+ cmd A command name beginning with a \. For
+ \newcommand it must not be already defined and
+ must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand it
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the command being defined. The
+ default is for the command to have no arguments.
+ def If this optional parameter is present, it means
+ that the command's first argument is optional.
+ The default value of the optional argument is def.
+ definition The text to be substituted for every
+ occurrence of cmd; a parameter of the form #n in
+ cmd is replaced by the text of the nth argument
+ when this substitution takes place.
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment ::newenvironment::renewenvironment::
+############################################################
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+These commands define or redefine an environment.
+ nam The name of the environment. For \newenvironment
+ there must be no currently defined environment
+ by that name, and the command \nam must be
+ undefined. For \renewenvironment the environment
+ must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+ arguments of the newly-defined environment.
+ The default is no arguments.
+ default If this is specified, the first argument
+ is optional, and default gives the default value
+ for that argument.
+ begdef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \begin{nam}; a parameter of the form #n in cmd
+ is replaced by the text of the nth argument when
+ this substitution takes place.
+ enddef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \end{nam}. It may not contain any argument
+ parameters.
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem ::newtheorem::
+############################################################
+ \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+ \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+This command defines a theorem-like environment.
+ env_name The name of the environment to be defined.
+ A string of letters. It must not be the
+ name of an existing environment or counter.
+ caption The text printed at the beginning of the
+ environment, right before the number.
+ This may simply say "Theorem", for example.
+ within The name of an already defined counter,
+ usually of a sectional unit. Provides a
+ means of resetting the new theorem counter
+ within the sectional unit.
+ numbered_like The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment.
+The \newtheorem command may have at most one optional argument.
+############################################################
+ \newfont ::newfont::
+############################################################
+\newfont{cmd}{font_name}
+Defines the command name cmd, which must not be currently
+defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
+font_name to be the current font.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Document.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Document.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a90954c521 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Document.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Document Classes
+############################################################
+
+Valid LaTeX document classes include:
+ article
+ report
+ letter
+ book
+ slides
+Other document classes are often available. See section
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide, for details. They are
+selected with the following command:
+
+ \documentclass [options] {class} ::documentclass::
+
+All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+options for
+selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
+ 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+(default is letter):
+ a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper,
+ legalpaper, executivepaper
+Miscellaneous options:
+ landscape -- selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
+ titlepage, notitlepage -- selects if there should be a
+ separate title page.
+ leqno -- equation number on left side of equations. Default
+ is right side.
+ fleqn -- displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
+ openbib -- use "open" bibliography format.
+ draft, final -- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
+ Default is final.
+These options are not available with the slides class:
+ oneside, twoside -- selects one- or twosided layout.
+ Default is oneside, except for the book class.
+ openright, openany -- determines if a chapter should
+ start on a right-hand page. Default is
+ openright for book.
+ onecolumn, twocolumn -- one or two columns. Defaults
+ to one column.
+The slides class offers the option clock for printing the
+time at the bottom of each note.
+
+If you specify more than one option, they must be separated
+by a comma. Additional packages are loaded by a
+
+ \usepackage[options]{pkg} ::usepackage::
+
+command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+separated by a comma.
+
+Any options given in the \documentclass command that are
+unknown by the selected document class are passed on to
+the packages loaded with \usepackage.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Environments.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Environments.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3068d8e7fa --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Environments.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,967 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Environments ::begin::end::
+############################################################
+
+LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+manner.
+
+ \begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{environment-name}
+
+ array: Math arrays.
+ center: Centred lines.
+ description: Labelled lists.
+ enumerate: Numbered lists.
+ eqnarray: Sequences of aligned equations.
+ equation: Displayed equation.
+ figure: Floating figures.
+ flushleft: Flushed left lines.
+ flushright: Flushed right lines.
+ itemize: Bulleted lists.
+ letter: Letters.
+ list: Generic list environment.
+ minipage: Miniature page.
+ picture: Picture with text, arrows, lines and
+ circles.
+ quotation: Indented environment with paragraph
+ indentation.
+ quote: Indented environment with no paragraph
+ indentation.
+ tabbing: Align text arbitrarily.
+ table: Floating tables.
+ tabular: Align text in columns.
+ thebibliography: Bibliography or reference list.
+ theorem: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+ titlepage: For hand crafted title pages.
+ verbatim: Simulating typed input.
+ verse: For poetry and other things.
+
+############################################################
+ array ::array::
+############################################################
+
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+
+Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has
+a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns
+and the alignment within them. Each column, coln, is specified
+by a single letter that tells how items in that row should
+be formatted.
+
+ c -- for centred
+ l -- for flush left
+ r -- for flush right
+
+Column entries must be separated by an &. Column entries may
+include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+Note that the array environment can only be used in math mode,
+so normally it is used inside an equation environment.
+############################################################
+ center ::center::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{center}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{center}
+
+The center environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are centred within the left and
+right margins on the current page. Each line must be
+terminated with the string \\.
+
+\centering: The declaration form of the center environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \centering ::centering::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the center environment. This
+declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote
+or in a parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centred
+on the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning
+of the figure or table environment.
+
+Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does
+not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ description ::discription::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [label] First item
+ \item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{description}
+
+The description environment is used to make labelled lists.
+The label is bold face and flushed right.
+############################################################
+ enumerate ::enumerate::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+The enumerate environment produces a numbered list.
+Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments.
+
+Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command.
+There must be at least one \item command within the environment.
+The enumerate environment uses the enumi through enumiv
+counters (see section Counters). The type of numbering can be
+changed by redefining \theenumi etc.
+############################################################
+ eqnarray ::eqnarray::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ math formula 1 \\
+ math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of
+equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
+array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and
+consecutive items within a row separated by an &.
+
+An equation number is placed on every line unless that line
+has a \nonumber command.
+
+The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas
+across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush
+left in a box of zero width.
+############################################################
+ equation ::equation::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ math formula
+ \end{equation}
+
+The equation environment centres your equation on the page
+and places the equation number in the right margin.
+############################################################
+ figure ::figure::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+ \caption{figure title}
+ \end{figure}
+
+Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Figures will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h (Here) - at the position in the text where the
+ figure environment appears.
+ t (Top) - at the top of a text page.
+ b (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement tbp.
+
+The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc. you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your figure.
+############################################################
+ flushleft ::flushleft::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated
+with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedright: The declaration form of the flushleft
+ environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedright ::raggedright::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ flushright ::flushright::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{flushright}
+
+The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand
+margin. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.
+
+ \raggedleft: The declaration form of the flushright environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \raggedleft ::raggedleft::
+############################################################
+This declaration corresponds to the flushright environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+quote or in a parbox.
+
+Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command
+does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format,
+the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or
+\end command (of an environment like quote) that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+############################################################
+ itemize ::itemize::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{itemize}
+
+The itemize environment produces a "bulleted" list.
+Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments. Each item of an itemized list
+begins with an \item command. There must be at least one
+\item command within the environment. The itemize environment
+uses the itemi through itemiv counters (see section Counters).
+The type of numbering can be changed by redefining \theitemi
+etc.
+############################################################
+ letter ::letter::
+############################################################
+This environment is used for creating letters. See section
+Letters.
+############################################################
+ list ::list::item::
+############################################################
+The list environment is a generic environment which is used
+for defining many of the more specific environments. It is
+seldom used in documents, but often in macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{list}
+
+The {label} argument specifies how items should be labelled.
+This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box
+to form the label. This argument can and usually does contain
+other LaTeX commands.
+
+The {spacing} argument contains commands to change the spacing
+parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
+null, i.e., {}. This will select all default spacing which
+should suffice for most cases.
+############################################################
+ minipage ::minipage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
+ text
+ \end{minipage}
+
+The minipage environment is similar to a \parbox command. It
+takes the same optional position argument and mandatory width
+argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
+inside a minipage. Footnotes in a minipage environment are
+handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting
+footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext
+command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage
+instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter
+
+See section Counters.
+
+NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+minipage.
+############################################################
+ picture ::picture::
+############################################################
+ \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+ \end{picture}
+The picture environment allows you to create just about any
+kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and
+circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture
+by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number
+that may have a decimal point and a minus sign -- a number
+like 5, 2.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength
+has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
+length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of
+\unitlength anywhere you want, using the \setlength command,
+but strange things will happen if you try changing it inside
+the picture environment.
+
+A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5),
+specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5.
+Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to
+an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the
+picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it
+is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit
+the argument.
+
+The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is
+a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The
+environment produces a rectangular box with width and height
+determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+
+The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
+following the size argument, that can change the origin.
+(Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has
+been set to 1mm, the command
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and
+whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When
+you first draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument,
+leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to
+modify your picture by shifting everything, you just add the
+appropriate optional argument. The environment's mandatory
+argument determines the nominal size of the picture.
+
+This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
+LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture,
+or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX
+in determining how much room to leave for it.
+
+Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command.
+The command
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference
+point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
+objects will be described below. The \put command creates an LR box.
+You can put anything in the text argument of the \put command that
+you'd put into the argument of an \mbox and related commands. When
+you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of
+the box.
+
+Picture commands:
+
+ \circle: Draw a circle.
+ \dashbox: Draw a dashed box.
+ \frame: Draw a frame around an object.
+ \framebox (picture): Draw a box with a frame around it.
+ \line: Draw a straight line.
+ \linethickness: Set the line thickness.
+ \makebox (picture): Draw a box of the specified size.
+ \multiput: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+ \oval: Draw an ellipse.
+ \put: Place an object at a specified place.
+ \shortstack: Make a pile of objects.
+ \vector: Draw a line with an arrow.
+
+############################################################
+ \circle ::circle::
+############################################################
+\circle[*]{diameter}
+The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as
+close to the specified one as possible. If the *-form of the
+command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
+Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
+############################################################
+ \dashbox ::dashbox::
+############################################################
+Draws a box with a dashed line.
+\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}
+The \dashbox has an extra argument which specifies the width
+of each dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and
+height are multiples of the dash_length.
+############################################################
+ \frame ::frame::
+############################################################
+\frame{...}
+The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around the object
+specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom
+left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the
+frame and the object.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents
+of the box.
+############################################################
+ \line ::line::
+############################################################
+\line(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \line command draws a line of the specified length and
+slope.
+Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where
+x and y have integer values from -6 through 6.
+############################################################
+ \linethickness ::linethickness::
+############################################################
+\linethickness{dimension}
+Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture environment to be dimension, which must be a positive
+length. It does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and
+circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval to form the
+corners of an oval.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar
+to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify
+a width and height in multiples of \unitlength.
+The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant
+that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the
+following:
+ t - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+ b - Moves the item to the bottom
+ l - Moves the item to the left
+ r - Moves the item to the right
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \multiput ::multiput::
+############################################################
+\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}
+The \multiput command can be used when you are putting the
+same object in a regular pattern across a picture.
+############################################################
+ \oval ::oval::
+############################################################
+\oval(width,height)[portion]
+The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.
+The optional argument, [portion], allows you to select part
+of the oval.
+ t - Selects the top portion
+ b - Selects the bottom portion
+ r - Selects the right portion
+ l - Selects the left portion
+Note that the "corners" of the oval are made with quarter
+circles with a maximum
+
+radius of 20 pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes
+with rounded corners.
+############################################################
+ \put ::put::
+############################################################
+\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
+The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory
+argument at the given coordinates.
+############################################################
+ \shortstack ::shortstack::
+############################################################
+\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}
+The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The
+valid positions are:
+ r - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
+ l - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
+ c - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack
+ (default)
+############################################################
+ \vector ::vector::
+############################################################
+\vector(x slope,y slope){length}
+The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the
+specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie
+between -4 and +4, inclusive.
+
+############################################################
+ quotation ::quotation::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quotation}
+ text
+ \end{quotation}
+The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the
+left and the right.
+
+The text is justified at both margins and there is paragraph
+indentation.
+
+Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ quote ::quote::
+############################################################
+ \begin{quote}
+ text
+ \end{quote}
+The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left
+and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving
+a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+############################################################
+ tabbing ::tabbing::
+############################################################
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+ second row \> \> more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabbing}
+The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in
+columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them
+much the way you do with an ordinary typewriter.
+
+It is best suited for cases where the width of each column
+is constant and known in advance.
+
+This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular
+environment.
+
+The following commands can be used inside a tabbing
+enviroment:
+
+############################################################
+ \= ::=::
+############################################################
+Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+############################################################
+ \> ::>::
+############################################################
+Advances to the next tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \< ::<::
+############################################################
+This command allows you to put something to the left of the
+local margin without changing the margin. Can only be used
+at the start of the line.
+############################################################
+ \+ ::+::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the right.
+############################################################
+ \- ::-::
+############################################################
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+commands one tab stop to the left.
+############################################################
+ \' ::'::
+############################################################
+Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current
+column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\,
+or \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+against the current column's tab stop.
+############################################################
+ \` ::`::
+############################################################
+Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop,
+including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
+of the last column because here's no tab stop there. The \`
+command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or
+\end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command
+between the \` and the command that ends the line.
+############################################################
+ \kill ::kill::
+############################################################
+Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
+except that it throws away the current line instead of
+producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \-
+commands in that line remain in effect.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs ::pushtabs::
+############################################################
+Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing
+environment.
+############################################################
+ \pushtabs
+############################################################
+Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs.
+############################################################
+ \a ::a::
+############################################################
+In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not
+produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands \a=, \a'
+and \a` are used.
+
+This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+format:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+############################################################
+ table ::table::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+ \caption{table title}
+ \end{table}
+
+Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of
+a page. Tables will not be split between two pages.
+
+The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX
+can possibly put a float:
+ h : Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+ t : Top - at the top of a text page.
+ b : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+ p : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which
+ is a page containing no text, only floats.
+The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement [tbp].
+
+The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+title your table.
+############################################################
+ tabular ::tabular::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory
+and optional arguments consist of:
+ width Specifies the width of the tabular* environment.
+ There must be rubber space between columns that
+ can stretch to fill out the specified width.
+ pos Specifies the vertical position; default is
+ alignment on the centre of the environment.
+ t - align on top row
+ b - align on bottom row
+ cols Specifies the column formatting. It consists of
+ a sequence of the following specifiers,
+ corresponding to the sequence of columns and
+ intercolumn material.
+ l - A column of left-aligned items.
+ r - A column of right-aligned items.
+ c - A column of centred items.
+ | - A vertical line the full height and depth of
+ the environment.
+ @@{text} - This inserts text in every row. An
+ @@-expression suppresses the intercolumn space
+ normally inserted between columns; any desired
+ space between the inserted text and the adjacent
+ items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd}
+ command in an @@-expression causes an extra space
+ of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent
+ columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
+ command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this
+ extra space is not suppressed by an @@-expression.
+ An \extracolsep command can be used only in an
+ @@-expression in the cols argument.
+ p{wd} - Produces a column with each item typeset in
+ a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument
+ of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not
+ appear in the item, except in the following
+ situations:
+ 1. inside an environment like minipage,
+ array, or tabular.
+ 2. inside an explicit \parbox.
+ 3. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright,
+ or \raggedleft
+ declaration. The latter declarations must appear
+ inside braces or an environment when used in a
+ p-column element.
+ *{num}{cols} - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where
+ num is any positive integer and cols is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another
+ *-expression.
+
+These commands can be used inside a tabular environment:
+
+ \cline: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+ \hline: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+ \multicolumn: Make an item spanning several columns.
+ \vline: Draw a vertical line.
+
+############################################################
+ \cline ::cline::
+############################################################
+\cline{i-j}
+The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j,
+which are identified in the mandatory argument.
+############################################################
+ \hline ::hline::
+############################################################
+The \hline command will draw a horizontal line the width of
+the table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top,
+bottom, and between the rows of the table.
+############################################################
+ \multicolumn ::multicolumn::
+############################################################
+\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+The \multicolumn is used to make an entry that spans several
+columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the
+number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos,
+specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centred, l for
+flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
+text, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
+############################################################
+ \vline ::vline::
+############################################################
+The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the
+full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be
+used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also
+be used in an @@-expression.
+############################################################
+ thebibliography ::thebibliography::
+############################################################
+ \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+ \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ \end{thebibliography}
+The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or
+reference list. In the article class, this reference list is
+labelled "References"; in the report class, it is labelled
+"Bibliography".
+
+ widest-label: Text that, when printed, is
+ approximately as wide as the widest item
+ label produces by the \bibitem commands.
+ \bibitem: Specify a bibliography item.
+ \cite: Refer to a bibliography item.
+ \nocite: Include an item in the bibliography.
+ Using BibTeX: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+############################################################
+ \bibitem ::bibitem::
+############################################################
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label.
+If the label argument is missing, a number is generated as
+the label, using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any
+sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not
+containing a comma. This command writes an entry on the `.aux'
+file containing cite_key and the item's label. When this
+`.aux' file is read by the \begin{document} command, the
+item's label is associated with cite_key, causing the
+reference to cite_key by a \cite command to produce the
+associated label.
+############################################################
+ \cite ::cite::
+############################################################
+\cite[text]{key_list}
+The key_list argument is a list of citation keys. This command
+generates an in-text citation to the references associated
+with the keys in key_list by entries on the `.aux' file read
+by the \begin{document} command. The optional text argument
+will appear after the citation, i.e. \cite[p. 2]{knuth} might
+produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
+############################################################
+ \nocite ::nocite::
+############################################################
+\nocite{key_list}
+The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list,
+which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux'
+file.
+############################################################
+ Using BibTeX
+############################################################
+If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple
+of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+thebibliography environment. Instead, you include the lines
+
+ \bibliographystyle{style} ::bibliographystyle::
+ \bibliography{bibfile} ::bibliography::
+
+where style refers to a file style.bst, which defines how
+your citations will look. The standard styles distributed
+with BibTeX are:
+
+ alpha Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed
+ from name of author and year of publication.
+ plain Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+ unsrt Like plain, but entries are in order of
+ citation.
+ abbrv Like plain, but more compact labels.
+
+In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored
+to the demands of various publications.
+The argument to \bibliography refers to the file bibfile.bib,
+which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the
+entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in
+the bibliography.
+############################################################
+ theorem ::theorem::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+ \end{theorem}
+
+The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface
+followed by your theorem text.
+############################################################
+ titlepage ::titlepage::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ text
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page
+with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the
+following page to be numbered page one.
+
+Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command
+comes in handy for title pages.
+
+Note that you can use the \maketitle (see section \maketitle)
+command to produce a standard title page.
+############################################################
+ verbatim ::verbatim::
+############################################################
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ text
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment
+that gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns
+LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks
+having the same effect that they would on a typewriter.
+
+ \verb: The macro form of the verbatim environment.
+
+############################################################
+ \verb ::verb::
+############################################################
+\verb char literal_text char
+\verb*char literal_text char
+Typesets literal_text exactly as typed, including special
+characters and spaces, using a typewriter (\tt) type style.
+There may be no space between \verb or \verb* and char
+(space is shown here only for clarity). The *-form differs
+only in that spaces are printed as `\verb*| |'.
+############################################################
+ verse ::verse::
+############################################################
+ \begin{verse}
+ text
+ \end{verse}
+The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may
+find other uses for it.
+The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate
+the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank
+lines to separate the stanzas.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Footnotes.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Footnotes.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c1a925ef3f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Footnotes.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Footnotes
+############################################################
+
+Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can
+also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the
+\footnotetext commands. See the specific command for
+information on why you would use one over the other.
+
+ \footnote: Insert a footnote.
+ \footnotemark: Insert footnote mark only.
+ \footnotetext: Insert footnote text only.
+
+############################################################
+ \footnote ::footnote::
+############################################################
+\footnote[number]{text}
+The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at
+the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, number,
+is used to change the default footnote number. This command
+can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot
+use it in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures,
+tables or in a tabular environment.
+############################################################
+ \footnotemark ::footnotemark::
+############################################################
+The \footnotemark command puts the footnote number in the
+text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The
+text of the footnote is supplied by the \footnotetext command.
+This command can be used to produce several consecutive
+footnote markers referring to the same footnote by using
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+after the first \footnote command.
+############################################################
+ \footnotetext ::footnotetext::
+############################################################
+\footnotetext[number]{text}
+The \footnotetext command produces the text to be placed at
+the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after
+the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must
+appear in outer paragraph mode.
+
+The optional argument, number, is used to change the default
+footnote number.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Input.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Input.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..667be91ff1 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Input.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Splitting the Input
+############################################################
+
+A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than
+putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more
+efficient to split it into several smaller ones.
+Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one
+that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when
+you run LaTeX.
+
+ \include: Conditionally include a file.
+ \includeonly: Determine which files are included.
+ \input: Unconditionally include a file.
+
+############################################################
+ \include ::include::
+############################################################
+\include{file}
+The \include command is used in conjunction with the
+\includeonly command for selective inclusion of files. The
+file argument is the first name of a file, denoting `file.tex'.
+If file is one the file names in the file list of the
+\includeonly command or if there is no \includeonly command,
+the \include command is equivalent to
+
+ \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+
+except that if the file `file.tex' does not exist, then a
+warning message rather than an error is produced. If the file
+is not in the file list, the \include command is equivalent
+to \clearpage.
+
+The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a
+file read by another \include command.
+############################################################
+ \includeonly ::includeonly::
+############################################################
+\includeonly{file_list}
+The \includeonly command controls which files will be read
+in by an \include command. file_list should be a
+comma-separated list of filenames. Each filename must match
+exactly a filename specified in a \include command. This
+command can only appear in the preamble.
+############################################################
+ \input ::input::
+############################################################
+\input{file}
+The \input command causes the indicated file to be read and
+processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in
+the current file at that point. The file name may be a
+complete file name with extension or just a first name, in
+which case the file `file.tex' is used.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Layout.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Layout.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6408324b11 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Layout.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Layout
+############################################################
+
+Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout
+of the page.
+
+ \flushbottom: Make all text pages the same height.
+ \onecolumn: Use one-column layout.
+ \raggedbottom: Allow text pages of differing height.
+ \twocolumn: Use two-column layout.
+
+############################################################
+ \flushbottom ::flushbottom::
+############################################################
+The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same
+height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill
+out the page. This is the standard if twocolumn mode is
+selected.
+############################################################
+ \onecolumn ::onecolumn::
+############################################################
+The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+single-column output.
+############################################################
+ \raggedbottom ::raggedbottom::
+############################################################
+The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the height of
+the text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
+############################################################
+ \twocolumn ::twocolumn::
+############################################################
+\twocolumn[text]
+The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+two-column output. If the optional text argument is present,
+it is typeset in one-column mode.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Lengths.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Lengths.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..316439178d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Lengths.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@
+############################################################
+Lengths
+############################################################
+
+A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take
+a length as an argument.
+
+ \newlength: Define a new length.
+ \setlength: Set the value of a length.
+ \addtolength: Add a quantity to a length.
+ \settodepth: Set a length to the depth of something.
+ \settoheight: Set a length to the height of something.
+ \settowidth: Set a length to the width of something.
+ Predefined lengths: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+
+############################################################
+ \newlength ::newlength::
+############################################################
+\newlength{\gnat}
+The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument, \gnat,
+as a length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a
+\gnat command already exists.
+############################################################
+ \setlength ::setlength::
+############################################################
+\setlength{\gnat}{length}
+The \setlength command is used to set the value of a length
+command. The length argument can be expressed in any terms
+of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (in),
+millimetres (mm), points (pt), etc.
+############################################################
+ \addtolength ::addtolength::
+############################################################
+\addtolength{\gnat}{length}
+The \addtolength command increments a "length command" by the
+amount specified in the length argument. It can be a negative
+amount.
+############################################################
+ \settodepth ::settodepth::
+############################################################
+\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the depth of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settoheight ::settoheight::
+############################################################
+\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
+The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the height of the text argument.
+############################################################
+ \settowidth ::settowidth::
+############################################################
+\settowidth{\gnat}{text}
+The \settowidth command sets the value of a length command
+equal to the width of the text argument.
+
+Predefined lengths
+
+ \width ::width::
+ \height ::height::
+ \depth ::depth::
+ \totalheight ::totalheight::
+
+These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands
+
+See section Spaces & Boxes.
+
+They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box.
+\totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the
+text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Letters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Letters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9facb5ff98 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Letters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Letters
+############################################################
+You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+business. The letter document class is designed to make a
+number of letters at once, although you can make just one if
+you so desire.
+
+Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the
+other document classes, i.e., you must have the following
+commands as a minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+ \end{document}
+
+Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the
+name and address of the recipient. For example, you might
+have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+ \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text
+of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input.
+Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not
+work. The letter closes with a \closing command.
+After the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc
+command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar
+\encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands,
+use \\ to separate the items.
+
+These commands are used with the letter class:
+
+ \address: Your return address.
+ \cc: Cc list.
+ \closing: Saying goodbye.
+ \encl: List of enclosed material.
+ \location: Your organisation's address.
+ \makelabels: Making address labels.
+ \name: Your name, for the return address.
+ \opening: Saying hello.
+ \ps: Adding a postscript.
+ \signature: Your signature.
+ \startbreaks: Allow page breaks.
+ \stopbreaks: Disallow page breaks.
+ \telephone: Your phone number.
+
+############################################################
+ \address ::address::
+############################################################
+\address{Return address}
+The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated
+by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration,
+then the letter will be formatted for copying onto your
+organisation's standard letterhead. (See section Overview of
+LaTeX and Local Guide, for details on your local implementation).
+If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be
+formatted as a personal letter.
+############################################################
+ \cc ::cc::
+############################################################
+\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}
+Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+name is printed on a separate line.
+############################################################
+ \closing ::closing::
+############################################################
+\closing{text}
+The letter closes with a \closing command, i.e.,
+ \closing{Best Regards,}
+\encl
+\encl{CV\\Certificates}
+Generate a list of enclosed material.
+############################################################
+ \location ::location::
+############################################################
+\location{address}
+This modifies your organisation's standard address. This
+only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+############################################################
+ \makelabels ::makelabels::
+############################################################
+\makelabels{number}
+If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create
+a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before
+the letters.
+############################################################
+ \name ::name::
+############################################################
+\name{June Davenport}
+Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with
+the return address.
+############################################################
+ \opening ::opening::
+############################################################
+\opening{text}
+The letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory
+argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your
+letter, i.e.,
+ \opening{Dear Joe,}
+############################################################
+ \ps ::ps::
+############################################################
+\ps
+Use this command before a postscript.
+############################################################
+ \signature ::sinature::
+############################################################
+\signature{Harvey Swick}
+Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+underneath the space for your signature. Items that should
+go on separate lines should be separated by \\ commands.
+############################################################
+ \startbreaks ::startbreaks::
+############################################################
+\startbreaks
+Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again.
+############################################################
+ \stopbreaks ::stopbreaks::
+############################################################
+\stopbreaks
+Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs.
+############################################################
+ \telephone ::telephone::
+############################################################
+\telephone{number}
+This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Margin.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Margin.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c7ea4a45b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Margin.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Margin Notes ::marginpar::reversemarginpar::
+############################################################
+
+The command \marginpar[left]{right} creates a note in the
+margin. The first line will be at the same height as the line
+in the text where the \marginpar occurs.
+When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text
+will be placed
+ 1. in the right margin for one-sided layout
+ 2. in the outside margin for two-sided layout
+ 3. in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+ 4. By issuing the command \reversemarginpar, you can
+ force the marginal notes to go into the opposite
+ (inside) margin.
+When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left
+margin, and right is used for the right margin.
+The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can
+enable hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a
+\hspace{0pt} command.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Math.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Math.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ad4cb39a21 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Math.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Math Formulae ::(::)::[::]::$::
+############################################################
+
+There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+ math For Formulae that appear right in the text.
+ displaymath For Formulae that appear on their own line.
+ equation The same as the displaymath environment
+ except that it adds an equation number in
+ the right margin.
+The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only
+in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are
+used so often that they have the following short forms:
+
+ \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+ \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even
+shorter form:
+
+ $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+ Subscripts & Superscripts: Also known as exponent or index.
+ Math Symbols: Various mathematical squiggles.
+ Spacing in Math Mode: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+ Math Miscellany: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+
+############################################################
+ Subscripts & Superscripts ::_::^::
+############################################################
+To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just
+type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
+^{exp}. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
+that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right
+thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript.
+############################################################
+ Math Symbols
+############################################################
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely
+to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in
+math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source,
+you will get the symbol in your output.
+############################################################
+ Spacing in Math Mode
+############################################################
+In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and
+puts in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats
+mathematics the way it's done in mathematics texts. If you
+want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following four
+commands for use in math mode:
+
+ \; - a thick space ::;::
+ \: - a medium space :::::
+ \, - a thin space ::,::
+ \! - a negative thin space ::!::
+
+############################################################
+ Math Miscellany
+############################################################
+ \cdots ::cdots::
+Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to
+the centre of the line. eg.
+ \ddots ::ddots::
+Produces a diagonal ellipsis. eg.
+ \frac{num}{den} ::frac::
+Produces the fraction num divided by den. eg.
+ \ldots ::ldots::
+Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode, not
+just math mode. eg.
+ \overbrace{text} ::overbrace::
+Generates a brace over text. eg.
+ \overline{text} ::overline::
+Causes the argument text to be overlined. eg.
+ \sqrt[root]{arg} ::sqrt::
+Produces the square root of its argument. The optional argument,
+root, determines what root to produce, i.e., the cube root
+of x+y would be typed
+as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. eg.
+ \underbrace{text} ::underbrace::
+Generates text with a brace underneath. eg.
+ \underline{text} ::underline::
+Causes the argument text to be underlined. This command can
+also be used in paragraph and LR modes. eg.
+ \vdots ::vdots::
+Produces a vertical ellipsis. eg.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Modes.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Modes.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..55b108b597 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Modes.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Modes
+############################################################
+When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one
+of three modes:
+
+ Paragraph mode
+ Math mode
+ Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
+LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase
+to a different level, though not all level changes produce
+mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or
+leaving an environment, or when LaTeX is processing the
+argument of certain text-producing commands.
+
+"Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is
+in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks
+your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX
+is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula.
+In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output
+that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between
+them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from
+left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if
+you put a hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep
+typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and
+then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit
+on the line.
+
+LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox
+command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the
+box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
+formula in the box. There are also several text-producing
+commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in
+paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+environments will be called a parbox. When LaTeX is in paragraph
+mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner paragraph
+mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
+called "outer paragraph mode".
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Overview.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Overview.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ecb11b9a2d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Overview.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+############################################################
+
+The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+formatted. It produces at least three files as output:
+
+ 1. A "Device Independent", or `.dvi' file. This contains
+commands that can be translated into commands for a variety
+of output devices. You can view the output of LaTeX by using
+a program such as xdvi, which actually uses the `.dvi' file.
+ 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered
+in the input file.
+ 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX
+itself, for things such as sectioning.
+
+For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should
+consult The TeXbook by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9,
+published jointly by the American Mathematical Society
+and Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
+
+For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
+ LaTeX: A Document Preparation System, by Leslie Lamport,
+Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
+ The LaTeX Companion, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach,
+and Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
+
+############################################################
+Commands
+############################################################
+
+A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists
+of a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or
+(b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets,
+[], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {},
+are required.
+
+NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower
+case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
+
+ Counters: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+ Cross References: Automatic referencing.
+ Definitions: Define your own commands etc.
+ Document Classes: Some of the various classes available.
+ Environments: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+ Footnotes: How to produce footnotes.
+ Layout: Controlling the page layout.
+ Lengths: The length commands.
+ Letters: The letter class.
+ Line & Page Breaking: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
+ Making Paragraphs: Paragraph commands.
+ Margin Notes: Putting remarks in the margin.
+ Math Formulae: How to create mathematical formulae.
+ Modes: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+ Page Styles: Various styles of page layout.
+ Sectioning: How to section properly.
+ Spaces & Boxes: All the associated commands.
+ Special Characters: Special reserved characters.
+ Splitting the Input: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+ Starting & Ending: The formal start & end layouts.
+ Table of Contents: How to create a table of contents.
+ Terminal Input/Output: User interaction.
+ Typefaces: Such as bold, italics etc.
+
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Paragraphs.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Paragraphs.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..168478799d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Paragraphs.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Making Paragraphs
+############################################################
+
+A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines
+-- lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not
+appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in
+math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command.
+
+ \indent: Indent this paragraph.
+ \noindent: Do not indent this paragraph.
+ \par: Another way of writing a blank line.
+
+############################################################
+ \indent ::indent:
+############################################################
+\indent
+This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width
+of the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph
+indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+############################################################
+ \noindent ::noindent::
+############################################################
+\noindent
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses
+the paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the
+middle of a paragraph.
+############################################################
+ \par ::par::
+############################################################
+Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+environment definitions easier to read.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Parameters.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Parameters.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f4a63ed27 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Parameters.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,508 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Parameters
+############################################################
+
+The input file specification indicates the file to be
+formatted; TeX uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If
+you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the
+terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string
+as a parameter to the command; e.g.
+
+ latex "\scrollmode\input foo.tex"
+
+will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error.
+Output files are always created in the current directory.
+When you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the
+output names on the file specification associated with the
+logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically texput.log.
+############################################################
+Concept Index
+a
+Accessing any character of a font
+Aligning Equations
+Appendix, creating
+Arrays, math
+article class
+Author, for titlepage
+b
+Bibliography, creating (automatically)
+Bibliography, creating (manually)
+BibTeX, using
+book class
+Boxes
+c
+Cc list
+Centering text
+Centering text, environment for
+Characters, reserved
+Characters, special
+Classes of document
+Commands, defining new ones
+Computer programs, typesetting
+Counters, a list of
+Counters, creating
+Counters, getting the value of
+Counters, setting
+Creating letters
+Creating pictures
+Creating tables
+Cross referencing
+Cross referencing using page number
+Cross referencing using section number
+d
+Date, for titlepage
+Defining a new command
+Defining new environments
+Defining new fonts
+Defining new theorems
+Displaying quoted text
+Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
+Document Classes
+e
+Enclosed material
+Ending & Starting
+Enlarge current page
+Environments
+Environments, defining
+Equations, aligning
+Equations, environment for
+exponent
+f
+Figures, footnotes in
+Flushing a page
+Font commands, low-level
+Font Sizes
+Font Styles
+Fonts
+Fonts, new commands for
+Footnotes in figures
+Footnotes, creating
+Formatting Text
+Formulae, environment for
+Formulae, maths
+g
+Global options
+Greek letters
+h
+Hyphenation, defining
+Hyphenation, forcing
+i
+Indent, forcing
+Indent, suppressing
+Input file, splitting
+Input/Output
+Inserting figures
+j
+Justification, ragged left
+Justification, ragged right
+l
+Labelled lists, creating
+LaTeX overview
+Layout commands
+Left-justifying text
+Left-justifying text, environment for
+Left-to-right mode
+Lengths, adding to
+Lengths, defining a new
+Lengths, defining and using
+Lengths, predefined
+Lengths, setting value of
+letter class
+Letters
+Letters, ending
+Letters, starting
+Line Breaking
+Line breaks
+Lines in tables
+Lining text up in columns using tab stops
+Lining text up in tables
+Lists of items
+Lists of items, generic
+Lists of items, numbered
+Loading additional packages
+Low-level font commands
+LR mode
+m
+Making a title page
+Making paragraphs
+Margin Notes
+Math Formulae
+Math mode
+Math mode, entering
+Math mode, spacing
+Maths Miscellany
+Maths symbols
+Minipage, creating a
+Modes
+Multicolumn text
+n
+New line, starting
+New line, starting (paragraph mode)
+New Page
+Notes in the margin
+o
+Options, global
+Overview of LaTeX
+p
+Packages, loading
+Page break, forcing
+Page Breaking
+Page Formatting
+Page numbering
+Page styles
+Paragraph mode
+Paragraph, starting a new
+Paragraphs
+Pictures, creating
+Poetry, an environment for
+Predefined lengths
+Programs, typesetting
+q
+Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
+Quoted text, displaying
+r
+Ragged left text
+Ragged left text, environment for
+Ragged right text
+Ragged right text, environment for
+Remarks in the margin
+report class
+Reserved Characters
+Right-justifying text
+Right-justifying text, environment for
+s
+Sectioning
+Simulating typed text
+Sizes of text
+Space, inserting vertical
+Spaces
+Spacing, within Math mode
+Special Characters
+Splitting the input file
+Starting & Ending
+Starting on a right-hand page
+Styles of text
+Styles, page
+Subscript
+Superscript
+Symbols
+t
+Tab stops, using
+Table of Contents, creating
+Tables, creating
+Terminal Input/Output
+Thanks, for titlepage
+Theorems, defining
+Theorems, typesetting
+Title making
+Title pages, creating
+Title, for titlepage
+Typed text, simulating
+Typeface Sizes
+Typeface Styles
+Typefaces
+u
+Using BibTeX
+v
+Variables, a list of
+Verbatim text
+Vertical space, inserting
+Command Index
+$
+$
+\
+\!
+\' (tabbing)
+\(
+\)
+\+
+\,
+\- (hyphenation)
+\- (tabbing)
+\;
+\<
+\=
+\>
+\[
+\\
+\]
+\` (tabbing)
+\a
+\addcontentsline
+\address
+\addtocontents
+\addtocounter
+\addtolength
+\addvspace
+\alph
+\Alph
+\appendix
+\arabic
+\author
+\backslash
+\begin
+\bfseries
+\bibitem
+\bibliography
+\bibliographystyle
+\bigskip
+\caption
+\cc
+\cdots
+\centering
+\chapter
+\circle
+\cite
+\cleardoublepage
+\clearpage
+\cline
+\closing
+\COLON
+\dashbox
+\date
+\ddots
+\depth
+\documentclass
+\dotfill
+\emph
+\encl
+\end
+\enlargethispage
+\fbox
+\flushbottom
+\fnsymbol
+\fontencoding
+\fontfamily
+\fontseries
+\fontshape
+\fontsize
+\footnote
+\footnotemark
+\footnotesize
+\footnotetext
+\frac
+\frame
+\framebox, \framebox
+\fussy
+\height
+\hfill
+\hline
+\hrulefill
+\hspace
+\Huge
+\huge
+\hyphenation
+\include
+\includeonly
+\indent
+\input
+\item
+\itshape
+\kill
+\label
+\large
+\LARGE
+\Large
+\ldots
+\lefteqn
+\line
+\linebreak
+\linethickness
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+\location
+\makebox
+\makebox (picture)
+\makelabels
+\maketitle
+\markboth
+\markright
+\mathbf
+\mathcal
+\mathit
+\mathnormal
+\mathrm
+\mathsf
+\mathtt
+\mathversion
+\mbox
+\mdseries
+\medskip
+\multicolumn
+\multiput
+\name
+\newcommand
+\newcounter
+\newenvironment
+\newfont
+\newlength
+\newline
+\newpage
+\newsavebox
+\newtheorem
+\nocite
+\nofiles
+\noindent
+\nolinebreak
+\nopagebreak
+\normalfont
+\normalsize
+\onecolumn
+\opening
+\oval
+\overbrace
+\overline
+\pagebreak
+\pagenumbering
+\pageref
+\pagestyle
+\par
+\paragraph
+\parbox
+\ps
+\pushtabs, \pushtabs
+\put
+\raggedbottom
+\raggedleft
+\raggedright
+\raisebox
+\ref
+\refstepcounter
+\rmfamily
+\roman
+\Roman
+\rule
+\savebox
+\sbox
+\scriptsize
+\scshape
+\selectfont
+\setcounter
+\setlength
+\settodepth
+\settoheight
+\settowidth
+\sffamily
+\shortstack
+\signature
+\sloppy
+\slshape
+\small
+\smallskip
+\sqrt
+\startbreaks
+\stepcounter
+\stopbreaks
+\subparagraph
+\subsection
+\subsubsection
+\symbol
+\tableofcontents
+\telephone
+\textbf
+\textit
+\textmd
+\textnormal
+\textrm
+\textsc
+\textsf
+\textsl
+\texttt
+\textup
+\thanks
+\thispagestyle
+\tiny
+\title
+\today
+\totalheight
+\ttfamily
+\twocolumn
+\typein
+\typeout
+\underbrace
+\underline
+\upshape
+\usebox
+\usecounter
+\usefont
+\usepackage
+\value
+\vdots
+\vector
+\verb
+\vfill
+\vline
+\vspace
+\width
+^
+^
+_
+_
+a
+array
+c
+center
+d
+description
+e
+enumerate
+eqnarray
+equation
+f
+figure
+flushleft
+flushright
+i
+itemize
+l
+letter
+list
+lrbox
+m
+minipage
+p
+picture
+q
+quotation
+quote
+t
+tabbing
+table
+tabular
+thebibliography
+theorem
+titlepage
+v
+verbatim
+verse
+
+
+
+This document was generated on 8 July 1996 using the texi2html translator
+version 1.50.
+
+
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/References.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/References.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c623dbc9a --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/References.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Cross References
+############################################################
+
+One reason for numbering things like figures and equations
+is to refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more
+details."
+
+\label: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+\pageref: Refer to a page number.
+\ref: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+############################################################
+ \label ::label::
+############################################################
+\label{key}
+A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
+key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
+inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the key.
+
+A key can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+punctuation characters.
+
+Upper and lowercase letters are different.
+
+To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name,
+it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
+ cha for chapters
+ sec for lower-level sectioning commands
+ fig for figures
+ tab for tables
+ eq for equations
+Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:bandersnatch.
+############################################################
+ \pageref ::pageref::
+############################################################
+\pageref{key}
+The \pageref command produces the page number of the place
+in the text where the corresponding \label command appears.
+ie. where \label{key} appears.
+############################################################
+ \ref ::ref::
+############################################################
+\ref{key}
+The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation number, ... of the corresponding \label command.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Sectioning.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Sectioning.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3fa739b871 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Sectioning.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Sectioning
+############################################################
+
+Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+into units.
+
+ \part ::part::
+ \chapter (report and book class only) ::chapter::
+ \section ::section::
+ \subsection ::subsection::
+ \subsubsection ::subsubsection::
+ \paragraph ::paragraph::
+ \subparagraph ::subparagraph::
+
+All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
+
+ \chapter[optional]{title}
+
+In addition to providing the heading in the text, the
+mandatory argument of the sectioning command can appear in
+two other places:
+
+ 1. The table of contents
+ 2. The running head at the top of the page
+
+You may not want the same thing to appear in these other
+two places as appears in the text heading. To handle this
+situation, the sectioning commands have an optional
+argument that provides the text for these other two
+purposes.
+
+All sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title,
+but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the
+table of contents.
+############################################################
+ \appendix ::appendix::
+############################################################
+The \appendix command changes the way sectional units are
+numbered. The \appendix command generates no text and does
+not affect the numbering of parts.
+
+The normal use of this command is something like
+
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Spaces.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Spaces.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..30fc6ed246 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Spaces.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Spaces & Boxes
+############################################################
+
+All the predefined length parameters See section Predefined
+lengths can be used in the arguments of the box-making
+commands.
+
+Horizontal space
+
+ \dotfill: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+ \hfill: Stretchable horizontal space.
+ \hrulefill: Stretchable horizontal rule.
+ \hspace: Fixed horizontal space. Vertical space
+ \addvspace: Fixed vertical space.
+ \bigskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \medskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \smallskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \vfill: Stretchable vertical space.
+ \vspace: Fixed vertical space. Boxes
+ \fbox: Framebox.
+ \framebox: Framebox, adjustable position.
+ lrbox: An environment like \sbox.
+ \makebox: Box, adjustable position.
+ \mbox: Box.
+ \newsavebox: Declare a name for saving a box.
+ \parbox: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+ \raisebox: Raise or lower text.
+ \rule: Lines and squares.
+ \savebox: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+ \sbox: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+ \usebox: Print saved text.
+
+############################################################
+ \dotfill ::dotfill::
+############################################################
+The \dotfill command produces a "rubber length" that produces
+dots instead of just spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hfill ::hfill::
+############################################################
+The \hfill fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hrulefill ::hrulefill::
+############################################################
+The \hrulefill fill command produces a "rubber length" which
+can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a
+horizontal rule.
+############################################################
+ \hspace ::hspace::
+############################################################
+\hspace[*]{length}
+The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \hspace command. Adding negative space
+is like backspacing.
+
+LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a
+line. If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include
+the optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \addvspace ::addvspace::
+############################################################
+\addvspace{length}
+The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of
+height length. However, if vertical space has already been
+added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace
+command, then this command will not add more space than
+needed to make the natural length of the total vertical space
+equal to length.
+############################################################
+ \bigskip ::bigskip::
+############################################################
+The \bigskip command is equivalent to \vspace{bigskipamount}
+where bigskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \medskip ::medskip::
+############################################################
+The \medskip command is equivalent to \vspace{medskipamount}
+where medskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \smallskip ::smallskip::
+############################################################
+\smallskip
+The \smallskip command is equivalent to \vspace{smallskipamount}
+where smallskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \vfill ::vfill::
+############################################################
+The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+stretch or shrink vertically.
+############################################################
+ \vspace ::vspace::
+############################################################
+\vspace[*]{length}
+The \vspace command adds vertical space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \vspace command.
+
+LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page.
+If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the
+optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \fbox ::fbox::
+############################################################
+\fbox{text}
+The \fbox command is exactly the same as the \mbox command,
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
+that it creates.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox[width][position]{text}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the
+contents of the box.
+############################################################
+ lrbox ::lrbox::
+############################################################
+\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
+This is the environment form of \sbox.
+The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd,
+which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox[width][position]{text}
+The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain
+the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the
+optional width argument. The position of the text within the
+box is determined by the optional position argument.
+
+ c -- centred (default)
+ l -- flushleft
+ r -- flushright
+ s -- stretch from left to right margin. The text must
+ contain stretchable space for this to work.
+
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \mbox ::mbox::
+############################################################
+\mbox{text}
+The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+text created by its argument.
+Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
+############################################################
+ \newsavebox ::newsavebox::
+############################################################
+\newsavebox{cmd}
+Declares cmd, which must be a command name that is not already
+defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
+############################################################
+ \parbox ::parbox::
+############################################################
+\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph
+mode. The \parbox has two mandatory arguments:
+
+ width - specifies the width of the parbox, and
+ text - the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
+LaTeX will position a parbox so its centre lines up with the
+centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows
+you to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox
+(default is top). If the height argument is not given, the
+box will have the natural height of the text.
+
+The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text
+inside the box. If it is not specified, position is used.
+
+ t -- text is placed at the top of the box.
+ c -- text is centred in the box.
+ b -- text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+ s -- stretch vertically. The text must contain
+ vertically stretchable space for this to work.
+
+A \parbox command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
+of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't
+use any of the paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox
+argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing
+a paragraph-making environment, you should use a minipage
+environment
+See section minipage.
+############################################################
+ \raisebox ::raisebox::
+############################################################
+\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}
+The \raisebox command is used to raise or lower text. The
+first mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to
+be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). The text
+itself is processed in LR mode.
+
+Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+different size than it really does - or a different size
+than LaTeX would normally think it has. The \raisebox
+command lets you tell LaTeX how tall it is. The first
+optional argument, extend-above, makes LaTeX think that the
+text extends above the line by the amount specified. The
+second optional argument, extend-below, makes LaTeX think
+that the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
+############################################################
+ \rule ::rule::
+############################################################
+\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}
+The \rule command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
+arguments are defined as follows:
+
+ raise-height - specifies how high to raise the rule
+ (optional)
+ width - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
+ thickness - specifies the thickness of the rule
+ (mandatory)
+
+############################################################
+ \savebox ::savebox::
+############################################################
+\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
+This command typeset text in a box just as for \makebox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \sbox ::sbox::
+############################################################
+\sbox{text}
+This commands typeset text in a box just as for \mbox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \usebox ::usebox::
+############################################################
+\usebox{cmd}
+Prints the box most recently saved in bin cmd by a \savebox
+command.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Starting.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Starting.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca09d87751 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Starting.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Starting & Ending ::document::
+############################################################
+
+Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{class}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+ \end{document}
+
+where the class selected is one of the valid classes for
+LaTeX. See section
+
+Document Classes (and see section Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide), for details of the various document classes
+available locally.
+
+You may include other LaTeX commands between the
+\documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (i.e., in
+the `preamble').
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Styles.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Styles.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9fc42f66e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Styles.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Page Styles
+############################################################
+
+The \documentclass command determines the size and position
+of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what
+goes in them.
+
+ \maketitle: Generate a title page.
+ \pagenumbering: Set the style used for page numbers.
+ \pagestyle: Change the headings/footings style.
+ \thispagestyle: Change the headings/footings style for
+ this page.
+
+############################################################
+ \maketitle ::maketitle::
+############################################################
+\maketitle
+The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title
+page - except in the article class, where the title normally
+goes at the top of the first page.
+Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+following declarations:
+
+See section Page Styles for the commands to give the information.
+
+ \author: Who wrote this stuff?
+ \date: The date the document was created.
+ \thanks: A special form of footnote.
+ \title: How to set the document title.
+
+############################################################
+ \author ::author::
+############################################################
+\author{names}
+The \author command declares the author(s), where names is a
+list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate
+lines within a single author's entry -- for example, to give
+the author's institution or address.
+############################################################
+ \date ::date::
+############################################################
+\date{text}
+The \date command declares text to be the document's date.
+With no \date command, the current date is used.
+############################################################
+ \thanks ::thanks::
+############################################################
+\thanks{text}
+The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title.
+############################################################
+ \title ::title::
+############################################################
+\title{text}
+The \title command declares text to be the title. Use \\ to
+tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
+############################################################
+ \pagenumbering ::pagenumbering::
+############################################################
+\pagenumbering{num_style}
+Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+num_style are:
+
+ arabic - Arabic numerals
+ roman - Lowercase Roman numerals
+ Roman - Uppercase Roman numerals
+ alph - Lowercase letters
+ Alph - Uppercase letters
+
+############################################################
+ \pagestyle ::pagestyle::
+############################################################
+\pagestyle{option}
+The \pagestyle command changes the style from the current
+page on throughout the remainder of your document.
+The valid options are:
+
+ plain - Just a plain page number.
+ empty - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
+ headings - Puts running headings on each page. The
+ document style specifies what goes in the headings.
+ myheadings - You specify what is to go in the heading
+ with the \markboth or the \markright commands.
+
+ \markboth: Set left and right headings.
+ \markright: Set right heading only.
+
+############################################################
+ \markboth ::markboth::
+############################################################
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+The \markboth command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting both the left and the right
+heading. You should note that a "left-hand heading" is
+generated by the last \markboth command before the end of
+the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated by the
+first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if
+there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \markright ::markright::
+############################################################
+\markright{right head}
+The \markright command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting the right heading, leaving the
+left heading unchanged. You should note that a "left-hand
+heading" is generated by the last \markboth command before
+the end of the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated
+by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page
+if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \thispagestyle ::thispagestyle::
+############################################################
+\thispagestyle{option}
+The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the
+\pagestyle command except that it changes the style for the
+current page only.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Terminal.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Terminal.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c0b6eb3ae7 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Terminal.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Terminal Input/Output
+############################################################
+
+ \typein: Read text from the terminal.
+ \typeout: Write text to the terminal.
+
+############################################################
+ \typein ::typein::
+############################################################
+\typein[cmd]{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait
+for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the
+cmd argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if
+it had been included in the input file in place of the
+\typein command. If the cmd argument is present, it must be
+a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined
+to be the typed input.
+############################################################
+ \typeout ::typeout::
+############################################################
+\typeout{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in
+msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand are
+replaced by their definitions before being printed.
+
+LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg.
+A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed.
+A ^^J in msg prints a newline.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Typefaces.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Typefaces.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..25179a894d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/Typefaces.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Typefaces
+############################################################
+
+The typeface is specified by giving the "size" and "style".
+A typeface is also called a "font".
+
+ Styles: Select roman, italics etc.
+ Sizes: Select point size.
+ Low-level font commands: Commands for wizards.
+
+############################################################
+ Styles
+############################################################
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+These commands are used like \textit{italics text}. The
+corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form",
+which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the
+current group.
+
+The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+\sffamily\bfseries to get sans serif boldface.
+
+You can also use the environment form of the declaration
+forms; e.g. \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}.
+
+ \textrm (\rmfamily) ::textrm::rmfamily::
+Roman.
+ \textit (\itshape) ::textit::itshape::
+ \emph ::emph::
+Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
+ \textmd (\mdseries) ::textmd::mdseries::
+Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
+ \textbf (\bfseries) ::textbf::bfseries::
+Boldface.
+ \textup (\upshape) ::textup::upshape::
+Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ \textsl (\slshape) ::textsl::slshape::
+Slanted.
+ \textsf (\sffamily) ::textsf::sffamily::
+Sans serif.
+ \textsc (\scshape) ::textsc::scshape::
+Small caps.
+ \texttt (\ttfamily) ::texttt::ttfamily::
+Typewriter.
+ \textnormal (\normalfont) ::textnormal::normalfont::
+Main document font.
+ \mathrm ::mathrm::
+Roman, for use in math mode.
+ \mathbf ::mathbf::
+Boldface, for use in math mode.
+ \mathsf ::mathsf::
+Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+ \mathtt ::mathtt::
+Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+ \mathit ::mathit::
+Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names
+with several letters.
+ \mathnormal ::mathnormal::
+For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style
+declaration.
+ \mathcal ::mathcal::
+`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+::mathversion::
+In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+\mathversion{normal} restores the default.
+
+############################################################
+ Sizes
+############################################################
+The following standard type size commands are supported by
+LaTeX. The commands as listed here are "declaration forms".
+The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type
+style command or the end of the current group.
+
+You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}.
+
+ \tiny ::tiny::
+ \scriptsize ::scriptsize::
+ \footnotesize ::footnotesize::
+ \small ::small::
+ \normalsize (default) ::normalsize::
+ \large ::large::
+ \Large ::Large::
+ \LARGE ::LARGE::
+ \huge ::huge::
+ \Huge ::Huge::
+
+############################################################
+ Low-level font commands
+############################################################
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros
+and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of
+the available ones. For full details, you should consult
+Chapter 7 of The LaTeX Companion.
+
+ \fontencoding{enc} ::fontencoding::
+
+Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1.
+
+ \fontfamily{family} ::fontfamily::
+
+Select font family. Valid families include:
+ cmr for Computer Modern Roman
+ cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter
+and numerous others.
+
+ \fontseries{series} ::fontseries::
+
+Select font series. Valid series include:
+ m Medium (normal)
+ b Bold
+ c Condensed
+ bc Bold condensed
+ bx Bold extended
+and various other combinations.
+
+ \fontshape{shape} ::fontshape::
+
+Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+ n Upright (normal)
+ it Italic
+ sl Slanted (oblique)
+ sc Small caps
+ ui Upright italics
+ ol Outline
+The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
+
+ \fontsize{size}{skip} ::fontsize::
+
+Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to
+switch to; the second is the \baselineskip to use. The unit
+of both parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that
+the baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size.
+
+ \selectfont ::selectfont::
+
+The changes made by calling the four font commands described
+above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called.
+
+ \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} ::usefont::
+
+Equivalent to calling \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries
+and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amscd.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amscd.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d47d278659 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amscd.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amscd.
+\usepackage{amscd} ::amscd::
+
+#################################################################
+diagrams ::CD::
+#################################################################
+subenviroment :
+CD
+example :
+\begin{CD}
+ A @@>>> B @@>>> C
+ D @@AAA E @@VVV F
+ G @@= H @@<<< I
+\end{CD}
+
+enviroment for diagrams
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@>textabove>textbelow>
+
+arrow to the right with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@<textabove<textbelow<
+
+arrow to the left with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@AtextleftAtextrightA
+
+arrow up with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@VtextleftVtextrightV
+
+arrow down with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@=
+
+equal symbol instead of an arrow
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7866cf81ba --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsfonts.
+\usepackage{amsfonts} ::amsfonts::
+
+#################################################################
+fonts
+#################################################################
+\mathbb{text} ::mathbb::
+
+supplies text as mathematical field letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\mathfrak{text} ::mathfrak::
+
+supplies text as fracture letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boldsymbol{symbol} ::boldsymbol::
+
+supplies a bold variant of symbol
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsmath.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsmath.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0b3aaa61f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsmath.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsmath.
+\usepackage{amsmath} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+mathematical subenviroments
+#################################################################
+Subenviroments must be invoked within a mathmatical enviroment.
+for example :
+\[\begin{split} ... \end{split}\]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : split ::split::
+\[\begin{split}
+ a&=b\\
+ c&=d
+\end{split}\]
+
+allows multible formulas with only one number.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : multline ::multline::
+\begin{multine}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{multine}
+
+for breaking one formula into several lines with only one number
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : gather ::gather::
+\begin{gather}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{gather}
+
+
+a group of formulas
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : align ::align::
+\begin{align}
+ a&=b & c&=d \\
+ e&=f & g&=h \\
+ \intertext{and}
+ i&=j & k&=l
+\end{align}
+
+an array of formulas
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+\intertext{text} ::intertext::
+
+allows normal textoutput within this mathmatical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : subequation ::subequation::
+
+mainnumbering gets an additional subnumbering with small letters
+\label{} does not distinguish between subnumbers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : ?matrix
+::matrix::pmatrix::bmatrix::vmatrix::Vmatrix::
+\[\begin{matrix}
+ 1 & 2 & 3 & a \\
+ 4 & 5 & 6 & b \\
+ 7 & 8 & 9 & c
+\end{matrix}\]
+
+produces a matrix
+matrix : without brackets
+pmatrik : with round brackets
+bmatrix : with angular brackets
+vmatrix : with vertical lines
+Vmatrix : with doubled vertical lines
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : cases ::cases::
+\[sgn(x)=\begin{cases}
+ -1 & \forall\ x<0 \\
+ 0 & x=0 \\
+ 1 & \forall\ x>0
+\end{cases}\]
+
+for "Cases" constructions
+#################################################################
+Sonstige Hilfen
+#################################################################
+size of brackets :
+\bigl \bigr little bit larger ::bigl::bigr::
+\Bigl \Bigr faktor 1.5 ::Bigl::Bigr::
+\biggl \biggr faktor 2 ::biggl::biggr::
+\Biggl \Biggr faktor 2.5 ::Biggl::Biggr::
+left right of the formula
+
+behind this should follow one of these bracket forms "(" "|" "[" ... "]" ")"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\substack{ \\ ...\\ \text{Hi} ... \\ } ::substack::
+example :
+\sum_\substack{i=0\\j=1}^\substack{10\\100}
+
+Pushes several lines of indices above or below.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\text{text} ::text::
+
+text within a mathematical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sideset{}{} ::sideset::
+example :
+\sideset{^1_2}{^3_4}\sum
+
+sets indices at the corners ..
+left above 1, left below 2, right above 3 and right below 4
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+xleftarrow{above} ::xleftarrow::xrightarrow::
+xleftarrow[below]{above}
+xrightarrow{above}
+xrightarrow[below]{above}
+
+
+An arrow which adapting the necessary length for displaying a text
+above itself and optionaly below, too.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boxed{formula} ::boxed::
+
+formula with a frame
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareMathOperator{latex-command}{output}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{latex-command}{output}
+::DeclareMathOperator::
+
+
+Allows the declaration of own new mathematical functions like
+ \sin \cos etc.
+* makes it display indices like \lim with in math enviroment.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amssymb.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amssymb.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..11accc23d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amssymb.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#########################################################
+\usepackage{amssymb} ::amssymb::
+#########################################################
+One symbol out of many supplied by the package amssymb.
+#########################################################
+One of the many symbols for which I didn't create a
+picture, because it would have been an endless work
+and boring, too. (mys)
+#########################################################@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsthm.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsthm.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3444018ad0 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/amsthm.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsthm.
+\usepackage{amsthm} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+Erstellen von Theoremen ::newtheorem::
+#################################################################
+
+\newtheorem{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}[latex-synonym2]{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}[section]
+
+Defines a new enviroment latex-synonym which is numbered as
+theorem with name "name" (f.e. axiom).
+\begin{latex-synonym}
+ bla
+\end{latex-synonym}
+for useing the new theorem
+
+* subdues the numbering.
+latex-synonym2 : uses the counter from this theorem
+section : an incretion of this counter would set the
+theorem counter to the value null
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\theoremstyle{style} ::theoremstyle::
+
+style :
+ plain (default)
+ definition
+ remark
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\swapnumbers ::swapnumbers::
+
+numbering on the left side of the theorem@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..489fe6ce70 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Tcltexed | Version 2.3 | 1. Feb. 1999 | Martin Strauss
+::copyright_hlp::
+A plaintexteditor for LaTeX based on scriptlanguage tcl/tk (8.x)
+
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauss
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f994b3e3f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +head 1.2; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.2; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.2 +date 2000.08.15.22.33.43; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next 1.1; + +1.1 +date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc
+@@
+ +1.2 +log +@*** empty log message *** +@ +text +@############################################################
+#::editor_hlp::
+# The Editorwindow
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+What's an Editorwindow ?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+For me a editorwindow is a window where I am able to work on
+a text under Tcltexed. Each editorwindow is assigned to one
+text. Two attributs ar important several editorwindows exist:
+ the focus
+ and the marking of one of them to be the maindocument
+-----
+The focus ownes the editorwindow, which was at last in the
+forground. All actions outside of the editorwindows opened
+will effect only the one having the focus. An Example for
+actions may be "text searching". One way to give one
+editorwindow the focus is by mousebuttons.
+-----
+If you have made on editorwindow a maindocument, all calls
+for extern programms like latex, xdvi, dvips and ghostview
+are directed to this document. In this case only the document
+of the maindocument gets compiled, so it should be executable
+for latex, while the others don't need to. If no editorwindow
+is declared to be the maindocument, each editorwindow
+behaves as if it is the only one.
+-----
+The window consists of the following components :
+ a menubar / popupbar (Only Windows)
+ a buttonbar
+ and an input field.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+usage of the buttonbar
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+From left to right :
+a "picture", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, ispell, Syntax, Quit
+and last but not least a display "L.C. ?.?"
+-----
+ "picture"
+The picture shows you the attributes of the editorwindow.
+If it has the focus it you see a picture of some circular waves.
+If it is colored (yellow/red) it is marked to be the maindocument.
+You can make an editorwindow a maindocument by mouse click
+on the picture. A second click removes the attribute to be
+a maindocument.
+-----
+ Save
+You know this, simply save this document in a file assignend
+to the editorwindow. If there is no file assigned "Save As"
+is executed instead.
+-----
+ Save As
+Save a document into a file you choose and assign
+it the actual editorwindow.
+-----
+ latex
+Executes "Save" for this editorwindow. Only it's document get's saved.
+Then the program latex is executed with the assigned file.
+If a maindocument exists as defined above the file assigned to
+it is executed instead. latex produces the file with extention dvi,
+the error output of latex is piped into the helpwindow of Tcltexed.
+(if there accures an error under unix you must stop latex
+by pressing "q" and "RETURN")
+To make it easier to create an index, with the latex-commands
+\makeindex \index etc. the program makeindex is started automaticly
+if a suiting filename with extension idx exists.
+-----
+ xdvi
+Executes xdvi (or an other viewer) for to view the last latex outputfile.
+Normaly the viewers reload the actual document if you produce
+a new dvi file, so you have to start this only on time.
+-----
+ dvips
+Makes a output for ghostscript printer out of the dvi file.
+The output will be saved into a file with extension ps.
+-----
+ ghostview
+Executes ghostview a viewer for ghostscript files with the last
+dvips outputfile.
+-----
+ ispell
+Executes "Save" for this editorwindow. Only it's document get's saved.
+Then ispell an interactive spell checker is executed and it's output
+reloaded into the editorwindow.
+-----
+ Syntax
+Syntax Highlightning, all textarrays starting with \ are supposed
+to be LaTeX-commands.
+If this command is known it's letters gets green, if not red.
+But be carefull, it doesn't look after the number of brackets behind
+the command. (latex will do that for you !)
+If it's text to be ignored (starting with %), the text get blue.
+For many green marked commands exists a short description.
+-----
+ Quit
+Close this editorwindow. If modified it request's if it realy
+should do so without saving before.
+-----
+ Display
+Shows you the position of the curser (line and row).
+One "line" is here defined as a number of letters follewd
+by a "RETURN", not as the number of real lines displayed by the
+editorwindow.
+If you press this Button, a window opens, with which you can
+change the position of the curser manualy by numbers.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Usage of th menubar / popupbar
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The menubar exists only if you use Windows and tcl/tk 8.x.
+Menubar and popupbar implement the same functions.
+Pressing the right mousebutton opens the popupbar.
+From top to bottom listed (left to right) :
+Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, Block, + % und - %.
+-----
+ Undo
+For to undo most of your last actions within the text. (I hopfully
+think so) In lack of infinity memory recources you can't undo
+everything.
+-----
+ Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear
+Bearbeitet den mit Maus selektierten Bereich, ratet mal was da
+passiert ... . Die Aktionen sind Windows und X-Window kompatibel.
+(theoretisch)
+-----
+ Spell
+Marks all not right spelled words in your text with a red color.
+-----
+ Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser is within and displays a list of
+words which nearly match this word.
+-----
+ Block
+Makes out of the selected aria a "Block - aria" ala Borland.
+-----
+ + %
+Inserts at the beginning of each selected line %, but only
+if there doesn't exist one.
+-> easy way to mark lines for latex to be ignored
+-----
+ - %
+The other way around as "+ %".
+-----
+ ...
+Looks for LaTeX-command matching with letters between
+the last "\" and the curser.
+Only commands marked under "Options -> packages"
+are listed here.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Usage of the inputfield
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Hey that's the part each editor has, don't ask silly questions.
+(look for Editor-keymap for some key combinations)
+-----
+ Spelling
+If you wanna register a word as right spelled, you have to set
+the curser on it and make a double click on the left button of
+your mouse.
+-----
+Examples for automatical complition of LaTeX-commands
+\fra ---> \frac{}{}
+\enumerate --->
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item
+ \end{enumerate}
+Compiltion of brackets
+{ ---> {}
+$ ---> $$
+-----
+For \begin and \end the name of the enviroment will be inserted
+as below :
+\beg --->
+ \begin{}
+ \end{}
+\bege --->
+ \begin{e}
+ \end{e}
+\begenum --->
+ \begin{enum}
+ \end{enum}
+-----
+If some text is selected by mouse and you press "\"
+than gets this not deleted as usualy done, but gets
+some brackets inserted around the selected text.
+@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision
+@ +text +@d38 1 +a38 1 +a "picture", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, Syntax, Quit
+d82 5 +@ + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0361a6066f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+#::editort_hlp::
+# keyboardmap for editorwindows
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+key bindings from Borland etc :
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block
+ <Control-k><b> Block Begin
+ <Control-k><k> Block End
+ <Control-k><c> Block Copy
+ <Control-k><m> Block Move
+ <Control-k><v> Block Move
+ <Control-k><y> Block Remove
+ <Control-k><%> Block (=> latex ignores this lines)
+ <Control-k><space> Block (opposite of binding above)
+more
+ <F1> Help
+ <F2> Save
+ <F3> Open file
+ <F4> Goto Curser
+ <F9> Excute latex
+ <Control-k><x> Save
+ <Control-k><h> Help
+ <Control-y> remove line
+ <Alt-BackSpace> Undo
+ <Shift-Delete> Cut
+ <Control-Insert> Copy
+ <Shift-Insert> Paste
+ <Control-Delete> Clear
+ <Control-l> Search again
+ <Alt-x> total termination of tcltexed
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Some from me :
+ <Control-w> Listing of all possible complitions
+ of a LaTeX-Command.
+ <Control-d> If the curser is within a known LaTeX-command,
+ tcltexed will search for the next occurrence of the command
+ within the text. If the curser is not within a known
+ LaTeX-command tcltexed will search for the next occurence of
+ \section
+ <Control-u> The same as <Control-d> but tcltexed will search backwards.
+ <Control-b> line breaking for a section
+ <Alt-b> line breaking for current line
+ <Control-B> opposite of <Control-b>
+ <Alt-B> opposite of <Alt-b>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block, Selection and Clipboard are normaly independent :
+ <Control-k><p> Insert from Clipboard
+ <Control-k><g> Copy to Clipboard
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Windows - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Press right mousebutton to open a menu with following entries
+ Cut Cut selected into Clipboard
+ Copy Copy selected into Clipboard
+ Paste insert text from Clipboard
+ Clear Remove selected
+ Block Make selected to Block
+ + % Make text to be ignored by latex
+ - % opposite of above
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Motif - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Press left mousebutton
+ one time Undo selection
+ twice Select whole word
+ trible Select whole line
+ Shift-einfach Change aria of selection
+ Shift-zweifach Complete selection aria to whole words
+ Shift-dreifach Complete selection aria to whole lines
+ Control Change curser position without losing the selection
+Curserkeys (CT)
+ <Shift-CT> Select aria (letters/lines)
+ <Control-CT> Shift Curser in steps
+ <Shift-Control-CT> Select aria (word/paragraph)
+[Up,Down] page up down (ST)
+ <Shift-ST> Select aria (pages)
+[Home,End] line start end (ZT)
+ <Shift-ZT> Select aria (until linestart/-end)
+ <Control-ZT> Shift curser to documentbegin/-end
+ <Shift-Control-ZT> Select aria (until documentbegin/-end)
+sonstige
+ <Shift-slash> Select whole document
+ <Insert> Insert selection
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+emacs-like
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ <Control-a> = Home
+ <Control-b> = Left
+ <Control-d> = Delete
+ <Control-e> = End
+ <Control-f> = Right
+ (<Control-k> other binding)
+ <Control-n> = Up
+ <Control-o> = Return+Left
+ <Control-p> = Down
+ <Control-t>
+ <Control-v> = Page up
+ <Meta-b>
+ <Meta-d>
+ <Meta-f>
+ <Meta-less> Shift Curser to text begin
+ <Meta-greater> Shift Curser to text begin
+ <Meta-Backspace>
+ <Meta-Delete>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/epsf.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/epsf.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..78fe5fb0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/epsf.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+package epsf
+############################################################
+\usepackage{epsf} ::epsf::
+\epsfxsize ::epsfxsize::
+\epsfbox{} ::epsfbox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I don't now how these commands work, you could include
+eps-pictures into your document.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I personaly use the latex2e package graphicx for that
+and it works quite fine.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d630439995 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,449 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@GNU General Public License - GNU Project - Free Software Foundation (FSF)
+::gpl_hlp::
+Table of Contents
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+
+Preamble
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE | Version 2, June 1991
+
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+0.
+ This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+
+1.
+ You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+
+2.
+ You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+
+2.a)
+ You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+2.b)
+ You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+2.c)
+ If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+
+3.
+ You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+
+3.a)
+ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.b)
+ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.c)
+ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+4.
+ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+5.
+ You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+
+6.
+ Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+
+7.
+ If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+8.
+ If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+
+9.
+ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+
+10.
+ If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+NO WARRANTY
+
+
+11.
+ BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+12.
+ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+- one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does. -
+Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+
+
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
+`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
+suits your program.
+
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+
+A copy of
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+
+GNU's home page
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html
+
+FSF & GNU inquiries & questions to
+gnu@@gnu.org"
+Other ways to contact
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html#ContactInfo
+
+Copyright notice above.
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA
+
+Updated:
+16 Feb 1998 tower
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a653cf3b03 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@ Tcltexed a LaTeX-Editor
+
+ !!! Take care, this program is under construction !!!!
+ In the meantime I have worked a lot with this program
+ but should you still find some errors, please contact me.
+ The easiest way is by email : mys@@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+
+ Short introduction :
+ A description of the program as a whole can be found under
+ "Help" - "Tcltexed".
+ It is always useful to try to press <F1>.
+ For all LaTeX-commands (I know) there exists a short description,
+ but I have only translated half of them so far.
+ The keymap is motif-like, emacs-like and joe-like (as in Borland Pascal).
+ Additionally some key-shortcuts of my own exist.
+ If you open an editor window, you will find a tiny picure in the upper
+ left hand corner. If it is coloured (click on it with mouse) this
+ window is marked as the main document.
+ If you click on a picture in the mathematics collection the
+ corresponding LaTeX-command will be inserted in the currently active
+ editor window. (The window where the picture (top left) shows some
+ circular waves)
+ If you insert a LaTeX-command tcltexed tries to complete this command.
+ (i.e. \G could only be \Gamma)
+ If you don't find that useful you can stop this behaviour using the menu
+ options.
+ The row of buttons at the top can be used to start the corresponding
+ programs using the document as source file.
+
+ This program will run on Unix, Linux, Windows 9x, Windows NT etc.
+ I just don't know anyone who will try it on a Macintosh as well ...
+ If you want to try, please contact me.
+
+ All you need to run this program is the script language Tcl/Tk, which
+ you can download for free.
+ You want to use my program? It is already available for "free":
+
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+
+ Questions? Found some errors? Some ideas for future developments?
+ feel free to send an email :
+
+ Martin Strauss
+ mys@@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/sonder.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/sonder.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..01da5add41 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/sonder.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Hae ?
+############################################################
+\today ::today::
+
+insert date of compilation into the document
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX ::LaTeX::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX2e ::LaTeX2e::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX2e
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d6c82f7da8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +head 1.2; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.2; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.2 +date 2000.08.15.21.26.27; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next 1.1; + +1.1 +date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc
+@@
+ +1.2 +log +@*** empty log message *** +@ +text +@############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed stands for tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Tcltexed is seprated into two parts. On one side the windows
+were you could edit a text, as described in "Editor", on
+the other side a lot of functions connected only to the base
+of the program, the main window.
+All actions which should work with a editorwindow will use
+the window which has had at last the focus. A clearer
+definiton of this made in "Editor".
+
+Below I will discribe and list all the functions you could
+start from the main window.
+
+menu items of the main window
+1. File
+ a) New
+Start a new LaTeX-document. There exists a predefined plain
+document within the source of Tcltexed. If the file etc/default.tex
+exists in the path were Tcltexed was installed this file will
+be used as default document.
+ b) Load
+Load a file into the editor ...
+ c) Append
+Append the text of the file at the position of the curser.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Save a text.
+ f) Quit
+Quit Tcltexed. All windows will get closed (if necessary a request
+for saveing the files in work is made)
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Clear the whole text.
+ b) line breaking
+Choose to break lines in the whole text, the current section or the
+current line. Each line which follows a line which ends with "space"
+will be interpreted as a continuition. Befor a line gets broken all
+continuation lines will be appended to it.
+With the last three menu items it is possible to append all continuition
+lines without breaking the whole line after it.
+If there are some spaces at the beginning of the first line, then
+all continuations will have these spaces as first letters.
+ c) Spelling
+Marks all not right spelled words in your current text with a red color.
+ d) add word
+For to register a word as spelled right, you must set
+the curser in the current text within it. To make sense the word
+must be marked to be misspelled ;-), or not ?
+ e) \"a..\ss -> ä..ß
+Translates latex commands for displaying special characters into
+their corresponding characters.
+ f) ä..ß -> \"a..\ss
+Translate none ascii characters into their corresponding latex commands.
+ g) "a.."s -> ä..ß
+Translates latex commands out of package [german]{babel} for displaying
+special characters into their corresponding characters.
+ h) ä..ß -> "a.."s
+Translate none ascii characters into their corresponding latex commands
+out of package [german]{babel}. This format is iutable for
+"ispell -t -d deutsch file.tex"
+ i) Search
+Search and Replace within a text.
+ j) My Own
+Here you can define your own LaTeX-sequences to be inserted into the
+text, if you press the button befor the entry. This definitions
+will besaved if you "Save Options". With the next start of Tcltexed
+this definitions will be the start values.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoBrackets
+If this button is aktivated, each inserted bracket to open ({[$
+will be followed by a bracket to close )}]$.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packages/etc
+Here you could activate several packages for automatical completion
+of it's LaTeX-commands.
+An example for complition :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+The more LaTeX-commands Tcltexed should recognise the later they
+get complited, because they look to similar for Tcltexed.
+ c) language
+Set here your favorite language for texts, buttons and help.
+A change here will only apear with the next start of Tcltexed,
+so you have to save the current options as discribed below.
+ d) font size
+Set font size for the editorwindows.
+ e) Save Options
+Save all configurations made by a user. This configuration
+will be loaded at the beginning of the next start of Tcltexed.
+(The file with the configurations is with unix .tcltexed,
+ with Windows tcltexed.ini . But please don't edit it yourself.
+Configurationfiles of older Tcltexedversion will be ignored
+and later overwriten.)
+
+4. Mathematics
+A gallery of pictures of the ouput of commands of the mathmatical
+enviroments. A press on a pictur will insert the command,
+represented by the picture, on the position of the curser.
+
+5. general
+Like 4. , but other common commands.
+
+6. Help
+ a) Tcltexed
+Under this you will find the description of Tcltexed itself.
+ b) LaTeX
+A index of all LaTeX-commands I have heard of.
+For a lot of LaTeX-commands I have writen a short help.
+ + <Return> + left mousebutton displays the help text
+ right mousebutton insert command
+ a keystroke A-Z a-z forces the list to jumb to commands
+ with this as first letter
+@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision
+@ +text +@d53 13 +a65 4 + e) Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser of the current text is within and
+displays a list of words which nearly match this word.
+ f) Search
+d67 1 +a67 1 + g) My Own
+@ + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt~,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt~,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c171925d1e --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt~,v @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.12; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed stands for tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Tcltexed is seprated into two parts. On one side the windows
+were you could edit a text, as described in "Editor", on
+the other side a lot of functions connected only to the base
+of the program, the main window.
+All actions which should work with a editorwindow will use
+the window which has had at last the focus. A clearer
+definiton of this made in "Editor".
+
+Below I will discribe and list all the functions you could
+start from the main window.
+
+menu items of the main window
+1. File
+ a) New
+Start a new LaTeX-document. There exists a predefined plain
+document within the source of Tcltexed. If the file etc/default.tex
+exists in the path were Tcltexed was installed this file will
+be used as default document.
+ b) Load
+Load a file into the editor ...
+ c) Append
+Append the text of the file at the position of the curser.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Save a text.
+ f) Quit
+Quit Tcltexed. All windows will get closed (if necessary a request
+for saveing the files in work is made)
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Clear the whole text.
+ b) line breaking
+Choose to break lines in the whole text, the current section or the
+current line. Each line which follows a line which ends with "space"
+will be interpreted as a continuition. Befor a line gets broken all
+continuition lines will be appended to it.
+With the last three menu items it is possible to append all continuition
+lines without breaking the whole line after it.
+ c) Spelling
+Marks all not right spelled words in your current text with a red color.
+ d) add word
+For to register a word as spelled right, you must set
+the curser in the current text within it. To make sense the word
+must be marked to be misspelled ;-), or not ?
+ e) Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser of the current text is within and
+displays a list of words which nearly match this word.
+ f) Search
+Search and Replace within a text.
+ g) My Own
+Here you can define your own LaTeX-sequences to be inserted into the
+text, if you press the button befor the entry. This definitions
+will besaved if you "Save Options". With the next start of Tcltexed
+this definitions will be the start values.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoBrackets
+If this button is aktivated, each inserted bracket to open ({[$
+will be followed by a bracket to close )}]$.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packages/etc
+Here you could activate several packages for automatical completion
+of it's LaTeX-commands.
+An example for complition :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+The more LaTeX-commands Tcltexed should recognise the later they
+get complited, because they look to similar for Tcltexed.
+ c) language
+Set here your favorite language for texts, buttons and help.
+A change here will only apear with the next start of Tcltexed,
+so you have to save the current options as discribed below.
+ d) font size
+Set font size for the editorwindows.
+ e) Save Options
+Save all configurations made by a user. This configuration
+will be loaded at the beginning of the next start of Tcltexed.
+(The file with the configurations is with unix .tcltexed,
+ with Windows tcltexed.ini . But please don't edit it yourself.
+Configurationfiles of older Tcltexedversion will be ignored
+and later overwriten.)
+
+4. Mathematics
+A gallery of pictures of the ouput of commands of the mathmatical
+enviroments. A press on a pictur will insert the command,
+represented by the picture, on the position of the curser.
+
+5. general
+Like 4. , but other common commands.
+
+6. Help
+ a) Tcltexed
+Under this you will find the description of Tcltexed itself.
+ b) LaTeX
+A index of all LaTeX-commands I have heard of.
+For a lot of LaTeX-commands I have writen a short help.
+ + <Return> + left mousebutton displays the help text
+ right mousebutton insert command
+ a keystroke A-Z a-z forces the list to jumb to commands
+ with this as first letter
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/References.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/References.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..612b4a8392 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/References.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +############################################################
+Cross References
+############################################################
+
+One reason for numbering things like figures and equations
+is to refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more
+details."
+
+\label: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+\pageref: Refer to a page number.
+\ref: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+############################################################
+ \label ::label::
+############################################################
+\label{key}
+A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
+key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
+inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the key.
+
+A key can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+punctuation characters.
+
+Upper and lowercase letters are different.
+
+To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name,
+it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
+ cha for chapters
+ sec for lower-level sectioning commands
+ fig for figures
+ tab for tables
+ eq for equations
+Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:bandersnatch.
+############################################################
+ \pageref ::pageref::
+############################################################
+\pageref{key}
+The \pageref command produces the page number of the place
+in the text where the corresponding \label command appears.
+ie. where \label{key} appears.
+############################################################
+ \ref ::ref::
+############################################################
+\ref{key}
+The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation number, ... of the corresponding \label command.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Sectioning.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Sectioning.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b70df63e72 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Sectioning.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +############################################################
+Sectioning
+############################################################
+
+Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+into units.
+
+ \part ::part::
+ \chapter (report and book class only) ::chapter::
+ \section ::section::
+ \subsection ::subsection::
+ \subsubsection ::subsubsection::
+ \paragraph ::paragraph::
+ \subparagraph ::subparagraph::
+
+All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
+
+ \chapter[optional]{title}
+
+In addition to providing the heading in the text, the
+mandatory argument of the sectioning command can appear in
+two other places:
+
+ 1. The table of contents
+ 2. The running head at the top of the page
+
+You may not want the same thing to appear in these other
+two places as appears in the text heading. To handle this
+situation, the sectioning commands have an optional
+argument that provides the text for these other two
+purposes.
+
+All sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title,
+but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the
+table of contents.
+############################################################
+ \appendix ::appendix::
+############################################################
+The \appendix command changes the way sectional units are
+numbered. The \appendix command generates no text and does
+not affect the numbering of parts.
+
+The normal use of this command is something like
+
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Spaces.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Spaces.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..598574f89c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Spaces.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +############################################################
+Spaces & Boxes
+############################################################
+
+All the predefined length parameters See section Predefined
+lengths can be used in the arguments of the box-making
+commands.
+
+Horizontal space
+
+ \dotfill: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+ \hfill: Stretchable horizontal space.
+ \hrulefill: Stretchable horizontal rule.
+ \hspace: Fixed horizontal space. Vertical space
+ \addvspace: Fixed vertical space.
+ \bigskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \medskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \smallskip: Fixed vertical space.
+ \vfill: Stretchable vertical space.
+ \vspace: Fixed vertical space. Boxes
+ \fbox: Framebox.
+ \framebox: Framebox, adjustable position.
+ lrbox: An environment like \sbox.
+ \makebox: Box, adjustable position.
+ \mbox: Box.
+ \newsavebox: Declare a name for saving a box.
+ \parbox: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+ \raisebox: Raise or lower text.
+ \rule: Lines and squares.
+ \savebox: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+ \sbox: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+ \usebox: Print saved text.
+
+############################################################
+ \dotfill ::dotfill::
+############################################################
+The \dotfill command produces a "rubber length" that produces
+dots instead of just spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hfill ::hfill::
+############################################################
+The \hfill fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
+############################################################
+ \hrulefill ::hrulefill::
+############################################################
+The \hrulefill fill command produces a "rubber length" which
+can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a
+horizontal rule.
+############################################################
+ \hspace ::hspace::
+############################################################
+\hspace[*]{length}
+The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \hspace command. Adding negative space
+is like backspacing.
+
+LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a
+line. If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include
+the optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \addvspace ::addvspace::
+############################################################
+\addvspace{length}
+The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of
+height length. However, if vertical space has already been
+added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace
+command, then this command will not add more space than
+needed to make the natural length of the total vertical space
+equal to length.
+############################################################
+ \bigskip ::bigskip::
+############################################################
+The \bigskip command is equivalent to \vspace{bigskipamount}
+where bigskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \medskip ::medskip::
+############################################################
+The \medskip command is equivalent to \vspace{medskipamount}
+where medskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \smallskip ::smallskip::
+############################################################
+\smallskip
+The \smallskip command is equivalent to \vspace{smallskipamount}
+where smallskipamount is determined by the document class.
+############################################################
+ \vfill ::vfill::
+############################################################
+The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+stretch or shrink vertically.
+############################################################
+ \vspace ::vspace::
+############################################################
+\vspace[*]{length}
+The \vspace command adds vertical space. The length of the
+space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+positive space with an \vspace command.
+
+LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page.
+If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the
+optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+############################################################
+ \fbox ::fbox::
+############################################################
+\fbox{text}
+The \fbox command is exactly the same as the \mbox command,
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
+that it creates.
+############################################################
+ \framebox ::framebox::
+############################################################
+\framebox[width][position]{text}
+The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of
+the box that it creates.
+The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the
+contents of the box.
+############################################################
+ lrbox ::lrbox::
+############################################################
+\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
+This is the environment form of \sbox.
+The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd,
+which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \makebox ::makebox::
+############################################################
+\makebox[width][position]{text}
+The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain
+the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the
+optional width argument. The position of the text within the
+box is determined by the optional position argument.
+
+ c -- centred (default)
+ l -- flushleft
+ r -- flushright
+ s -- stretch from left to right margin. The text must
+ contain stretchable space for this to work.
+
+See section \makebox.
+############################################################
+ \mbox ::mbox::
+############################################################
+\mbox{text}
+The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+text created by its argument.
+Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
+############################################################
+ \newsavebox ::newsavebox::
+############################################################
+\newsavebox{cmd}
+Declares cmd, which must be a command name that is not already
+defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
+############################################################
+ \parbox ::parbox::
+############################################################
+\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph
+mode. The \parbox has two mandatory arguments:
+
+ width - specifies the width of the parbox, and
+ text - the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
+LaTeX will position a parbox so its centre lines up with the
+centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows
+you to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox
+(default is top). If the height argument is not given, the
+box will have the natural height of the text.
+
+The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text
+inside the box. If it is not specified, position is used.
+
+ t -- text is placed at the top of the box.
+ c -- text is centred in the box.
+ b -- text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+ s -- stretch vertically. The text must contain
+ vertically stretchable space for this to work.
+
+A \parbox command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
+of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't
+use any of the paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox
+argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing
+a paragraph-making environment, you should use a minipage
+environment
+See section minipage.
+############################################################
+ \raisebox ::raisebox::
+############################################################
+\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}
+The \raisebox command is used to raise or lower text. The
+first mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to
+be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). The text
+itself is processed in LR mode.
+
+Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+different size than it really does - or a different size
+than LaTeX would normally think it has. The \raisebox
+command lets you tell LaTeX how tall it is. The first
+optional argument, extend-above, makes LaTeX think that the
+text extends above the line by the amount specified. The
+second optional argument, extend-below, makes LaTeX think
+that the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
+############################################################
+ \rule ::rule::
+############################################################
+\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}
+The \rule command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
+arguments are defined as follows:
+
+ raise-height - specifies how high to raise the rule
+ (optional)
+ width - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
+ thickness - specifies the thickness of the rule
+ (mandatory)
+
+############################################################
+ \savebox ::savebox::
+############################################################
+\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
+This command typeset text in a box just as for \makebox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \sbox ::sbox::
+############################################################
+\sbox{text}
+This commands typeset text in a box just as for \mbox.
+However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it
+in bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+############################################################
+ \usebox ::usebox::
+############################################################
+\usebox{cmd}
+Prints the box most recently saved in bin cmd by a \savebox
+command.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Starting.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Starting.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..84db129051 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Starting.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +############################################################
+Starting & Ending ::document::
+############################################################
+
+Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{class}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+ \end{document}
+
+where the class selected is one of the valid classes for
+LaTeX. See section
+
+Document Classes (and see section Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide), for details of the various document classes
+available locally.
+
+You may include other LaTeX commands between the
+\documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (i.e., in
+the `preamble').
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Styles.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Styles.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fee57f61fa --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Styles.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +############################################################
+Page Styles
+############################################################
+
+The \documentclass command determines the size and position
+of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what
+goes in them.
+
+ \maketitle: Generate a title page.
+ \pagenumbering: Set the style used for page numbers.
+ \pagestyle: Change the headings/footings style.
+ \thispagestyle: Change the headings/footings style for
+ this page.
+
+############################################################
+ \maketitle ::maketitle::
+############################################################
+\maketitle
+The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title
+page - except in the article class, where the title normally
+goes at the top of the first page.
+Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+following declarations:
+
+See section Page Styles for the commands to give the information.
+
+ \author: Who wrote this stuff?
+ \date: The date the document was created.
+ \thanks: A special form of footnote.
+ \title: How to set the document title.
+
+############################################################
+ \author ::author::
+############################################################
+\author{names}
+The \author command declares the author(s), where names is a
+list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate
+lines within a single author's entry -- for example, to give
+the author's institution or address.
+############################################################
+ \date ::date::
+############################################################
+\date{text}
+The \date command declares text to be the document's date.
+With no \date command, the current date is used.
+############################################################
+ \thanks ::thanks::
+############################################################
+\thanks{text}
+The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title.
+############################################################
+ \title ::title::
+############################################################
+\title{text}
+The \title command declares text to be the title. Use \\ to
+tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
+############################################################
+ \pagenumbering ::pagenumbering::
+############################################################
+\pagenumbering{num_style}
+Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+num_style are:
+
+ arabic - Arabic numerals
+ roman - Lowercase Roman numerals
+ Roman - Uppercase Roman numerals
+ alph - Lowercase letters
+ Alph - Uppercase letters
+
+############################################################
+ \pagestyle ::pagestyle::
+############################################################
+\pagestyle{option}
+The \pagestyle command changes the style from the current
+page on throughout the remainder of your document.
+The valid options are:
+
+ plain - Just a plain page number.
+ empty - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
+ headings - Puts running headings on each page. The
+ document style specifies what goes in the headings.
+ myheadings - You specify what is to go in the heading
+ with the \markboth or the \markright commands.
+
+ \markboth: Set left and right headings.
+ \markright: Set right heading only.
+
+############################################################
+ \markboth ::markboth::
+############################################################
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+The \markboth command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting both the left and the right
+heading. You should note that a "left-hand heading" is
+generated by the last \markboth command before the end of
+the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated by the
+first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if
+there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \markright ::markright::
+############################################################
+\markright{right head}
+The \markright command is used in conjunction with the page
+style myheadings for setting the right heading, leaving the
+left heading unchanged. You should note that a "left-hand
+heading" is generated by the last \markboth command before
+the end of the page, while a "right-hand heading" is generated
+by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page
+if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+############################################################
+ \thispagestyle ::thispagestyle::
+############################################################
+\thispagestyle{option}
+The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the
+\pagestyle command except that it changes the style for the
+current page only.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Terminal.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Terminal.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a2551a0cf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Terminal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +############################################################
+Terminal Input/Output
+############################################################
+
+ \typein: Read text from the terminal.
+ \typeout: Write text to the terminal.
+
+############################################################
+ \typein ::typein::
+############################################################
+\typein[cmd]{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait
+for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the
+cmd argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if
+it had been included in the input file in place of the
+\typein command. If the cmd argument is present, it must be
+a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined
+to be the typed input.
+############################################################
+ \typeout ::typeout::
+############################################################
+\typeout{msg}
+Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in
+msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand are
+replaced by their definitions before being printed.
+
+LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg.
+A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed.
+A ^^J in msg prints a newline.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Typefaces.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Typefaces.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0bb3fedf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/Typefaces.txt @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +############################################################
+Typefaces
+############################################################
+
+The typeface is specified by giving the "size" and "style".
+A typeface is also called a "font".
+
+ Styles: Select roman, italics etc.
+ Sizes: Select point size.
+ Low-level font commands: Commands for wizards.
+
+############################################################
+ Styles
+############################################################
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+These commands are used like \textit{italics text}. The
+corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form",
+which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the
+current group.
+
+The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+\sffamily\bfseries to get sans serif boldface.
+
+You can also use the environment form of the declaration
+forms; e.g. \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}.
+
+ \textrm (\rmfamily) ::textrm::rmfamily::
+Roman.
+ \textit (\itshape) ::textit::itshape::
+ \emph ::emph::
+Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
+ \textmd (\mdseries) ::textmd::mdseries::
+Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
+ \textbf (\bfseries) ::textbf::bfseries::
+Boldface.
+ \textup (\upshape) ::textup::upshape::
+Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ \textsl (\slshape) ::textsl::slshape::
+Slanted.
+ \textsf (\sffamily) ::textsf::sffamily::
+Sans serif.
+ \textsc (\scshape) ::textsc::scshape::
+Small caps.
+ \texttt (\ttfamily) ::texttt::ttfamily::
+Typewriter.
+ \textnormal (\normalfont) ::textnormal::normalfont::
+Main document font.
+ \mathrm ::mathrm::
+Roman, for use in math mode.
+ \mathbf ::mathbf::
+Boldface, for use in math mode.
+ \mathsf ::mathsf::
+Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+ \mathtt ::mathtt::
+Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+ \mathit ::mathit::
+Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names
+with several letters.
+ \mathnormal ::mathnormal::
+For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style
+declaration.
+ \mathcal ::mathcal::
+`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+::mathversion::
+In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+\mathversion{normal} restores the default.
+
+############################################################
+ Sizes
+############################################################
+The following standard type size commands are supported by
+LaTeX. The commands as listed here are "declaration forms".
+The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type
+style command or the end of the current group.
+
+You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}.
+
+ \tiny ::tiny::
+ \scriptsize ::scriptsize::
+ \footnotesize ::footnotesize::
+ \small ::small::
+ \normalsize (default) ::normalsize::
+ \large ::large::
+ \Large ::Large::
+ \LARGE ::LARGE::
+ \huge ::huge::
+ \Huge ::Huge::
+
+############################################################
+ Low-level font commands
+############################################################
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros
+and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of
+the available ones. For full details, you should consult
+Chapter 7 of The LaTeX Companion.
+
+ \fontencoding{enc} ::fontencoding::
+
+Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1.
+
+ \fontfamily{family} ::fontfamily::
+
+Select font family. Valid families include:
+ cmr for Computer Modern Roman
+ cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter
+and numerous others.
+
+ \fontseries{series} ::fontseries::
+
+Select font series. Valid series include:
+ m Medium (normal)
+ b Bold
+ c Condensed
+ bc Bold condensed
+ bx Bold extended
+and various other combinations.
+
+ \fontshape{shape} ::fontshape::
+
+Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+ n Upright (normal)
+ it Italic
+ sl Slanted (oblique)
+ sc Small caps
+ ui Upright italics
+ ol Outline
+The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
+
+ \fontsize{size}{skip} ::fontsize::
+
+Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to
+switch to; the second is the \baselineskip to use. The unit
+of both parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that
+the baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size.
+
+ \selectfont ::selectfont::
+
+The changes made by calling the four font commands described
+above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called.
+
+ \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} ::usefont::
+
+Equivalent to calling \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries
+and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amscd.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amscd.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b8369e1cc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amscd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amscd.
+\usepackage{amscd} ::amscd::
+
+#################################################################
+diagrams ::CD::
+#################################################################
+subenviroment :
+CD
+example :
+\begin{CD}
+ A @>>> B @>>> C
+ D @AAA E @VVV F
+ G @= H @<<< I
+\end{CD}
+
+enviroment for diagrams
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@>textabove>textbelow>
+
+arrow to the right with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@<textabove<textbelow<
+
+arrow to the left with writing above and below
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@AtextleftAtextrightA
+
+arrow up with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@VtextleftVtextrightV
+
+arrow down with writing at the left and right side
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@=
+
+equal symbol instead of an arrow
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsfonts.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsfonts.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ab340e27c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsfonts.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsfonts.
+\usepackage{amsfonts} ::amsfonts::
+
+#################################################################
+fonts
+#################################################################
+\mathbb{text} ::mathbb::
+
+supplies text as mathematical field letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\mathfrak{text} ::mathfrak::
+
+supplies text as fracture letters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boldsymbol{symbol} ::boldsymbol::
+
+supplies a bold variant of symbol
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsmath.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsmath.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3c33ff86cf --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsmath.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsmath.
+\usepackage{amsmath} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+mathematical subenviroments
+#################################################################
+Subenviroments must be invoked within a mathmatical enviroment.
+for example :
+\[\begin{split} ... \end{split}\]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : split ::split::
+\[\begin{split}
+ a&=b\\
+ c&=d
+\end{split}\]
+
+allows multible formulas with only one number.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : multline ::multline::
+\begin{multine}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{multine}
+
+for breaking one formula into several lines with only one number
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : gather ::gather::
+\begin{gather}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{gather}
+
+
+a group of formulas
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : align ::align::
+\begin{align}
+ a&=b & c&=d \\
+ e&=f & g&=h \\
+ \intertext{and}
+ i&=j & k&=l
+\end{align}
+
+an array of formulas
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+\intertext{text} ::intertext::
+
+allows normal textoutput within this mathmatical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+enviroment : subequation ::subequation::
+
+mainnumbering gets an additional subnumbering with small letters
+\label{} does not distinguish between subnumbers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : ?matrix
+::matrix::pmatrix::bmatrix::vmatrix::Vmatrix::
+\[\begin{matrix}
+ 1 & 2 & 3 & a \\
+ 4 & 5 & 6 & b \\
+ 7 & 8 & 9 & c
+\end{matrix}\]
+
+produces a matrix
+matrix : without brackets
+pmatrik : with round brackets
+bmatrix : with angular brackets
+vmatrix : with vertical lines
+Vmatrix : with doubled vertical lines
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+subenviroment : cases ::cases::
+\[sgn(x)=\begin{cases}
+ -1 & \forall\ x<0 \\
+ 0 & x=0 \\
+ 1 & \forall\ x>0
+\end{cases}\]
+
+for "Cases" constructions
+#################################################################
+Sonstige Hilfen
+#################################################################
+size of brackets :
+\bigl \bigr little bit larger ::bigl::bigr::
+\Bigl \Bigr faktor 1.5 ::Bigl::Bigr::
+\biggl \biggr faktor 2 ::biggl::biggr::
+\Biggl \Biggr faktor 2.5 ::Biggl::Biggr::
+left right of the formula
+
+behind this should follow one of these bracket forms "(" "|" "[" ... "]" ")"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\substack{ \\ ...\\ \text{Hi} ... \\ } ::substack::
+example :
+\sum_\substack{i=0\\j=1}^\substack{10\\100}
+
+Pushes several lines of indices above or below.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\text{text} ::text::
+
+text within a mathematical enviroment
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sideset{}{} ::sideset::
+example :
+\sideset{^1_2}{^3_4}\sum
+
+sets indices at the corners ..
+left above 1, left below 2, right above 3 and right below 4
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+xleftarrow{above} ::xleftarrow::xrightarrow::
+xleftarrow[below]{above}
+xrightarrow{above}
+xrightarrow[below]{above}
+
+
+An arrow which adapting the necessary length for displaying a text
+above itself and optionaly below, too.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\boxed{formula} ::boxed::
+
+formula with a frame
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareMathOperator{latex-command}{output}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{latex-command}{output}
+::DeclareMathOperator::
+
+
+Allows the declaration of own new mathematical functions like
+ \sin \cos etc.
+* makes it display indices like \lim with in math enviroment.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amssymb.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amssymb.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b1cd209fcd --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amssymb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +#########################################################
+\usepackage{amssymb} ::amssymb::
+#########################################################
+One symbol out of many supplied by the package amssymb.
+#########################################################
+One of the many symbols for which I didn't create a
+picture, because it would have been an endless work
+and boring, too. (mys)
+#########################################################
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsthm.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsthm.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af361c593c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/amsthm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+All commands below came with package amsthm.
+\usepackage{amsthm} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+Erstellen von Theoremen ::newtheorem::
+#################################################################
+
+\newtheorem{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}[latex-synonym2]{name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{name}[section]
+
+Defines a new enviroment latex-synonym which is numbered as
+theorem with name "name" (f.e. axiom).
+\begin{latex-synonym}
+ bla
+\end{latex-synonym}
+for useing the new theorem
+
+* subdues the numbering.
+latex-synonym2 : uses the counter from this theorem
+section : an incretion of this counter would set the
+theorem counter to the value null
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\theoremstyle{style} ::theoremstyle::
+
+style :
+ plain (default)
+ definition
+ remark
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\swapnumbers ::swapnumbers::
+
+numbering on the left side of the theorem
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/copyright_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/copyright_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df07b73c38 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/copyright_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Tcltexed | Version 2.8 | 02. Nov 2006 | Martin Strauss
+::copyright_hlp::
+A plaintexteditor for LaTeX based on scriptlanguage tcl/tk (8.x)
+
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauss
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/editor_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/editor_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cd2d795e88 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/editor_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +############################################################
+#::editor_hlp::
+# The Editorwindow
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+What's an Editorwindow ?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+For me a editorwindow is a window where I am able to work on
+a text under Tcltexed. Each editorwindow is assigned to one
+text. Two attributs ar important several editorwindows exist:
+ the focus
+ and the marking of one of them to be the maindocument
+-----
+The focus ownes the editorwindow, which was at last in the
+forground. All actions outside of the editorwindows opened
+will effect only the one having the focus. An Example for
+actions may be "text searching". One way to give one
+editorwindow the focus is by mousebuttons.
+-----
+If you have made on editorwindow a maindocument, all calls
+for extern programms like latex, xdvi, dvips and ghostview
+are directed to this document. In this case only the document
+of the maindocument gets compiled, so it should be executable
+for latex, while the others don't need to. If no editorwindow
+is declared to be the maindocument, each editorwindow
+behaves as if it is the only one.
+-----
+The window consists of the following components :
+ a menubar / popupbar (Only Windows)
+ a buttonbar
+ and an input field.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+usage of the buttonbar
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+From left to right :
+a "picture", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, ispell, Syntax, Quit
+and last but not least a display "L.C. ?.?"
+-----
+ "picture"
+The picture shows you the attributes of the editorwindow.
+If it has the focus it you see a picture of some circular waves.
+If it is colored (yellow/red) it is marked to be the maindocument.
+You can make an editorwindow a maindocument by mouse click
+on the picture. A second click removes the attribute to be
+a maindocument.
+-----
+ Save
+You know this, simply save this document in a file assignend
+to the editorwindow. If there is no file assigned "Save As"
+is executed instead.
+-----
+ Save As
+Save a document into a file you choose and assign
+it the actual editorwindow.
+-----
+ latex
+Executes "Save" for this editorwindow. Only it's document get's saved.
+Then the program latex is executed with the assigned file.
+If a maindocument exists as defined above the file assigned to
+it is executed instead. latex produces the file with extention dvi,
+the error output of latex is piped into the helpwindow of Tcltexed.
+(if there accures an error under unix you must stop latex
+by pressing "q" and "RETURN")
+To make it easier to create an index, with the latex-commands
+\makeindex \index etc. the program makeindex is started automaticly
+if a suiting filename with extension idx exists.
+-----
+ xdvi
+Executes xdvi (or an other viewer) for to view the last latex outputfile.
+Normaly the viewers reload the actual document if you produce
+a new dvi file, so you have to start this only on time.
+-----
+ dvips
+Makes a output for ghostscript printer out of the dvi file.
+The output will be saved into a file with extension ps.
+-----
+ ghostview
+Executes ghostview a viewer for ghostscript files with the last
+dvips outputfile.
+-----
+ ispell
+Executes "Save" for this editorwindow. Only it's document get's saved.
+Then ispell an interactive spell checker is executed and it's output
+reloaded into the editorwindow.
+-----
+ Syntax
+Syntax Highlightning, all textarrays starting with \ are supposed
+to be LaTeX-commands.
+If this command is known it's letters gets green, if not red.
+But be carefull, it doesn't look after the number of brackets behind
+the command. (latex will do that for you !)
+If it's text to be ignored (starting with %), the text get blue.
+For many green marked commands exists a short description.
+-----
+ Quit
+Close this editorwindow. If modified it request's if it realy
+should do so without saving before.
+-----
+ Display
+Shows you the position of the curser (line and row).
+One "line" is here defined as a number of letters follewd
+by a "RETURN", not as the number of real lines displayed by the
+editorwindow.
+If you press this Button, a window opens, with which you can
+change the position of the curser manualy by numbers.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Usage of th menubar / popupbar
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The menubar exists only if you use Windows and tcl/tk 8.x.
+Menubar and popupbar implement the same functions.
+Pressing the right mousebutton opens the popupbar.
+From top to bottom listed (left to right) :
+Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, Block, + % und - %.
+-----
+ Undo
+For to undo most of your last actions within the text. (I hopfully
+think so) In lack of infinity memory recources you can't undo
+everything.
+-----
+ Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear
+Bearbeitet den mit Maus selektierten Bereich, ratet mal was da
+passiert ... . Die Aktionen sind Windows und X-Window kompatibel.
+(theoretisch)
+-----
+ Spell
+Marks all not right spelled words in your text with a red color.
+-----
+ Nearly
+Takes the word which the curser is within and displays a list of
+words which nearly match this word.
+-----
+ Block
+Makes out of the selected aria a "Block - aria" ala Borland.
+-----
+ + %
+Inserts at the beginning of each selected line %, but only
+if there doesn't exist one.
+-> easy way to mark lines for latex to be ignored
+-----
+ - %
+The other way around as "+ %".
+-----
+ ...
+Looks for LaTeX-command matching with letters between
+the last "\" and the curser.
+Only commands marked under "Options -> packages"
+are listed here.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Usage of the inputfield
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Hey that's the part each editor has, don't ask silly questions.
+(look for Editor-keymap for some key combinations)
+-----
+ Spelling
+If you wanna register a word as right spelled, you have to set
+the curser on it and make a double click on the left button of
+your mouse.
+-----
+Examples for automatical complition of LaTeX-commands
+\fra ---> \frac{}{}
+\enumerate --->
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item
+ \end{enumerate}
+Compiltion of brackets
+{ ---> {}
+$ ---> $$
+-----
+For \begin and \end the name of the enviroment will be inserted
+as below :
+\beg --->
+ \begin{}
+ \end{}
+\bege --->
+ \begin{e}
+ \end{e}
+\begenum --->
+ \begin{enum}
+ \end{enum}
+-----
+If some text is selected by mouse and you press "\"
+than gets this not deleted as usualy done, but gets
+some brackets inserted around the selected text.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/editort_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/editort_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bce6a1d901 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/editort_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +############################################################
+#::editort_hlp::
+# keyboardmap for editorwindows
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+key bindings from Borland etc :
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block
+ <Control-k><b> Block Begin
+ <Control-k><k> Block End
+ <Control-k><c> Block Copy
+ <Control-k><m> Block Move
+ <Control-k><v> Block Move
+ <Control-k><y> Block Remove
+ <Control-k><%> Block (=> latex ignores this lines)
+ <Control-k><space> Block (opposite of binding above)
+more
+ <F1> Help
+ <F2> Save
+ <F3> Open file
+ <F4> Goto Curser
+ <F9> Excute latex
+ <Control-k><x> Save
+ <Control-k><h> Help
+ <Control-y> remove line
+ <Alt-BackSpace> Undo
+ <Shift-Delete> Cut
+ <Control-Insert> Copy
+ <Shift-Insert> Paste
+ <Control-Delete> Clear
+ <Control-l> Search again
+ <Alt-x> total termination of tcltexed
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Some from me :
+ <Control-w> Listing of all possible complitions
+ of a LaTeX-Command.
+ <Control-d> If the curser is within a known LaTeX-command,
+ tcltexed will search for the next occurrence of the command
+ within the text. If the curser is not within a known
+ LaTeX-command tcltexed will search for the next occurence of
+ \section
+ <Control-u> The same as <Control-d> but tcltexed will search backwards.
+ <Control-b> line breaking for a section
+ <Alt-b> line breaking for current line
+ <Control-B> opposite of <Control-b>
+ <Alt-B> opposite of <Alt-b>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block, Selection and Clipboard are normaly independent :
+ <Control-k><p> Insert from Clipboard
+ <Control-k><g> Copy to Clipboard
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Windows - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Press right mousebutton to open a menu with following entries
+ Cut Cut selected into Clipboard
+ Copy Copy selected into Clipboard
+ Paste insert text from Clipboard
+ Clear Remove selected
+ Block Make selected to Block
+ + % Make text to be ignored by latex
+ - % opposite of above
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Motif - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Press left mousebutton
+ one time Undo selection
+ twice Select whole word
+ trible Select whole line
+ Shift-einfach Change aria of selection
+ Shift-zweifach Complete selection aria to whole words
+ Shift-dreifach Complete selection aria to whole lines
+ Control Change curser position without losing the selection
+Curserkeys (CT)
+ <Shift-CT> Select aria (letters/lines)
+ <Control-CT> Shift Curser in steps
+ <Shift-Control-CT> Select aria (word/paragraph)
+[Up,Down] page up down (ST)
+ <Shift-ST> Select aria (pages)
+[Home,End] line start end (ZT)
+ <Shift-ZT> Select aria (until linestart/-end)
+ <Control-ZT> Shift curser to documentbegin/-end
+ <Shift-Control-ZT> Select aria (until documentbegin/-end)
+sonstige
+ <Shift-slash> Select whole document
+ <Insert> Insert selection
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+emacs-like
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ <Control-a> = Home
+ <Control-b> = Left
+ <Control-d> = Delete
+ <Control-e> = End
+ <Control-f> = Right
+ (<Control-k> other binding)
+ <Control-n> = Up
+ <Control-o> = Return+Left
+ <Control-p> = Down
+ <Control-t>
+ <Control-v> = Page up
+ <Meta-b>
+ <Meta-d>
+ <Meta-f>
+ <Meta-less> Shift Curser to text begin
+ <Meta-greater> Shift Curser to text begin
+ <Meta-Backspace>
+ <Meta-Delete>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/epsf.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/epsf.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c83e63d32c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/epsf.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +############################################################
+package epsf
+############################################################
+\usepackage{epsf} ::epsf::
+\epsfxsize ::epsfxsize::
+\epsfbox{} ::epsfbox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I don't now how these commands work, you could include
+eps-pictures into your document.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+I personaly use the latex2e package graphicx for that
+and it works quite fine.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/gpl_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/gpl_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e04861aa1d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/gpl_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +GNU General Public License - GNU Project - Free Software Foundation (FSF)
+::gpl_hlp::
+Table of Contents
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+
+Preamble
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE | Version 2, June 1991
+
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+0.
+ This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+
+1.
+ You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+
+2.
+ You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+
+2.a)
+ You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+2.b)
+ You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+2.c)
+ If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+
+3.
+ You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+
+3.a)
+ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.b)
+ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.c)
+ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+4.
+ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+5.
+ You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+
+6.
+ Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+
+7.
+ If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+8.
+ If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+
+9.
+ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+
+10.
+ If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+NO WARRANTY
+
+
+11.
+ BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+12.
+ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+- one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does. -
+Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+
+
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
+`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
+suits your program.
+
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+
+A copy of
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+
+GNU's home page
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html
+
+FSF & GNU inquiries & questions to
+gnu@gnu.org"
+Other ways to contact
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html#ContactInfo
+
+Copyright notice above.
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA
+
+Updated:
+16 Feb 1998 tower
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/readme_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/readme_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3b17a5b62b --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/readme_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + Tcltexed a LaTeX-Editor
+
+ !!! Take care, this program is under construction !!!!
+ In the meantime I have worked a lot with this program
+ but should you still find some errors, please contact me.
+ The easiest way is by email : mys@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+
+ Short introduction :
+ A description of the program as a whole can be found under
+ "Help" - "Tcltexed".
+ It is always useful to try to press <F1>.
+ For all LaTeX-commands (I know) there exists a short description,
+ but I have only translated half of them so far.
+ The keymap is motif-like, emacs-like and joe-like (as in Borland Pascal).
+ Additionally some key-shortcuts of my own exist.
+ If you open an editor window, you will find a tiny picure in the upper
+ left hand corner. If it is coloured (click on it with mouse) this
+ window is marked as the main document.
+ If you click on a picture in the mathematics collection the
+ corresponding LaTeX-command will be inserted in the currently active
+ editor window. (The window where the picture (top left) shows some
+ circular waves)
+ If you insert a LaTeX-command tcltexed tries to complete this command.
+ (i.e. \G could only be \Gamma)
+ If you don't find that useful you can stop this behaviour using the menu
+ options.
+ The row of buttons at the top can be used to start the corresponding
+ programs using the document as source file.
+
+ This program will run on Unix, Linux, Windows 9x, Windows NT etc.
+ I just don't know anyone who will try it on a Macintosh as well ...
+ If you want to try, please contact me.
+
+ All you need to run this program is the script language Tcl/Tk, which
+ you can download for free.
+ You want to use my program? It is already available for "free":
+
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+
+ Questions? Found some errors? Some ideas for future developments?
+ feel free to send an email :
+
+ Martin Strauss
+ mys@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/sonder.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/sonder.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..33685acbf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/sonder.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +############################################################
+Hae ?
+############################################################
+\today ::today::
+
+insert date of compilation into the document
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX ::LaTeX::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX2e ::LaTeX2e::
+
+insert logo of LaTeX2e
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/tcltexed_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/tcltexed_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1105fc195e --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/eng/tcltexed_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed stands for tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Tcltexed is seprated into two parts. On one side the windows
+were you could edit a text, as described in "Editor", on
+the other side a lot of functions connected only to the base
+of the program, the main window.
+All actions which should work with a editorwindow will use
+the window which has had at last the focus. A clearer
+definiton of this made in "Editor".
+
+Below I will discribe and list all the functions you could
+start from the main window.
+
+menu items of the main window
+1. File
+ a) New
+Start a new LaTeX-document. There exists a predefined plain
+document within the source of Tcltexed. If the file etc/default.tex
+exists in the path were Tcltexed was installed this file will
+be used as default document.
+ b) Load
+Load a file into the editor ...
+ c) Append
+Append the text of the file at the position of the curser.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Save a text.
+ f) Quit
+Quit Tcltexed. All windows will get closed (if necessary a request
+for saveing the files in work is made)
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Clear the whole text.
+ b) line breaking
+Choose to break lines in the whole text, the current section or the
+current line. Each line which follows a line which ends with "space"
+will be interpreted as a continuition. Befor a line gets broken all
+continuation lines will be appended to it.
+With the last three menu items it is possible to append all continuition
+lines without breaking the whole line after it.
+If there are some spaces at the beginning of the first line, then
+all continuations will have these spaces as first letters.
+ c) Spelling
+Marks all not right spelled words in your current text with a red color.
+ d) add word
+For to register a word as spelled right, you must set
+the curser in the current text within it. To make sense the word
+must be marked to be misspelled ;-), or not ?
+ e) \"a..\ss -> ä..ß
+Translates latex commands for displaying special characters into
+their corresponding characters.
+ f) ä..ß -> \"a..\ss
+Translate none ascii characters into their corresponding latex commands.
+ g) "a.."s -> ä..ß
+Translates latex commands out of package [german]{babel} for displaying
+special characters into their corresponding characters.
+ h) ä..ß -> "a.."s
+Translate none ascii characters into their corresponding latex commands
+out of package [german]{babel}. This format is iutable for
+"ispell -t -d deutsch file.tex"
+ i) Search
+Search and Replace within a text.
+ j) My Own
+Here you can define your own LaTeX-sequences to be inserted into the
+text, if you press the button befor the entry. This definitions
+will besaved if you "Save Options". With the next start of Tcltexed
+this definitions will be the start values.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoBrackets
+If this button is aktivated, each inserted bracket to open ({[$
+will be followed by a bracket to close )}]$.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packages/etc
+Here you could activate several packages for automatical completion
+of it's LaTeX-commands.
+An example for complition :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+The more LaTeX-commands Tcltexed should recognise the later they
+get complited, because they look to similar for Tcltexed.
+ c) language
+Set here your favorite language for texts, buttons and help.
+A change here will only apear with the next start of Tcltexed,
+so you have to save the current options as discribed below.
+ d) font size
+Set font size for the editorwindows.
+ e) Save Options
+Save all configurations made by a user. This configuration
+will be loaded at the beginning of the next start of Tcltexed.
+(The file with the configurations is with unix .tcltexed,
+ with Windows tcltexed.ini . But please don't edit it yourself.
+Configurationfiles of older Tcltexedversion will be ignored
+and later overwriten.)
+
+4. Mathematics
+A gallery of pictures of the ouput of commands of the mathmatical
+enviroments. A press on a pictur will insert the command,
+represented by the picture, on the position of the curser.
+
+5. general
+Like 4. , but other common commands.
+
+6. Help
+ a) Tcltexed
+Under this you will find the description of Tcltexed itself.
+ b) LaTeX
+A index of all LaTeX-commands I have heard of.
+For a lot of LaTeX-commands I have writen a short help.
+ + <Return> + left mousebutton displays the help text
+ right mousebutton insert command
+ a keystroke A-Z a-z forces the list to jumb to commands
+ with this as first letter
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/Seitenformat.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/Seitenformat.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ec4d5a0fb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/Seitenformat.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Variablen zur Kontrolle des Seitenformates
+############################################################
+
+\voffset ::voffset::
+ vertikaler Offset der Seite
+\hoffset ::hoffset::
+ horizontaler Offset der Seite
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\oddsidemargin ::oddsidemargin::
+ Breite des linken Randes bzw ungerade Seiten
+\evensidemargin ::evensidemargin::
+ Breite des rechten Randes bzw gerade Seiten
+\topmargin ::topmargin::
+ oberer Rand bis Oberkante Kopfzeile
+\headheight ::headheight::
+ Höhe der Kopfzeile
+\headsep ::headsep::
+ Abstand zwischen Unterkante Kopf und Oberkante Rumpf
+\topskip ::topskip::
+ Abstand Oberkante Rumpf und Unterkante der ersten Textzeile
+\textheight ::textheight::
+ Gesamthöhe für den Rumpf
+\textwidth ::textwidth::
+ Gesamtbreite für Kopf, Rumpf und Fuß
+\footheight ::footheight::
+ Höhe des Rumpfes
+\footskip ::footskip::
+ Abstand Unterkante Rumpf Unterkante Fuß
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\marginparpush ::marginparpush::
+ Abstand zweier Randnotizen
+\marginparwidth ::marginparwidth::
+ Breite einer Randnotiz
+\marginparsep ::marginparsep::
+ horizontaler Abstand zum Rand des Rumpfes
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Zusätzlich bei doppelspaltigen Seiten
+\columnsep ::columnsep::
+ Breite des Spaltenseperators
+\columnseprule ::columnseprule::
+ Trennstrichdicke
+
+############################################################
+Variablen ändern mit
+setlength{Variable}{Wert} ::setlength::
+
+ ##############
+ # Kopf #
+ ##############
+
+ ##############
+ # #
+ # #
+ # Rumpf #
+ # #
+ # #
+ ##############
+
+ ##############
+ # Fuß #
+ ##############
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amscd.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amscd.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..42ee1b7304 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amscd.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amscd verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amscd} ::amscd::
+
+#################################################################
+Fussdiagramme ::CD::
+#################################################################
+Unterumgebung :
+CD
+Beispiel :
+\begin{CD}
+ A @@>>> B @@>>> C
+ D @@AAA E @@VVV F
+ G @@= H @@<<< I
+\end{CD}
+
+Umgebung für Flussdiagramme
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@>Textoben>Textunten>
+
+Pfeil nach rechts mit Schrift darüber und darunter
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@<Textoben<Textunten<
+
+Pfeil nach links mit Schrift darüber und darunter
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@ATextlinksATextrechtsA
+
+Pfeil nach oben mit Schrift links und rechts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@VTextlinksVTextrechtsV
+
+Pfeil nach unten mit Schrift links und rechts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@@=
+
+Gleichheitszeichen
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..142f44963c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsfonts.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amsfonts verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amsfonts} ::amsfonts::
+
+#################################################################
+Fonts
+#################################################################
+Syntax :
+\mathbb{Text} ::mathbb::
+
+Liefert Text in Form von Mengenzeichen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\mathfrak{Text} ::mathfrak::
+
+Liefert Text als Frakturschrift
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\boldsymbol{Symbol} ::boldsymbol::
+
+Liefert fette Symbole
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsmath.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsmath.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5d432e57b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsmath.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amsmath verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amsmath} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+mathematische Unterumgebungen
+#################################################################
+Unterumgebungen muessen in einer mathematischen Umgebung
+aufgerufen werden.
+z.B.
+\[\begin{split} ... \end{split}\]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unterumgebung : split ::split::
+\[\begin{split}
+ a&=b\\
+ c&=d
+\end{split}\]
+
+Erlaubt mehrere aneinander ausgerichtete Formeln mit wenn nur
+einer Nummer.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : multline ::multline::
+\begin{multine}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{multine}
+
+Fuer mehrzeilige Formeln mit einer Nummer.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : gather ::gather::
+\begin{gather}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{gather}
+
+
+Mehrere Formeln unausgerichtet.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : align ::align::
+\begin{align}
+ a&=b & c&=d \\
+ e&=f & g&=h \\
+ \intertext{und}
+ i&=j & k&=l
+\end{align}
+
+Erlaubt ein Array von Formeln
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+Syntax : ::intertext::
+\intertext{Text}
+
+Erlaubt einen eingeschobenen Text
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : subequation ::subequation::
+
+Zur Hauptnummerierung kommt eine für label unsichtbare
+Unternummerierung mit kleinen Buchstaben.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unterumgebung : ?matrix ::matrix::pmatrix::bmatrix::vmatrix::Vmatrix::
+\[\begin{matrix}
+ 1 & 2 & 3 & a \\
+ 4 & 5 & 6 & b \\
+ 7 & 8 & 9 & c
+\end{matrix}\]
+
+Erzeugt eine n auf m Matrix
+matrix : ohne Klammerung
+pmatrik : mit runder Klammerung
+bmatrix : mit eckiger Klammerung
+vmatrix : mit einfachen Betragsstrichen
+Vmatrix : mit doppelten Betragsstrichen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unterumgebung : cases ::cases::
+\[sgn(x)=\begin{cases}
+ -1 & \forall\ x<0 \\
+ 0 & x=0 \\
+ 1 & \forall\ x>0
+\end{cases}\]
+
+Für Fallunterscheidungen
+#################################################################
+Sonstige Hilfen
+#################################################################
+Klammerngroesse :
+\bigl \bigr etwas groesser ::bigl::bigr::
+\Bigl \Bigr Faktor 1.5 ::Bigl::Bigr::
+\biggl \biggr Faktor 2 ::biggl::biggr::
+\Biggl \Biggr Faktor 2.5 ::Biggl::Biggr::
+links rechts der Formel
+
+Nachfolgend kommt die Klammernart "(" "|" "[" ... "]" ")"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::substack::
+\substack{ \\ ...\\ \text{Hi} ... \\ }
+Beispiel :
+\sum_\substack{i=0\\j=1}^\substack{10\\100}
+
+Schiebt mehrere Zeilen an Indizes oder Exponenten ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::text::
+\text{Text}
+
+schiebt Text ein
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::sideset::
+\sideset{}{}
+Beispiel :
+\sideset{^1_2}{^3_4}\sum
+
+Setzt seitlich Indizes,
+zum Beispiel links oben eine 1, links unten eine 2,
+ rechts oben eine 3 und rechts unten eine 4.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::xleftarrow::xrightarrow::
+xleftarrow{Oben}
+xleftarrow[Unten]{Oben}
+xrightarrow{Oben}
+xrightarrow[Unten]{Oben}
+
+
+Ein sich in Abhängigkeit zum Text streckender Pfeil mit Text "Oben"
+und "Unten".
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::boxed::
+\boxed{Formel}
+
+Rahmt Formel in eine Box ein
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareMathOperator{latex-Befehl}{Ausgabe} ::DeclareMathOperator::
+\DeclareMathOperator*{latex-Befehl}{Ausgabe}
+
+
+
+Ermöglicht das Erstellen weiterer Funktionen zu \sin \cos etc.
+* Bewirkt ein Verhalten wie z.B. \lim im flüssigen Text.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amssymb.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amssymb.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..073da1cb80 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amssymb.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#########################################################
+\usepackage{amssymb} ::amssymb::
+#########################################################
+Einer der unzähligen LaTeX-Befehle des Packetes amssymb.
+#########################################################
+Eines der unzähligen Symbole bei denen ich mich weigerte
+ein extra Bild zu erstellen. (mys)
+##########################################################@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsthm.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsthm.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2ec28e5f38 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/amsthm.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amscd verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amsthm} ::amsthm::
+
+#################################################################
+Erstellen von Theoremen ::newtheorem::
+#################################################################
+
+\newtheorem{latex-synonym}{Name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{Name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}[latex-synonym2]{Name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{Name}[section]
+
+Erstellt eine Umgebungsvariable latex-synonym die ein durchnummerieres
+Theorem mit der Bezeichnung Name (z.B. Axiom) einfügt.
+\begin{latex-synonym}
+ Bla
+\end{latex-synonym}
+bewirkt dann das einfügen eines solchem Theorems.
+
+* unterdrückt die Nummerierung.
+latex-synonym2 : es wird der gleiche Zähler wie zu diesem Theorem verwandt.
+section : bei erhoehung dieses Zählers wir der Theoremzähler auf Null gesetzt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\theoremstyle{Style} ::theoremstyle::
+
+Style :
+ plain (default)
+ definition
+ remark
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\swapnumbers ::swapnumbers::
+
+Nummerierung auf der linken Seite der Theoreme @
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/begin.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/begin.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4248c0110c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/begin.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Umgebungen ::begin::end::
+############################################################
+Syntax
+\begin{Umgebung}
+ Text. etc.
+\end{Umgebung}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebungen :
+ document Dokument
+ titlepage Titelseite
+ verbatim 1:1 Text einfügen
+ appendix Anhang
+ abstract für Zusammenfassung
+ thebiliography Literaturverzeichnis
+ theindex Stichwortverzeichnis
+
+(Mathematik)
+ math im Text
+ displaymath gesondert
+ equation gesondert mit Nummer
+ eqnarray Formelgruppen
+ array Tabellen im mathe. Modus
+
+(Aufzaehlungen)
+ enumerate mit Zaehler
+ itemize mit Symbol
+ deskription mit Kürzel
+
+(Gliederung)
+ tabular Tabellen
+ tabbing mit Tabulator
+ minipage als kleine "Seite"
+ samepage kein Seitenumbruch außerhalb von Absätzen
+ sloppypar schlampiger Zeilenumbruch
+ fussypar gründlicher "
+ center zentriert
+ quote rückt links und rechts ein
+ quotation neuer Absatz + "
+ flushright rechtszentriert
+ flushleft linkszentriert
+(Gleitende Objekte)
+ table für Tabellen
+ figure für Bilder
+
+(Bilder)
+ picture mit latex gezeichnete Bilder
+
+(Packet amsmath)
+ split
+ multline
+ gather
+ aline
+ subequation
+ matrix
+ pmatrix
+ bmatrix
+ vmatrix
+ Vmatrix
+ cases
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/bezug.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/bezug.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f859046117 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/bezug.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Literaturverzeichnis ::thebibliography::bibitem::cite::
+############################################################
+\begin{thebibliography}{Muster_Marke}
+ \bibitem[Marke]{Bezug}Eintrag
+ ...
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+(Marke ist optional, andernfalls wird durchgezählt)
+Im Text : \cite{Bezug}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+::nocite::bibliography::
+Mit BibTeX können auch Literaturverzeichnisse erstellt werden.
+\nocite{Bezug1, ...} ist eine Liste der in dieser Weise
+genutzten Bezuege.
+\bibliography{datenbank, ..} gibt die zu nützenden
+Datenbanken an.
+############################################################
+Sonstige Bezuege
+############################################################
+\label{Marke} ::label::
+
+Erstellt Marke.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\ref{Marke} ::ref::
+
+Fügt Position der Marke ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\pageref{Marke} ::pageref::
+
+Fügt Seite der Marke ein.
+ @
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d5f577c3de --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/copyright_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Tcltexed | Version 2.3 | 1. Feb. 1999 | Martin Strauss
+::copyright_hlp::
+A plaintexteditor for LaTeX based on scriptlanguage tcl/tk (8.x)
+
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauss
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/counter.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/counter.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..88369a25c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/counter.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Counter
+############################################################
+Counter besitzen immer ganzzahlige Werte
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\newcounter{Name} ::newcounter::
+\newcounter{Name}[Rücksetzer]
+
+Erstellt Counter "Name".
+Wird Counter Rücksetzer um eins erhöht, fällt
+Counter Name auf Null zurueck.
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\setcounter{Name}{Wert} ::setcounter::
+
+Setzt einen Counter auf einen angegebenen Wert.
+
+default Zähler
+ page laufende Seitennummerierung
+ tocdepth Inhaltsverzeichnisanzeigetiefe (1 chapter 2 section ...)
+ chapter laufende Kapitelnummer, geht analog für (section ..)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stepcounter{Name} ::stepcounter::
+
+Erhöht den Wert von Name um eins
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\value{Name} ::value::
+
+Gibt den Wert von
+############################################################
+Length
+############################################################
+Längen besitzen immer eine Einheit (mm,pt,cm, ...)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\newlength{\Name} ::newlength::
+
+Erstellt Laengenvariable \Name.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\setlength{\Name}{Mass} ::setlength::
+
+Setzt \Name auf Mass.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\addtolength{\Name}{Mass} ::addtolength::
+
+Addiert Mass zu \Name
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\settowidth{\Name}{Text} ::settowidth::
+
+Setzt Name auf die Länge von Text.
+############################################################
+Command
+############################################################
+\newcommand{\Befehl}[n]{Definition} ::newcommand::
+
+Erstellt einen Befehl als Synonym für den Text "Definition",
+mit Benützung von n Übergabewerten.
+z.B.
+\newcommand{\hallo}[1]{Hallo #1}
+im Textfile
+\hallo{mys}
+Ausgabe in Dvifile
+Hallo mys
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\renewcommand{\Befehl}[n]{Definition} ::renewcommand:
+
+Wie oben falls schon ein Befehl unter diesem Namen existiert,
+und dieser umdefiniert werden soll.
+############################################################
+Enviroment ::newenviroment::renewenviroment::
+############################################################
+\newenviroment{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+\newenviroment*{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+
+z.B.
+\newenviroment{tcltk}[1]{\bfseries %i}{\normalfont}
+\begin{tcltk}{Hallo}
+ ...
+\end{tcltk}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\renewenviroment{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+\renewenviroment*{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/documentclass.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/documentclass.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f378bce85f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/documentclass.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Grundform eines Dokumentes unter LaTeX
+############################################################
+\documentclass{Klasse} ::documentclass::
+\documentclass[Optionen]{Klasse}
+
+Bearbeitungsstil des Dokuments
+dieser LaTeX-Befehl ist unverzichtbar.
+auf ihn folgen weitere Deklarationen und mit
+\begin{document} ::document::
+ Text
+\end{document}
+der eigentliche Text.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Klasse
+ book
+ report
+ article
+ letter
+Optionen
+ 10pt (default) setzt Schriftgröße
+ 11pt "
+ 12pt "
+ twoside beidseitiger Druck
+ twocolumn zweispaltig
+ titlepage extra Seite fuer Tittel und Abstrakt
+ leqno linksbuendige Formelnummerierung
+ fleqn linkszentrierte abgesetzte Formeln
+ proc bei Sitzungsprotokollen
+ ifthen latex mit logischen Abfragen
+ a4paper A4 Blattformat
+############################################################
+latex 2.09 :
+\documentstyle[]{} ::documentstyle::
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f398043003 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/editor_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,236 @@ +head 1.2; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.2; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.2 +date 2000.08.15.22.33.50; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next 1.1; + +1.1 +date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc
+@@
+ +1.2 +log +@*** empty log message *** +@ +text +@############################################################
+#::editor_hlp::
+# Das Editorfenster
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Was ist ein Editorfenster ?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unter einem Editorfenster verstehe ich Fenster in denen
+unter Tcltexed Texte bearbeitet werden. Jedes Editorfenster
+wird genau einem Text zugeordnet. Sind mehrere Editorfenster
+geöffnet sind zwei Attribute zu vergeben :
+ den Fokus
+ und das für das Hauptdokument
+-----
+Den Fokus besitzt das Editorfenster, das zuletzt im Vordergrund
+gewesen ist. Aktionen außerhalb der Editorfensters, wie zum
+Beispiel das Durchsuchen des Textes, erfolgt stets nur im
+Editorfenster das derzeit den Fokus besitzt. Den Fokus
+kann ein Fenster durch anklicken etc. erhalten.
+-----
+Ist ein Editorfenster als Hauptdokument deklariert, übernimmt
+es für alle anderen Fenster den Aufruf der externen Programme
+latex, xdvi, dvips und ghostview. Im Hauptdokument sollte daher
+immer ein ausführbarer LaTeX-Text sein, während andere
+Editorfenster vermeindlich nur einzubindende Texte enthalten
+können. Ist kein Editorfenster als Hauptdokument deklariert,
+verhaelt sich jedes Editorfenster dahingehend eigenständig.
+-----
+Das Fenster hat folgende Bestandtteile :
+ eine Menuleiste / Popupleiste
+ eine Buttonleiste (Button ~> Druckknopf)
+ und das Eingabefeld.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Funktionen der Buttonleiste
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Von links nach rechts folgen :
+ein "Bild", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, Syntax, Quit und
+zuletzt eine "Anzeige" Z.S. ?.?.
+-----
+ "Bild"
+Das Bild zeigt an welches Fenster gerade den Fokus hat, und welches,
+wenn überhaupt eines, als Hauptdokument deklariert wurde.
+Das Fenster mit dem Bild das Wellen darstellt ist das Fenster welches
+gerade den Fokus besitzt.
+Das Fenster mit dem farbigen Bild ist das Hauptdokument.
+Ein Editorfenster übernimmt die Funktion des Hauptdokumentes
+durch anklicken des Bildes. Abgestellt wird die Funktion durch
+einen Druck auf das dann farbige Bild.
+-----
+ Save
+Speichert den Text unter der zugeordneten Datei. Ist noch keine
+Datei zugordnet, so wird Save As ausgeführt.
+-----
+ Save As
+Ermöglicht das durchsuchen der Festplatte nach dem zuzuordnenden
+Dateinamen und speichert den Text unter diesem.
+-----
+ latex
+Führt zunächst Save für den aktuellen Text, und nur diesen, aus.
+Dann wird das Programm latex für die zugeordnete Datei ausgeführt.
+Ist einem Fenster das Hauptdokumentattribut vergeben worden, so
+wird dessen Datei stattdessen übergeben.
+latex erstellt eine Datei mit Endung dvi, die Fehlerausgabe
+wird in dem Hilfsfenster ausgegeben. (unix : Bricht latex nicht
+automatisch ab so muß dies von Hand mit der Tastenfolge "q"
+"Return" getan werden.)
+Um das Erstellen von Stichwortverzeichnissen mit den LaTeX-Befehlen
+\makeindex \index etc via dem Programm makeindex zu erleichtern,
+wird dieses Programm automatisch aufgerufen, falls eine entsprechend
+zu bearbeitende Datei (Name.idx) vorhanden ist.
+-----
+ xdvi
+Ruft die von latex zuletzt erstellte Datei mit einem Viewer
+für das dvi Format zur Ansicht auf. ( Du hier angucken können)
+Die Viewer aktualisieren ihre Ansicht, wenn die Datei neu erstellt
+wird.
+-----
+ dvips
+Wandelt die zugehörige dvi-Datei in das Druckerformat gs (ghostscript)
+um und speichert es in einer Datei mit entsprechend zu gs geänderten
+Dateiendung.
+-----
+ ghostview
+Dieses Programm ermöglicht dann die Ansicht des Ergebnisses mit dvips.
+-----
+ ispell
+Führt zunächst Save für den aktuellen Text, und nur diesen, aus.
+Dann wird das Programm ispell, ein Rechtschreibprüfprogramm, für
+die zugeordnete Datei ausgeführt und dessen Ausgabe ins aktuelle
+Fenster übernommen.
+-----
+ Syntax
+Syntax Highlightning, alle mit \ als LaTeX-Befehle erkenntlichen
+Textbereiche bekommen eine Textfarbe in Rot oder Grün, auskommentierte
+Textbereiche bekommen eine Textfarbe in Blau.
+Rot steht für nicht wiedererkannten LaTeX-Befehl,
+Grün für erkannten LaTeX-Befehl,
+Blau für auskommentierten Text.
+Auf Funktionstüchtigkeit wird dabei allerdings nicht geachtet. Zu
+den grün marktierten Befehlen gibt es zumeist Hilfen.
+(Siehe dazu auch Latex-Hilfen)
+-----
+ Quit
+Schließt das Editorfenster mit Rückfrage falls der Text verändert
+jedoch nicht gespeichert wurde.
+-----
+ "Anzeige"
+Wiedergabe der aktüllen Zeile und Spalte in der sich der Curser
+derzeit befindet. Die Anzahl der Zeilen ergibt sich aus der Anzahl
+der "Return"s im Text, nicht aus der der Umbrüche durch zu lange
+Zeilen. Der Button öffnet bei Betätigung ein Fenster mit dem per
+Eingabe die Curserposition verändern kann.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Funktionen der Menuleiste / Popupleiste
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Die Menuleiste existiert nur ab tcl/tk 8.x ist jedoch
+in Funktion der Popupleiste äquivalent.
+Mit Druck auf die rechte Maustaste erscheint die Popupleiste.
+Von oben nach unten (links nach rechts) :
+Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, Block, + % und - %.
+-----
+ Undo
+Revidiert (hoffentlich) die letzte(n) am Text vorgenommene(n)
+Aktion(en). Allerdings werden aus Speicherplatzgründen ältere
+Aktionen vergessen.
+-----
+ Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear
+Bearbeitet den mit Maus selektierten Bereich, ratet mal was da
+passiert ... . Die Aktionen sind Windows und X-Window kompatibel.
+(theoretisch)
+-----
+ Test
+Durchsucht den ganzen Text nach Rechtschreibfehlern und ändert
+deren Farbe in einen Rotton um.
+-----
+ Nearly
+Erstellt eine Liste aller Wörter, die dem Word in dem sich der
+Curser befindet ähnlich sind. Und zeigt sie in einem Fenster.
+-----
+ Block
+Wandelt den selektierten Bereich in einen Blockbereich
+ala Borland um.
+-----
+ + %
+Fügt im selektierten Bereich vor jede Zeile ein % ein, und
+zwar nur wenn dort noch keines existiert.
+-> easy latex auskommentieren
+-----
+ - %
+Eliminiert im selektierten Bereich vor jeder Zeile ein %.
+Es muß dazu wirklich das erste Zeichen der Zeile sein.
+-----
+ ...
+Listet in einem Popup alle möglichen Ergänzung zu einem
+angefangene LaTeX-Befehl. Als zu erkennender Bereich gilt
+der vom letzten \ bis zur Curserposition. Um unnötig lange
+Popups zu vermeiden muß der Bereich länger als ein Buchstabe
+sein. Gelistet werden nur Befehle die unter Optionen aktiviert
+wurden(, wie bei der normalen automatischen Ergänzung auch).
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Funktionen des Eingabefeldes
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+siehe dazu auch die Tastaturbelegung des Editorfensters.
+-----
+ Rechtschreibung
+Um ein Wort als bekannt neu zu registrieren, setzt man den
+Curser auf das schon als unbekannt markierte Wort und macht
+einen Doppelklick mit der linken Maustaste.
+-----
+Ergänzung bekannter LateX-Befehle und eigener Tcltexed-Synonyme.
+\fra ---> \frac{}{}
+\enumerate --->
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item
+ \end{enumerate}
+Ergänzung der Aufklammern.
+{ ---> {}
+$ ---> $$
+-----
+Textverdopplung bei Umgebungseingaben für \begin und \end
+nach Eingabe von :
+\beg --->
+ \begin{}
+ \end{}
+\bege --->
+ \begin{e}
+ \end{e}
+\begenum --->
+ \begin{enum}
+ \end{enum}
+-----
+Wird bei Vorhandensein eines selektierten Bereiches eine
+ein LaTeX-Befehl mit \ begonnen, so wird dieser Bereich nicht
+gelöscht sondern umklammert.
+@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision
+@ +text +@d88 6 +d196 1 +a196 1 +gelöscht sondern umklammert.@ + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7e59a994b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/editort_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+#::editot_hlp::
+# Tastaturbelegung des Editorfensters
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Fuer Liebhaber von Borland etc Tastenkombinationen :
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block
+ <Control-k><b> Block Begin
+ <Control-k><k> Block End
+ <Control-k><c> Block Copy
+ <Control-k><m> Block Move
+ <Control-k><v> Block Move
+ <Control-k><y> Block Löschen
+ <Control-k><%> Block Auskommentieren
+ <Control-k><space> Block Auskommentierung aufheben
+Sonstige
+ <F1> Hilfe
+ <F2> Speichern
+ <F3> Datei öffnen
+ <F4> Setzt Textcurser in Sichtbereich
+ <F9> Führe latex aus
+ <Control-k><x> Speichern
+ <Control-k><h> Hilfe
+ <Control-y> Zeile Loeschen
+ <Alt-BackSpace> Undo
+ <Shift-Delete> Cut
+ <Control-Insert> Copy
+ <Shift-Insert> Paste
+ <Control-Delete> Clear
+ <Control-l> Erneute Suche
+ <Alt-x> Beendet dieses Programm vollständig
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Einige von mir :
+ <Control-w> Listet möglicher Ergänzungen eines
+ LaTeX-Befehles.
+ <Control-d> Wenn der Curser sich in einem bekannten
+ LaTeX-Befehl befindet wird der nächste folgende
+ selbe LaTeX-Befehl im Text aufgesucht. Befindet sich
+ der Curser nicht in einem bekannten LaTeX-Befehl
+ wird der nächste Eintrag \section aufgesucht.
+ <Control-u> Wie <Control-d> nur wird im Text vor dem
+ Curser gesucht.
+ Liegt der Curser innerhalb eines als falsch geschrieben
+ markierten Wortes, so bewirkt ein doppelter Tastendruck
+ der linken Maustaste die Registrierung dieses Wortes
+ als bekannt.
+ <Control-b> Zeilenumbruch für einen Absatz
+ <Alt-b> Zeilenumbruch für eine Zeile
+ <Control-B> Umkehr von <Control-b>
+ <Alt-B> Umkehr von <Alt-b>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Da Block, Selektion und Clipboard an sich
+unabhängig voneinander sind :
+ <Control-k><p> Einfügen aus Clipboard
+ <Control-k><g> Kopieren in Clipboard
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Windows - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Maus mit rechter Taste öffnet ein Menu mit den Punkten
+ Cut Textbereich ausschneiden in Clipboard
+ Copy Textbereich kopieren in Clipboard
+ Paste Einfügen aus Clipboard
+ Clear Textbereich löschen
+ Block Textbereich zu Block umformatieren
+ + % Textbereich auskommentieren
+ - % Auskommentierung aufheben
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Motif - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Maus mit linker Taste (1)
+ einfach Selektion aufheben
+ zweifach Das angeklickte Wort selektieren
+ dreifach Die angeklickte Zeile selektieren
+ Shift-einfach Bereich der Selektion verändern
+ Shift-zweifach Selektion auf ganze Worte ergänzen
+ Shift-dreifach Selektion auf ganze Zeilen ergänzen
+ Control Curser umsetzen ohne Verlust der Selektion
+Cursertasten (CT)
+ <Shift-CT> Bereich selektieren (Buchstaben/Zeilen)
+ <Control-CT> Curser um ganze Worte/Absätze verschieben
+ <Shift-Control-CT> Bereich selektieren (Worte/Absätze)
+[Up,Down] Seite rauf runter (ST)
+ <Shift-ST> Bereich selektieren (Seiten)
+ (<Control-ST> Seitenscrolling horizontal)
+[Home,End] Zeile Anfang Ende (ZT)
+ <Shift-ZT> Bereich selektieren (bis Zeileanfang/-ende)
+ <Control-ZT> Curser an Textanfang/-Ende verschieben
+ <Shift-Control-ZT> Bereich selektieren (bis Textanfang/-ende)
+sonstige
+ <Shift-slash> Gesamten Text selektieren
+ <Insert> Selektion einfügen
+
+Die rechte Maustaste ist anders als üblich belegt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+emacs-like
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ <Control-a> = Home
+ <Control-b> = Left
+ (<Control-d> wurde umbesetzt)
+ <Control-e> = End
+ <Control-f> = Right
+ (<Control-k> wurde umbesetzt)
+ <Control-n> = Up
+ <Control-o> = Return+Left
+ <Control-p> = Down
+ <Control-t>
+ <Control-v> = Page up
+ <Meta-b>
+ <Meta-d>
+ <Meta-f>
+ <Meta-less> Curser an Text Anfang
+ <Meta-greater> Curser an Text Anfang
+ <Meta-Backspace>
+ <Meta-Delete>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/epsf.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/epsf.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7fb066350e --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/epsf.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Packet epsf
+############################################################
+\usepackage{epsf} ::epsf::
+\epsfxsize ::epsfxsize::
+\epsfbox{} ::epsfbox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Die genaue Bedeutung der Befehle ist mir unbekannt, es
+handelt sich hier um eine Umgebung mittels der man Bilder
+im Format eps einbinden kann.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Ich empfehle aber dafür auf das latex2e Packet graphicx
+zurückzugreifen. Ich habe gute Erfahrungen mit ihm gemacht.@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/format.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/format.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..76c4d30696 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/format.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Schriftgrössen
+############################################################
+In Abfolge :
+\tiny ::tiny::
+\scriptsize ::scriptsize::
+\footnotesize ::footnotesize::
+\small ::small::
+\normalsize ::normalsize::
+\large ::large::
+\Large ::Large::
+\LARGE ::LARGE::
+\huge ::huge::
+\Huge ::Huge::
+
+############################################################
+Schriftarten
+############################################################
+latex2e :
+\bfseries Boldface Series ::bfseries::
+\mdseries Standart Series ::mdseries::
+\itshape Italic Shape ::itshape::
+\upshape Standart Shape ::upshape::
+\scshape SMALL CAPS Shape ::scshape::
+\slshape Slanted Shape ::slshape::
+\rmfamily Roman Family ::rmfamily::
+\sffamily Sans Serif Family ::sffamily::
+\ttfamily Typewriter Family ::ttfamily::
+latex 2.0.9 :
+\bf Boldface ::bf::
+\it Italic ::it::
+\rm Roman ::rm::
+\em Emphasize ::em::
+\sc SMALL CAPS ::sc::
+\sl Slanted ::sl::
+\sf Sans Serif ::sf::
+\tt Typewriter ::tt::
+############################################################
+Schriftorientierung
+############################################################
+Umgebung center ::center::
+\begin{center}
+ Text
+\end{center}
+
+Zentriert den eingeschlossen Text
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\centering ::centering::
+
+Zentriert den folgenden Text
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung quote ::quote::
+\begin{quote}
+ Text
+\end{quote}
+
+Text wird links und rechts eingerückt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung quotation ::quotation::
+\begin{quotation}
+ Text
+\end{quotation}
+
+Text wird links und rechts eingerückt, ein neuer
+Absatz begonnen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung flushleft ::flushleft::
+\begin{flushleft}
+ Text
+\end{flushleft}
+
+Text, links zentriert
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung flushright ::flushright::
+\begin{flushright}
+ Text
+\end{flushright}
+
+Text, rechts zentriert
+############################################################
+Schriftsilben
+############################################################
+\dicretionary{vor}{nach}{ohne} ::dicretionary::
+
+Steuert Zeilenumbruch in Wörtern, wenn sich die Buchstaben
+ändern.
+"ohne" gibt den Bereich ohne Umbruch wieder,
+"vor" den Anfang bei Umbruch,
+"nach" das Ende bei Umbruch an dieser Stelle.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\hypentation{Bei-spiel Hal-lo} ::hypentation::
+
+Eine Liste von Trennungshilfen, die für den restlichen Text
+beachtet werden.
+############################################################
+Seite
+############################################################
+\clearpage ::clearpage::
+
+Beendet laufende Seite, gleitende Objekte folgen auf eigenen
+Seiten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\cleardoublepage ::cleardoublepage::
+
+" , fuer Doppelseiten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\newpage ::newpage::
+
+Erzwingt eine neue Seite.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung samepage ::samepage::
+
+Verbietet den Seitenumbruch außerhalb der Absätze.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\pagebreak[n] ::pagebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier eine neue Seite zu beginnen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\nopagebreak[n] ::nopagebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier keine neue Seite zu beginnen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+############################################################
+Zeile
+############################################################
+\linebreak[n] ::linebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier umzubrechen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\nolinebreak[n] ::nolinebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier nicht umzubrechen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sloppy ::sloppy::
+oder als Umgebung sloppypar
+
+Um die Zeilen stets gleichlang zu halten wird in Wörter am
+Zeilenende gebrochen, um lange Abstaende zwischen Wörtern
+zu vermeiden.
+\sloppy bewirkt ein schlampigeres Umgehen mit diesem
+Vorgang, man riskiert grössere Abstände zwischen den Worten
+im diese ganz lassen zu koennen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\fussy ::fussy::
+oder als Umgebung fussypar
+
+Gegenteil zu \sloppy (default)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+############################################################
+Leerräume steuern,füllen
+############################################################
+\dotfill ::dotfill::
+
+Füllt eine Bereich horizontal mit Punkten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\hrulefill ::hrulefill::
+
+Füllt einen Bereich horizontal mit einem Strich.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\fill ::fill::
+
+Die Abstände zwischen Absätzen werden bei LaTeX automatisch
+je nach Textmenge und Leerraum auf der Seite gesetzt.
+Mit diesem Befehl wird erzwungen, das hier der überschüssige
+Raum eingefügt werden soll.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stretch{Dezimalzahl} ::strech::
+
+Eine Länge als vielfaches von \fill.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\hspace{Länge} ::hspace::
+\hspace*{Länge}
+
+Fuegt horizontalen Abstand ein.
+\hfill entspricht \hspace*{\fill}.
+* wird am Textanfang/-ende nicht ignoriert.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\vspace{Länge} ::vspace::
+
+Fuegt vertikalen Abstand ein.
+\vfill entspricht \vspace*{\fill}.
+* wird am Textanfang/-ende nicht ignoriert.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\indent ::indent::
+
+Die erste Zeile des nächsten Absatzes wird eingerückt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\noindent ::noindent::
+
+Die erste Zeile des nächsten Absatzes wird nicht eingerückt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\quad ::quad::qquad::
+\qquad (entspricht \quad\quad)
+
+Horizontaler absoluter Abstand von 1em
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/gleit.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/gleit.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..37364850e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/gleit.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Gleitende Tabellen und Bilder ::figure::table::
+############################################################
+\begin{figure}[pos] Bild \end{figure}
+\begin{figure*}[pos] Bild \end{figure*}
+\begin{table}[pos] Tabelle \end{table}
+\begin{table*}[pos] Tabelle \end{table*}
+
+
+(mit *) Nur bei zweispaltigen Dokumenten, beide Spalten
+werden zur Verfügung gestellt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Parameter pos
+ h here (im Text)
+ t top (Seitenbeginn)
+ b bottom (Seitenende)
+ p page (eigene Seite mit allen Tabellen, etc.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Stilparameter:
+ Begrenzungsanzahlen für Gleitende Objekte :
+ topnummer
+ bottomnumber
+ totalnumber
+ dbltopnumber (doublepage)
+Zu setzen via \setcounter{}{}
+::topfraction::bottomfraction::textfraction::
+::dbtopfraction::floatpagefraction::dbfloatpagefraction::
+Bruchteile (0.0-1.0), min. max. gleitender Objekte auf
+einer Seite :
+ \topfraction max am Seitenanfang
+ \bottomfraction max am Seitenende
+ \textfraction max im Text
+ \dbtopfraction max am Seitenanfang , doublepage
+ \floatpagefraction min einer gesonderten Seite
+ \dbfloatpagefraction " , auf doublepage
+Zu setzen via \renewcommand{}{}
+::floatsep::textfloatsep::intextsep::dbfloatsep::
+::dbtextfloatsep::
+Abstände zwischen :
+ \floatsep Objekten
+ \textfloatsep Text und Objekt am Seitenanfang/ende
+ \intextsep Objekt und Textrand, im Text
+ \dbfloatsep entspr. bei doublepage
+ \dbtextfloatsep "
+Zu setzen via \setcounter{}{}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\caption[Kurzform fuer Verzeichnis]{Text} ::caption::
+
+Erzeugt Überschrift bzw Unterschrift@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..98ba09dc19 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/gpl_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,449 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@GNU General Public License - GNU Project - Free Software Foundation (FSF)
+::gpl_hlp::
+Table of Contents
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+
+Preamble
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE | Version 2, June 1991
+
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+0.
+ This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+
+1.
+ You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+
+2.
+ You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+
+2.a)
+ You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+2.b)
+ You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+2.c)
+ If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+
+3.
+ You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+
+3.a)
+ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.b)
+ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.c)
+ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+4.
+ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+5.
+ You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+
+6.
+ Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+
+7.
+ If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+8.
+ If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+
+9.
+ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+
+10.
+ If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+NO WARRANTY
+
+
+11.
+ BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+12.
+ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+- one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does. -
+Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+
+
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
+`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
+suits your program.
+
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+
+A copy of
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+
+GNU's home page
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html
+
+FSF & GNU inquiries & questions to
+gnu@@gnu.org"
+Other ways to contact
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html#ContactInfo
+
+Copyright notice above.
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA
+
+Updated:
+16 Feb 1998 tower
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/graphics.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/graphics.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ec62eb4d7c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/graphics.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Einarbeitung grafischer Elemente ::grafics::
+############################################################
+Package graphics
+\usepackage[Treiber]{graphics}
+
+siehe auch in grfguide.dvi wenn vorhanden
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Treiber
+ dvips ps eps
+ xdvi ps eps
+ dviwin ps eps pcx bmp
+############################################################
+Grafik einbinden ::includegraphics::
+############################################################
+\includegraphics{Bild}
+\includegraphics[Breite,Höhe]{Bild}
+\includegraphics*[Breite,Höhe]{Bild}
+
+Baut Bild in den Kontext ein. * bewirkt das Ausschneiden des
+benützten Bildbereiches. Anderenfalls ragt das Bild über
+den restlichen Bereich hinaus. Empfehlenswert ist es diesen
+Befehl mit der figure Umgebung in den Text einzugliedern.
+Einseitig umflossenen Text kann man mit dem latex-packet picins
+erreichen, oder mit "\parbox"en erzwingen.
+############################################################
+Objektmanipulation
+############################################################
+\scalebox{Faktor}{Text etc} ::scalebox::
+Textskalierung
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\resizebox{Breite}{H÷he}{Text etc} ::resizebox::
+Anderes Format
+Breite = ! -> Breite skaliert
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\rotatebox{GradWinkel}{Text etc} ::rotatebox::
+Drehung der Ausgabe
+############################################################
+generelle Deklerationen, etc.
+############################################################
+\ExecuteOptions{OPTION} ::ExecuteOptions::
+
+Setzen von Optionen. Dazu gehören einerseits die Treiber
+andererseits :
+ draft Setzt Rahmen anstatt der Bilder ein -> schnellerer
+ Aufbau des Bildes
+ final Gegenteil zu draft
+ hiderotate Versteckt rotierte Objekte
+ hidescale Versteckt scalierte Objekte
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\graphicspath{path-liste} ::graphicspath::
+
+Setzt den Suchpfad fuer graphics-Objekte. Ein Beispiel für
+unix :
+\graphicspath{{/home/mys/}{pictures}}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{ps,eps,gif}
+::DeclareGraphicsExtentions::
+Ergaenzt Bildnamen um diese Endungen um zu den korrekten
+Dateinamen zu erhalten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{ext}{type}{readfile}{command}
+::DeclareGraphicsRule::
+Dateien mit Endung ext werden als Dateien des Types type verstanden
+(z.B. als eps ps gif ..) aus der Datei mit Endung readfile werden
+gegebenenfalls die Boundigbox - Werte eingelesen, und vor Einbau
+wird command ausgefuehrt.
+z.B.
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{´zcat #1}
+ermöglicht das verwenden gepackter Bilder.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/graphicx.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/graphicx.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f780870221 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/graphicx.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Einarbeitung grafischer Elemente ::graficx::
+############################################################
+Package graphicx
+\usepackage[Treiber]{graphicx}
+
+siehe auch in grfguide.dvi wenn vorhanden
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Treiber
+ dvips ps eps
+ xdvi ps eps
+ dviwin ps eps pcx bmp
+############################################################
+Grafik einbinden ::includegraphics::
+############################################################
+\includegraphics[Optionslist]{Bild}
+
+Komma separierte Optionen Liste z.B width=1,height=1
+Options :
+ bb Bonding Box,z.B ( = 1 1 100 200)
+ viewport wie bb relativ zur vorhandenen Bonding Box
+ angle Drehwinkel
+ width Skalierung auf diese Breite
+ height Skalierung auf diese Höhe
+ totalheight Skalierung unter Berücksichtigung einer
+ Drehung
+ keepaspectratio Beibehalten der orginalen Seiten-
+ verhältnisse (true,false)
+ scale Skalierung
+ clip Ausschneiden des Bereiches ?
+ type Datentyp der verwandten Datei (z.B. eps)
+gefolgt von type :
+ ext Endung der Datei (sofern noch nicht vorgegeben)
+ read Endung der Datei mit der Bondig Box Information
+ command Auszuführender Befehl
+############################################################
+Objektmanipulation
+############################################################
+\scalebox{Faktor}{Text etc} ::scalebox::
+Textskalierung
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\resizebox{Breite}{H÷he}{Text etc} ::resizebox::
+Anderes Format
+Breite = ! -> Breite skaliert
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\rotatebox[Optionslist]{Winkel}{Text etc} ::rotatebox::
+
+Drehung der Ausgabe
+ origin Rotationszentrum beschrieben durch ein oder zwei
+ der folgenden Zeichen
+ c bildzentriert
+ r right
+ l left
+ b buttom
+ B baseline
+ x x-Koordinate des Rot.
+ y y-Koordinate des Rot.
+ units Was ist zu 360 Grad äquivalent ?
+############################################################
+generelle Deklerationen, etc.
+############################################################
+\ExecuteOptions{OPTION} ::ExecuteOptions::
+
+Setzen von Optionen. Dazu gehören einerseits die Treiber
+andererseits :
+ draft Setzt Rahmen anstatt der Bilder ein -> schnellerer
+ Aufbau des Bildes
+ final Gegenteil zu draft
+ hiderotate Versteckt rotierte Objekte
+ hidescale Versteckt scalierte Objekte
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\graphicspath{path-liste} ::graphicspath::
+
+Setzt den Suchpfad fuer graphics-Objekte. Ein Beispiel fuer
+unix :
+\graphicspath{{/home/mys/}{pictures}}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{ps,eps,gif}
+::DeclareGraphicsExtensions::
+Ergänzt Bildnamen um diese Endungen um zu den korrekten
+Dateinamen zu erhalten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{ext}{type}{readfile}{command}
+::DeclareGraphicsRule::
+Dateien mit Endung ext werden als Dateien des Types type verstanden
+(z.B. als eps ps gif ..) aus der Datei mit Endung readfile werden
+gegebenenfalls die Boundigbox - Werte eingelesen, und vor Einbau
+wird command ausgefuehrt.
+z.B.
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{´zcat #1}
+ermöglicht das verwenden gepackter Bilder.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/if.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/if.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a15e28b49f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/if.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Bedingungen ::ifthenelse::whiledo::equal::not::and::or::
+############################################################
+\ifthenelse{test}{wenn_zweig}{sonstzweig}
+\whiledo{test}{schleifentext}
+
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Abfragebedingungen:
+1. \equal{String1}{String2}
+Ist String1 gleich String2 so ist das Ergebnis wahr.
+(Für Zeichenketten)
+2. n1 < n2
+ n1 = n2
+ n1 > n2
+(Für Zahlen)
+3. \{ test \}
+Klammern für Teiltest
+3.a \not test
+3.b \and test
+3.d \or test
+Als Verknüpfungen von Teiltests
+
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/index.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/index.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..225ba7a153 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/index.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Überschriften
+############################################################
+Folgende Befehle erzeugen Überschriften in folgender
+Hierarchie : ::part::chapter::section::subsection::
+::subsubsection::paragraph::subparagraph::
+\part{Text} Einteilung eines Buches
+\chapter{Text} Kapitel
+\section{Text}
+\subsection{Text}
+\subsubsection{Text}
+\paragraph{Text}
+\subparagraph{Text}
+
+Text entspricht der jeweiligen Überschrift.
+Wird ein * hinter den Befehl gesetzt so wird der entsprechende
+Eintrag nicht ins Inhaltsverzeichnis uebernommen.
+############################################################
+Aufzaehlungen
+############################################################
+\begin{enumerate} ::enumerate::item::
+ \item Text
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Zaehlt die Eintraege durch.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{itemize} ::itemize::
+ \item Text
+\end{itemize}
+
+Stellt ein Symbol vor jeden Eintrag.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{description} ::discription::
+ \item[Kurzform] Text
+\end{description}
+
+Stellt die Kurzform fett gedruckt vor den jeweiligen Eintrag
+############################################################
+Anhang
+############################################################
+Umgebung :
+\begin{appendix} ::appendix::
+\end{appendix}
+
+Erzeugt einen Bereich der mit allen seinen Kapiteln etc.
+als Anhang interpretiert wird.
+############################################################
+Stichwortverzeichnis
+############################################################
+Umgebung :
+\begin{theindex} ::theindex::
+ \item haupt_eintrag
+ \subitem eingerückter sub_eintrag ::subitem::subsubitem::
+ \subsubitem noch weiter eingerueckt der subsub_eintrag
+ \indexspace % erzeugt Leerzeile ::indexspace::
+\end{theindex}
+
+Dient der Erstellung von Inhaltsverzeichnissen.
+Dies muß immer noch von Hand geschehen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Eine automatische Indexerstellung erreicht man folgender Weise :
+Package :
+\usepackage{makeidx} ::makeidx::
+Im Vorspann des Dokumentes trägt man den Befehl
+\makeindex ::makeindex::
+ein. Im flüssigen Text folgen dann Einträge der Form
+\index{haupt_eintrag}
+ setzt einen Haupteintrag
+\index{haupt_eintrag!sub_eintrag}
+ setzt unter Haupteintrag einen untergeordneten
+\index{haupt_eintrag!sub_eintrag!subsub_eintrag}
+ ...
+\index{haupt_eintrag|(}
+Weiterer Text des Dokuments
+\index{haupt_eintrag|)}
+ bewirkt eine von n bis m Angabe, statt der sonst
+ üblichen Seitenangabe.
+\index{haupt_eintrag|see{anderer Haupteintrag}}
+ erstellt einen Querverweis.
+\index{haupt_eintrag|uu}
+ erzeugt eine unterstrichene Seitenzahl.
+Diese Einträge werden in der Datei mit Endung idx gespeichert.
+Mit Aufruf des Programmes "makeindex" wird dann das
+Verzeichnis erstellt. (makeindex text.idx)
+(tcltexed startet makeindex automatisch bei Aufruf von latex,
+ das Resultat wird jedoch erst beim zweiten Durchgang
+berücksichtigt)
+
+An der Stelle an des Befehls
+\printindex ::printindex::
+im Dokument wird dann beim nächsten mal das
+Stichwortverzeichnis eingefügt.
+
+############################################################
+Erstellung und Manipulation der gängigen Verzeichnisse
+############################################################
+
+Syntax :
+\tableofcontents ::tableofcontents::
+
+Erstellt das Inhaltverzeichnis
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\listoffigures ::listofffigures::
+
+Erstellt Liste aller figures
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\listoftables ::listoftables::
+
+Erstellt Liste aller table
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::addcontentsline::
+\addcontentsline{Art}{Format}{Text}
+
+Schiebt zusätzlichen Eintrag ein.
+
+Art
+ toc für "table of contents"
+ lof für "list of figures"
+ lot für "list of tables"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::addtocontents::
+ \addtocontents{Art}{Text}
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/input.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/input.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..db3ee79c33 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/input.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Dateien einbinden
+############################################################
+\input{file} ::input::
+
+Fügt 1:1 in Text ein vor Compilierung
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\include{file} ::include::
+
+Wird getrennt abgearbeitet, und dann eingefügt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\includeonly{file1,file2,...,filen} ::includeonly::
+
+Nur files dieser Liste werden wirklich eingefügt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stepcounter{Name} ::stepcounter::
+
+Erhöht den Wert von Name um eins
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\value{Name} ::value::
+
+Gibt den Wert von
+############################################################
+Bildschirm/Kommandozeile
+############################################################
+\typeout{Nachricht} ::typeout::
+
+Gibt beim Compilieren die Nachricht aus.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\typein{Nachricht} ::typein::
+
+Fügt an der Stelle des Auftauchens, nach Ausgabe der
+Nachricht, den eingegeben Text ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\typein[\Befehl]{Nachricht}
+
+ " , aber setzt Befehl auf den eingegeben Text.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/latexbox.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/latexbox.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..55f0970aa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/latexbox.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Boxen / Rahmen
+############################################################
+Übergabeparameter pos :
+ t top
+ b bottom
+ l left
+ r right
+Doppelnennungen sind zum teil möglich.
+############################################################
+unter latex allgemein :
+
+Identisch wie unter Umgebung picture, wenn man die
+Koordinatenangaben nebst Klammern weg läßt
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\rule{Breite}{Hoehe}{Text} ::rule::
+\rule[lift]{Breite}{Hoehe}{Text}
+
+Schwarzer Balken um lift über der Grundlinie mit (Breite.Höhe)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung minipage ::minipage::
+\begin{minipage}[pos]{Breite}
+\end{minipage}
+oder
+\parbox[pos]{Breite}{Text} ::parbox::
+
+Absatzboxen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Parameter
+::fboxrule::fboxsep::
+\fboxrule Breite der Rahmenlinien
+\fboxsep Leerraum zwischen Rahmen und Text
+############################################################
+Boxen / Rahmen unter der Umgebung picture
+(siehe auch unter picture)
+############################################################
+\makebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::makebox::
+ohne Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\framebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::framebox::
+mit durchgezogenem Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\dashbox{Strichlänge}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::dashbox::
+mit gestricheltem Rahmen,
+
+############################################################
+Bildkompositionen im Arbeitsspeicher unter der Umgebung picture
+############################################################
+Erstellt neuen Namen fuer Bildteil
+\newsavebox{\Name} ::newsavebox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\savebox{\Name}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::savebox::
+Erstellt neue Komposition unter \Name mit Breite x ,Hoehe y und
+Ansatzpunkt pos
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\usebox{\Name} ::usebox::
+Nutzt erstellte Kompositionen
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/math.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/math.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f7f43af831 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/math.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Mathematische Umgebung
+############################################################
+\begin{math} ::math::
+ ...
+\end{math}
+
+oder kürzer
+$ ... $ ::$::
+
+Formeln flüssig im Text.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{displaymath} ::displaymath::
+ ...
+\end{displaymath}
+
+oder kuerzer
+\[ ... \] ::\[::
+::\]::
+
+Formeln abgesetzt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{equation} ::equation::
+\end{equation}
+
+Formeln durchnummeriert.
+############################################################
+Mathematische Befehle
+############################################################
+{Teil_1 \atop Teil_2} ::atop::
+
+Setzt Teil_1 ueber Teil_2.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+{Teil_1 \choose Teil_2} ::choose::
+
+Setzt Teil_1 über Teil_2 und klammert das Ergebnis ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Mit \nolimits wird bei folgenden Befehlen, dass Dahinterstellen
+der Grenzen im $$-Modus unterdrückt : ::nolimits::
+\sum Summenzeichen ::sum::
+\int Integralzeichen ::int::
+\oint Kreisintegralzeichen ::oint::
+\prod Produktzeichen ::prod::
+
+\coprod ::coprod::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\frac{Zähler}{Nenner} ::frac::
+
+Bruch
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sqrt{} ::sqrt::
+\sqrt[n]{}
+
+Quadrat - bzw n.te - wurzel von ...
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\nonumber ::nonumber::
+
+Stellt die Durchnummerierung aller Gleichungen ab.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\left? \right? ::left::right::
+mit ? aus "" "(" ")" "[" "]" "|" "|" "\{" "\}"
+
+Klammert einen Bereich einer Gleichung und passt sich in
+der Grösse an.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stackrel{oben}{unten} ::stackrel::
+
+Schiebt verkleinert "oben" über "unten".
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\pmod{a+b} ::pmod::
+
+erzeugt : (mod a + b)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\text{ ... } ::text::
+
+normaler Text eingeschoben in mathematischen Formeln
+############################################################
+nur mit Bildern :
+############################################################
+griechisches Alphabet :
+
+\alpha \beta \gamma \delta \epsilon \varepsilon \zeta \eta
+\theta \vartheta \iota \kappa \lambda \mu \nu \xi \pi \varpi
+\rho \varrho \sigma \varsigma \tau \upsilon \phi \varphi \chi
+\psi \omega
+\Gamma \Delta \Theta \Lambda \Xi \Pi \Sigma \Upsilon \Phi
+\Omega
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Punkt(e) vertikal horizontal ..
+
+\cdot \vdots \ldots
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Pfeile :
+
+\leftarrow \rightarrow \uparrow \downarrow
+\leftrightarrow \updownarrow
+\leftharpoonup \rightharpoonup
+\leftharpoondown \rightharpoondown \rightleftharpoons
+\hookleftarrow \hookrightarrow
+\mapsto
+\nwarrow \nearrow \swarrow \searrow
+\longleftarrow \longrightarrow \longleftrightarrow
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Doppelte Pfeile :
+
+\Longleftrightarrow
+\Leftarrow \Rightarrow \Uparrow \Downarrow
+\Longleftarrow \Longrightarrow
+\Leftrightarrow \Updownarrow
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Bekannte Funktionen :
+
+\arccos \arcsin \arctan \arg \cos \cosh \cot \coth \csc \deg
+\det \dim \exp \gcd \hom \inf \ker \lg \lim \liminf \limsub
+\ln \log \max \min \Pr \sec \sin \sinh \sup \tan \tanh
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\imath \jmath
+
+fuer Vektoren gedacht um sich den Punkt unter dem
+Vektorpfeil zu sparen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+haefig genutzt :
+
+\pm \mp plus/minus minus/plus
+\hbar Physiker lieben h-quer
+\nabla Nabla
+\partial Bei partiellen Differentialen
+\prime Ableitungsstrich (?)
+\Re Realteil
+\Im Imaginaerteil
+\infty Unendlichzeichen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Diverse Striche und Klammern ...
+ \hat{} \breve{} \grave{} \bar{} \dot{}
+ \check{} \acute{} \tilde{} \vec{} \ddot{}
+ \overline{} \overbrace{} \widehat{}
+ \underline{} \underbrace{} \widetilde{}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+\times \otimes
+\div \ast \dagger \ddagger \amalg \cap \cup
+\uplus \sqcap \sqcup \vee \wedge \setminus \wr \circ \bullet
+\oslash \odot
+\bigcirc \bigtriangleup \bigtriangledown
+\oplus \ominus
+
+\le \ge \models \ll \gg \neq \subset \supset \doteq
+\subseteq \supseteq \approx \sqsubseteq \sqsupseteq \cong
+\in \ni \equiv \vdash \dashv \perp \smile \frown \parallel
+\prec \succ \sim \preceq \succeq \simeq \asymp \bowtie \mid
+
+
+\aleph \wp
+
+\ell \sonder_strich
+\top \bot \surd \neg \exists \forall \emptyset
+\natural \sharp \flat \angle \backslash \clubsuit \diamondsuit \spadesuit \heartsuit \triangle \mod
+
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/notiz.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/notiz.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66bc8866fb --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/notiz.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Fußnoten
+############################################################
+\footnote{Text} ::footnote::
+\footnote[Nummer]{Text}
+
+Im flüssigen Text erscheint eine Nummer, unter dem Text
+die Fußnote. Mit angegebener Nummer muß das Mitzählen des
+Counters via \addtocounter{footnote}{Anzahl} selbst nachgeholt
+werden.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\footnoterule ::footnoterule::
+
+Linie zwischen Fußnote und Seitentext.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\footnotemark ::footnotemark::
+\footnotetext{Text} ::footnotetext::
+\footnotemark[Nummer]
+\footnotetext[Nummer]{Text}
+
+Setzt Marke in Tabellen, Boxen etc. .
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Stilparameter : ::footnotesep::
+\footnotesep vert. Abstand Fußnoten
+############################################################
+Randnotiz
+############################################################
+\marginpar{Text} ::marginpar::
+
+Text am Seitenrand
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Parameter sind extra als Seitenparameter beschrieben.
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/pagenumbering.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/pagenumbering.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e173d8c7b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/pagenumbering.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Syntax :
+\pagenumbering{num_stil} ::pagenumbering::
+
+Einstellung des Stils der Seitennummerierung.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+num_stil
+ arabic (default)
+ roman roemisch klein
+ Roman roemisch gross
+ alph Alphabet klein
+ Alph Alphabet gross@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/pagestyle.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/pagestyle.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bafdc6d3d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/pagestyle.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Syntax :
+\pagestyle{Stil} ::pagestyle::
+
+Legt einen Stil für den generellen Seitenaufbau fest
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Stil
+ plain (default) mit Seitennummer als Fußzeile
+ empty keine Kopf oder Fußzeile
+ headings Seitennummer im Kopf + Ueberschrift Information
+#########################################################
+Syntax :
+\thispagestyle{Stile} ::thispagestyle::
+
+Wie oben jedoch nur für die aktuelle Seite
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/picture.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/picture.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7bd5c94902 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/picture.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Umgebung picture ::picture::
+\begin{picture}(x,y)
+\end{picture}
+
+Erzeugt eine Bildumgebung mit Grösse (x Breite,y Höhe)
+############################################################
+Parameter : ::unitlength::
+ \unitlength Äquivalent fuer eine Längeneinheit
+Linienbreite ::thicklines:thinlines::linethickness::
+ \thicklines Dicke Linien
+ \thinlines Dünne Linien
+ \linethickness{Breite} Nutzung einer angegebene Linienbreite
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Übergabeparameter pos :
+ t top
+ b bottom
+ l left
+ r right
+Doppelnennungen sind möglich.
+############################################################
+Positionierung von Bildelementen (immer zu verwenden)
+############################################################
+\put(x,y){Text} ::put::
+
+Setzt "Text" auf die Koordinaten (x,y)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\multiput(x1,y1)(x2,y2){N}{Text} ::multiput::
+
+Setzt "Text" N mal zwischen den Koordinaten (x1,y1) und (x2,y2)
+############################################################
+Boxen / Rahmen
+############################################################
+\makebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::makebox::
+
+ohne Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\framebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::framebox::
+
+mit durchgezogenem Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\dashbox{Strichlänge}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::dashbox::
+
+mit gestricheltem Rahmen,
+############################################################
+Geometrische Formen
+############################################################
+\line(x,y){Text} ::line::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\vector(x,y){Text} ::vector::
+
+Pfeil
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\circle{Radius} ::circle::
+
+Kreis
+\circle*{Radius}
+
+gefüllter Kreis
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\oval(x,y) ::oval::
+
+Rechteck mit maximal abgerundeten Seiten
+
+\oval(x,y)[pos]
+
+bzw. ein Teil davon. pos gibt an welcher Teil gezeichnet werden
+soll.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\bezier{N}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3) ::bezier::
+
+Agerundeter Winkel mit (x2,y2) als Zentrum. Dabei werden
+N Punkte gezeichnet
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\shortstack[pos2]{Text1\\Text2\\...} ::shortstack::
+
+Stellt Text1 über Text2 ueber ... zentriert wird dabei
+(pos2) l left r right oder c center.
+############################################################
+Bildkompositionen im Arbeitsspeicher
+############################################################
+\newsavebox{\Name} ::newsavebox::
+
+Erstellt neuen Namen fuer Bildteil
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\savebox{\Name}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::savebox::
+
+Erstellt neue Komposition unter \Name mit Breite x ,Hoehe y und
+Ansatzpunkt pos
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\usebox{\Name} ::usebox::
+
+Nutzt erstellte Kompositionen
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3314253548 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/readme_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Tcltexed | Version 2.3 | 1. Feb. 1999 | Martin Strauß
+::readme_hlp::
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauß
+
+
+ Tcltexed ein LaTeX-Editor
+
+ !!! Achtung, dieses Programm ist noch unter Konstruktion !!!!
+ Ich habe inzwischen so einiges an Text bearbeitet mit diesem Programm,
+ aber für den Fall der Fälle ... alle gefundenen Fehler bitte an mich weiterleiten.
+ Am besten per email : mys@@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+
+ kurze Anleitung :
+ Die systematische Beschreibung ist unter "Help" "Tcltexed" zu finden.
+ Auf jedenfall lohnt es sich ab und zu mal <F1> zu drücken.
+ Für jeden bekannten Latexbefehle gibt es eine kurze Beschreibung !!!
+ Der Tastatursatz ist an den von Motiv, emacs und joe / Borland Pascal
+ angelehnt. Zuzüglich eigener Tastenkombinationen.
+ Ist ein Editorfenster geöffnet so gibt es links oben ein Bildchen.
+ Das Fenster mit dem farbigen Bild (mit Maus draufdrücken) ist das
+ Hauptdokument.
+ Drückt man auf ein Bild in der mathematischen Sammlung sollte der
+ passende Befehl automatisch ins aktuelle Editorfenster eingefügt werden.
+ Aktuelles Fenster -> Fenster mit dem Bild mit Ringen.
+ Gibt man einen latex-Befehl ein, so versucht tcltexed diesen zu erkennen
+ und gegebenenfalls abzuschliessen. (z.B. wird \ga zu \gamma korrigiert)
+ Unter Optionen findet man die Möglichkeit dieses Verhalten abzustellen.
+ Die Leiste oben im Editorfenster dient dem direkten Aufruf der Programme
+ die da draufstehen.
+
+ Rein prinzipiell ist dieses Programm unter unix, linux, Win95 WinNT etc
+ lauffähig. (Falls einer das Program für nen Mac haben will, sollte er/sie
+ sich bei mir melden). Man benötigt hierzu die Scriptsprache Tcl/Tk die es
+ kostenlos im Internet gibt.
+ ... es liegt im Netz !!!! Näheres unter :
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+
+ Frage ? Fehler gefunden ? Ideen fuer die Zukunft ? Sonstiges
+ bitte an mich schreiben :
+
+ Martin Strauss
+ mys@@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/sonder.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/sonder.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..599eb03420 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/sonder.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Sonderbares
+############################################################
+\today ::today::
+
+Fügt Datum der Erstellung mittels LaTeX ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+percent (englisch per cent)
+\% ::%::
+
+Das Prozentzeichen % wird bei LaTeX gemeinhin
+als Auskommutierungszeichen benutzt.
+Um im Text eine Ausgabe dieses Zeichens zu erreichen
+muss es als Zeichenfolge \% in den Text eingefügt werden.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX ::LaTeX::
+
+Fügt LaTeX-Logo ein.
+
+\LaTeX2e ::LaTeX2e::
+
+Fügt LaTeX2e-Logo ein.@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tabbing.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tabbing.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af59740465 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tabbing.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Tabulatorsetzung ::tabbing::
+############################################################
+\begin{tabbing}
+eins\=zwei\=drei\\ % Musterzeile (hier drei Spalten)
+ 1 \> 2 \> 3 \\ % angepaßte Zeile
+ ...\\
+\end{tabbing}
+
+Soll die Musterzeile nicht sichtbar sein -> endet mit \kill
+statt \\.
+\+ setzt dauerhaft für alle folgenden Zeilen alle Spalten
+ein TAB nach rechts versetzt.
+\= erstellt einen neuen TAB.
+\> verschiebt zum nächsten TAB. @
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tabelle.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tabelle.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a3db7d20ae --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tabelle.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Tabellen ::array::tabular::
+############################################################
+
+Übergabeparameter pos :
+ t top
+ b bottom
+Spaltenformat besteht zusammengesetzt aus
+ l left (neue Spalte)
+ r right (neue Spalte)
+ c center (neue Spalte)
+ p{Breite} Spaltenbreite
+ *{n}{Spaltenformat-2} n-mal Spaltenformat-2
+ | vertikaler Strich
+ || vertikaler Doppelstrich
+ @@{Text} fuegt Text ein
+############################################################
+Tabellenumgebungen
+############################################################
+
+Die Anzahl der Spalten ergibt sich ueber die Anzahl
+der l,r,c im Textstring Spaltenformat.
+Neue Zeilen werden durch Zeilenumbruch bewirkt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{array}[pos]{Spaltenformat}
+ Spalte1 & Spalte2 & ... \\
+ ...
+\end{array}
+
+Nur in mathematischen Modi ..
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{tabular}[pos]{Spaltenformat}
+\end{tabular}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{tabular*}{Tabellenbreite}[pos]{Spaltenformat}
+\end{tabular*}
+############################################################
+Nützliche zum Teil unabhängige Befehle
+############################################################
+\hline ::hline::
+
+Horizontale Linie,
+direkt nach \\ in Tabellen bewirkt eine Unterteilung
+in ganze Zeilen. (unabh.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\vline ::vline::
+
+Vertikale Linie,
+innerhalb von Spalten bewirkt eine vertikale Unterteilung
+in zwei Spalten. (unabh.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\cline{n-m} ::cline::
+
+Horizontale Linie von Spalte n nach m,
+direkt nach \\ in Tabellen. (abh.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\multicolumn{Spaltenanzahl}{Spaltenformat}{Text}
+::multicolumn::
+Vereinigt die nächsten Spalten angegebener Spaltenzahl zu einer,
+die wiederum neu eingeteilt werden kann. (abh.)
+############################################################
+Stilparameter
+############################################################
+::tabcolsep::arraycolsep::arrayrulewidth::doublerulesep::
+\tabcolsep Spaltenzwischenraum bei tabular
+\arraycolsep Spaltenzwischenraum bei array
+\arrayrulewidth Liniendicke
+\doublerulesep Abstand von Doppellinien
+via \setlength{}{}
+::arraystretch::
+\arraystretch Zeilenabstand als Faktor (default 1)
+via \renewcommand{}{}@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..88b30808f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/tcltexed_hlp.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +head 1.2; +access; +symbols; +locks + mys:1.2; strict; +comment @# @; + + +1.2 +date 2000.08.15.21.26.39; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next 1.1; + +1.1 +date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp; +branches; +next ; + + +desc
+@@
+ +1.2 +log +@*** empty log message *** +@ +text +@############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed steht fuer tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Im wesentlichen Besteht Tcltexed aus zwei Teilbereichen. Zum
+einen der Funktionsbereich der Editorfenster, die in unter
+"Editor" beschrieben wird, zum anderen eine ganze Menge an
+Hilfsdiensten, die allesamt über das Hauptfenster aufgerufen
+werden.
+Alle Aktionen auf einen Text beziehen sich auf das Editorfenster
+das den Fokus zuletzt besessen hat, bzw nach meiner Definition
+gerade besitzt. Nähres dazu in der Beschreibung "Editor".
+
+Im folgenden werde ich die verschiedenen Funktionen der über
+das Hauptfenster aufrufbaren Dienste aufzählen und beschreiben.
+
+Menupunkte des Hauptfensters
+1. File
+ a) New
+Hiermit kann man neue LaTeX-Texte beginnen. Es gibt dazu einen
+internen Default-Text, der bei externes Default-Textes im
+Basisverzeichnis unter default.tex
+ b) Load
+Laden einer vorhandenen Datei ...
+ c) Append
+Fügt im Text den Inhalt der Datei ab der Position des Cursers
+ein.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Speichert den Text.
+ f) Quit
+Beendet die Arbeit mit Tcltexed. Alle Fenster werden (wenn nötig
+mit Rückfrage) geschlossen.
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Löschung des gesamten Textes.
+ b) Zeilenumbruch
+Über dieses Untermenü kann man entweder für den gesamten Text,
+einen Absatz oder eine Zeile einen Zeilenumbruch bewirken.
+Endet eine Zeile mit einem Leerzeichen so wird die folgende Zeile
+als Fortsetzung verstanden. Wird ein Zeilenumbruch auf eine Zeile
+ausgeführt, so wird die Zeile inklusive der Fortsetzungen neu gebrochen.
+Wird im Untermenü eine Umkehr des Zeilenumbruchs gewählt, so werden
+für die betroffenen Zeilen die Fortsetzungen wieder zusammengefügt,
+und an die jeweilige Anfangszeile angehängt.
+Ist die erste Zeile um einige Leerzeichen eingerückt, so werden auch
+die zum Umbruch gehörenden Zeilen um diese Leerzeichen eingerückt.
+ c) Rechtschreibung
+Rechtschreibkorrektur des aktuellen Textes.
+ d) registriere Wort
+Wenn sich der Curser im aktuellen Text in einem als falsch
+markierten Wort befindet, dann wird dieses Wort als richtig
+geschrieben registriert.
+ e) \"a..\ss -> ä..ß
+Wandelt alle Latex-Befehle zur Darstellung von Umlauten in Umlaute um.
+ f) ä..ß -> \"a..\ss
+Wandelt alle Umlaute in die zugehörigen Latex-Befehle um.
+ g) "a.."s -> ä..ß
+Wandelt Latex-Befehle zur Darstellung von Umlauten aus dem [german]{babel}
+Packet in Umlaute um.
+ h) ä..ß -> "a.."s
+Wandelt Umlaute in die zugehörigen Latex-Befehle des [german]{babel}
+Packetes um. Dieses Format ist mit "ispell -t -d deutsch file.tex" konform.
+ i) Search
+Suchen und Ersetzen im Text.
+Mit oder ohne Beachtung der Groß/Kleinschreibung
+ j) My Own
+Ermöglicht das Eintragen von LaTeX-Sequenzen die per Buttondruck
+in den Text eingefügt werden. Diese eigenen LaTeX-Sequenzen
+werden mit "Optionen speichern" mit abgespeichert. Und bleiben
+dann für den nächsten Aufruf von Tcltexed erhalten.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoKlammerzu
+Ist diese Funktion aktiviert, so werden Aufklammern stehts
+mit Zuklammern ergänzt.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packete/etc
+Hier kann man die automatische Ergaenzung von LaTeX-Befehlen
+aktivieren, bzw. deaktivieren. Dies geschieht selektiv fuer
+verschiedene LaTeX-Packete oder Umgebungen.
+Beispiel einer Ergänzung :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+Es ist zu beachten das je mehr LaTeX-Befehle erkannt werden sollen
+desto später oder garnicht ergänzt wird. Die Befehle werden
+einander zu ähnlich.
+ c) Sprache
+Sprachwahl fuer Texte, Buttons und Hilfen.
+Die Einstellung verändert die Sprache für den nächsten Start
+des Programmes. Sie muß folglich gespeichert werden (s.u.).
+ d) Schriftgröße
+Setzt die Schriftgröße für das Editorfenster fest.
+ e) Save Options
+Speichert alle durch User konfigurierbaren Bereiche von Tcltexed in
+eine Datei. Diese werden dann automatisch beim nächsten Start geladen.
+(Ihr Dateiname ist unter unix .tcltexed, unter Windows tcltexed.ini .
+Ich rate aber ab diese Datei von Hand zu editieren. Dateien älterer
+Tcltexedversionen werden ignoriert, bzw. überschrieben)
+
+4. Mathematik
+Liefert eine Menge von Standartbefehlen der Mathematikumgebung von
+LaTeX in Form von Buttons mit Beschriftung oder Bildern.
+Ein Druck mit der Maus fügt den entsprechenden Befehl in den Text
+an der Position des Cursers ein.
+
+5. Allgemeines
+Wie 4. , hier jedoch Sammlungen anderer Befehle.
+
+6. Help
+Habt Ehrfurcht ! Dies ist die Hilfe fuer Not leidende LaTeX Opfer.
+ a) Tcltexed
+Liefert wie ihr sicherlich schon gemerkt habt, unter anderem diesen
+Text, sowie weitere Hilfen und ähnliches zu Tcltexed selbst.
+ b) LaTeX
+Habt noch mehr Ehrfurcht !!
+Hier sind alle Tcltexed (bzw mir) zu Ohren gekommenen LaTeX-Befehle
+noch einmal alphabetisch aufgelistet. Davor Ehrfurcht ?? Nun zu vielen
+davon gibt es Kurzbeschreibungen oder Bildchen ... (ne Scheiß Arbeit)
+ + <Return> + linke Maustaste zeigen Hilfe an
+ rechte Maustaste fügt den Befehl ein
+ Bei Tastendruck A-Z a-z wird an den entsprechenden ersten Eintrag
+ gesprungen.
+@ + + +1.1 +log +@Initial revision
+@ +text +@d56 11 +a66 4 + e) Nearly
+Listet alle Worte, die dem ähneln in dem sich der Curser
+des aktuellen Textstückes befindet.
+ f) Search
+d69 1 +a69 1 + g) My Own
+d124 1 +a124 1 + gesprungen.@ + diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/titlepage.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/titlepage.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..57503f3c8e --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/titlepage.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Umgebung titlepage (Syntax siehe begin oder end)
+::titlepage::
+Dient der freien Gestaltung der Titelseite.
+Wird diese Freiheit kann man sich folgender Befehle
+bedienen.
+#########################################################
+Syntax : ::title::author::and::date::thanks::maketitle::
+\title{Titel des Dokuments}
+\author{Dieser Einer\\hier \and Ein Anderer\\dort}
+\date{Datumstext} (optional)
+\thanks{Dank an bla} (optional)
+\maketitle
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/usepackage.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/usepackage.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a42e38923 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/usepackage.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@Syntax : ::usepackage::
+\usepackage{PACKET}
+\usepackage[Option]{PACKET}
+
+
+Lädt zusätzliche Latex-Packete.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+PACKET : (es handelt sich um Makrodateien mit Endung .sty)
+ babel Latex-Stile fuer verschiedenen Sprachen
+ Option : german, english ...
+ german für deutschen Stil beim Latex-Format (z.B. wird Chapter zu
+ Kapitel)
+ umlaut(e) übersetzt Zeichen außerhalb des ascii-Zeichensatzes beim
+ compilieren automatisch in das latex-Format um. (z.B. ß zu \3)
+ graficx für Einbindung von Bildern und grafischen Manipulation
+ grafics simpleres Packet als graficx mit selber Funktion
+ epsf für Einbindung von eps-Bildern (ich empfehle graficx zu nutzen)
+(American Mathmatik Society)
+ amsmath für Formelsätze
+ amssymb für Symbole
+ amsfonts für Fonts
+ amscd für Flußdiagramme
+@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/verbatim.txt,v b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/verbatim.txt,v new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d2c762ba2d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/RCS/verbatim.txt,v @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +head 1.1;
+access;
+symbols;
+locks
+ mys:1.1; strict;
+comment @# @;
+
+
+1.1
+date 99.11.22.23.41.41; author mys; state Exp;
+branches;
+next ;
+
+
+desc
+@@
+
+
+1.1
+log
+@Initial revision
+@
+text
+@############################################################
+Orginaltext ::verbatim::
+############################################################
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Text
+\end{verbatim}
+
+fügt Text 1 zu 1 in den laufenden LaTeX-formatierten Text ein.
+Der erste wieder beachtete LaTeX-Befehl ist \end{verbatim}.
+
+\begin{verbatim*}
+ Text
+\end{verbatim*}
+
+Analog wie oben, aber statt Space werden sichtbare Platzhalter
+gesetzt.@
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/Seitenformat.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/Seitenformat.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fec120eacc --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/Seitenformat.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +############################################################
+Variablen zur Kontrolle des Seitenformates
+############################################################
+
+\voffset ::voffset::
+ vertikaler Offset der Seite
+\hoffset ::hoffset::
+ horizontaler Offset der Seite
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\oddsidemargin ::oddsidemargin::
+ Breite des linken Randes bzw ungerade Seiten
+\evensidemargin ::evensidemargin::
+ Breite des rechten Randes bzw gerade Seiten
+\topmargin ::topmargin::
+ oberer Rand bis Oberkante Kopfzeile
+\headheight ::headheight::
+ Höhe der Kopfzeile
+\headsep ::headsep::
+ Abstand zwischen Unterkante Kopf und Oberkante Rumpf
+\topskip ::topskip::
+ Abstand Oberkante Rumpf und Unterkante der ersten Textzeile
+\textheight ::textheight::
+ Gesamthöhe für den Rumpf
+\textwidth ::textwidth::
+ Gesamtbreite für Kopf, Rumpf und Fuß
+\footheight ::footheight::
+ Höhe des Rumpfes
+\footskip ::footskip::
+ Abstand Unterkante Rumpf Unterkante Fuß
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\marginparpush ::marginparpush::
+ Abstand zweier Randnotizen
+\marginparwidth ::marginparwidth::
+ Breite einer Randnotiz
+\marginparsep ::marginparsep::
+ horizontaler Abstand zum Rand des Rumpfes
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Zusätzlich bei doppelspaltigen Seiten
+\columnsep ::columnsep::
+ Breite des Spaltenseperators
+\columnseprule ::columnseprule::
+ Trennstrichdicke
+
+############################################################
+Variablen ändern mit
+setlength{Variable}{Wert} ::setlength::
+
+ ##############
+ # Kopf #
+ ##############
+
+ ##############
+ # #
+ # #
+ # Rumpf #
+ # #
+ # #
+ ##############
+
+ ##############
+ # Fuß #
+ ##############
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amscd.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amscd.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cd9392a90e --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amscd.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amscd verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amscd} ::amscd::
+
+#################################################################
+Fussdiagramme ::CD::
+#################################################################
+Unterumgebung :
+CD
+Beispiel :
+\begin{CD}
+ A @>>> B @>>> C
+ D @AAA E @VVV F
+ G @= H @<<< I
+\end{CD}
+
+Umgebung für Flussdiagramme
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@>Textoben>Textunten>
+
+Pfeil nach rechts mit Schrift darüber und darunter
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@<Textoben<Textunten<
+
+Pfeil nach links mit Schrift darüber und darunter
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@ATextlinksATextrechtsA
+
+Pfeil nach oben mit Schrift links und rechts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@VTextlinksVTextrechtsV
+
+Pfeil nach unten mit Schrift links und rechts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+@=
+
+Gleichheitszeichen
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsfonts.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsfonts.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a8d5cb9a04 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsfonts.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amsfonts verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amsfonts} ::amsfonts::
+
+#################################################################
+Fonts
+#################################################################
+Syntax :
+\mathbb{Text} ::mathbb::
+
+Liefert Text in Form von Mengenzeichen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\mathfrak{Text} ::mathfrak::
+
+Liefert Text als Frakturschrift
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\boldsymbol{Symbol} ::boldsymbol::
+
+Liefert fette Symbole
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsmath.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsmath.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..74d30c0ac8 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsmath.txt @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amsmath verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amsmath} ::amsmath::
+
+#################################################################
+mathematische Unterumgebungen
+#################################################################
+Unterumgebungen muessen in einer mathematischen Umgebung
+aufgerufen werden.
+z.B.
+\[\begin{split} ... \end{split}\]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unterumgebung : split ::split::
+\[\begin{split}
+ a&=b\\
+ c&=d
+\end{split}\]
+
+Erlaubt mehrere aneinander ausgerichtete Formeln mit wenn nur
+einer Nummer.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : multline ::multline::
+\begin{multine}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{multine}
+
+Fuer mehrzeilige Formeln mit einer Nummer.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : gather ::gather::
+\begin{gather}
+ a+b+c\\
+ +d+e
+\end{gather}
+
+
+Mehrere Formeln unausgerichtet.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : align ::align::
+\begin{align}
+ a&=b & c&=d \\
+ e&=f & g&=h \\
+ \intertext{und}
+ i&=j & k&=l
+\end{align}
+
+Erlaubt ein Array von Formeln
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+Syntax : ::intertext::
+\intertext{Text}
+
+Erlaubt einen eingeschobenen Text
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung : subequation ::subequation::
+
+Zur Hauptnummerierung kommt eine für label unsichtbare
+Unternummerierung mit kleinen Buchstaben.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unterumgebung : ?matrix ::matrix::pmatrix::bmatrix::vmatrix::Vmatrix::
+\[\begin{matrix}
+ 1 & 2 & 3 & a \\
+ 4 & 5 & 6 & b \\
+ 7 & 8 & 9 & c
+\end{matrix}\]
+
+Erzeugt eine n auf m Matrix
+matrix : ohne Klammerung
+pmatrik : mit runder Klammerung
+bmatrix : mit eckiger Klammerung
+vmatrix : mit einfachen Betragsstrichen
+Vmatrix : mit doppelten Betragsstrichen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unterumgebung : cases ::cases::
+\[sgn(x)=\begin{cases}
+ -1 & \forall\ x<0 \\
+ 0 & x=0 \\
+ 1 & \forall\ x>0
+\end{cases}\]
+
+Für Fallunterscheidungen
+#################################################################
+Sonstige Hilfen
+#################################################################
+Klammerngroesse :
+\bigl \bigr etwas groesser ::bigl::bigr::
+\Bigl \Bigr Faktor 1.5 ::Bigl::Bigr::
+\biggl \biggr Faktor 2 ::biggl::biggr::
+\Biggl \Biggr Faktor 2.5 ::Biggl::Biggr::
+links rechts der Formel
+
+Nachfolgend kommt die Klammernart "(" "|" "[" ... "]" ")"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::substack::
+\substack{ \\ ...\\ \text{Hi} ... \\ }
+Beispiel :
+\sum_\substack{i=0\\j=1}^\substack{10\\100}
+
+Schiebt mehrere Zeilen an Indizes oder Exponenten ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::text::
+\text{Text}
+
+schiebt Text ein
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::sideset::
+\sideset{}{}
+Beispiel :
+\sideset{^1_2}{^3_4}\sum
+
+Setzt seitlich Indizes,
+zum Beispiel links oben eine 1, links unten eine 2,
+ rechts oben eine 3 und rechts unten eine 4.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::xleftarrow::xrightarrow::
+xleftarrow{Oben}
+xleftarrow[Unten]{Oben}
+xrightarrow{Oben}
+xrightarrow[Unten]{Oben}
+
+
+Ein sich in Abhängigkeit zum Text streckender Pfeil mit Text "Oben"
+und "Unten".
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::boxed::
+\boxed{Formel}
+
+Rahmt Formel in eine Box ein
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareMathOperator{latex-Befehl}{Ausgabe} ::DeclareMathOperator::
+\DeclareMathOperator*{latex-Befehl}{Ausgabe}
+
+
+
+Ermöglicht das Erstellen weiterer Funktionen zu \sin \cos etc.
+* Bewirkt ein Verhalten wie z.B. \lim im flüssigen Text.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amssymb.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amssymb.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ea10bed9f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amssymb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +#########################################################
+\usepackage{amssymb} ::amssymb::
+#########################################################
+Einer der unzähligen LaTeX-Befehle des Packetes amssymb.
+#########################################################
+Eines der unzähligen Symbole bei denen ich mich weigerte
+ein extra Bild zu erstellen. (mys)
+##########################################################
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsthm.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsthm.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..13a7b7d9ea --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/amsthm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +#################################################################
+American Mathmatical Society
+#################################################################
+
+Alle folgende Befehle sind nur mit dem package amscd verfügbar.
+\usepackage{amsthm} ::amsthm::
+
+#################################################################
+Erstellen von Theoremen ::newtheorem::
+#################################################################
+
+\newtheorem{latex-synonym}{Name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{Name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}[latex-synonym2]{Name}
+\newtheorem*{latex-synonym}{Name}[section]
+
+Erstellt eine Umgebungsvariable latex-synonym die ein durchnummerieres
+Theorem mit der Bezeichnung Name (z.B. Axiom) einfügt.
+\begin{latex-synonym}
+ Bla
+\end{latex-synonym}
+bewirkt dann das einfügen eines solchem Theorems.
+
+* unterdrückt die Nummerierung.
+latex-synonym2 : es wird der gleiche Zähler wie zu diesem Theorem verwandt.
+section : bei erhoehung dieses Zählers wir der Theoremzähler auf Null gesetzt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\theoremstyle{Style} ::theoremstyle::
+
+Style :
+ plain (default)
+ definition
+ remark
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\swapnumbers ::swapnumbers::
+
+Nummerierung auf der linken Seite der Theoreme
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/begin.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/begin.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fca4dbf6d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/begin.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +############################################################
+Umgebungen ::begin::end::
+############################################################
+Syntax
+\begin{Umgebung}
+ Text. etc.
+\end{Umgebung}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebungen :
+ document Dokument
+ titlepage Titelseite
+ verbatim 1:1 Text einfügen
+ appendix Anhang
+ abstract für Zusammenfassung
+ thebiliography Literaturverzeichnis
+ theindex Stichwortverzeichnis
+
+(Mathematik)
+ math im Text
+ displaymath gesondert
+ equation gesondert mit Nummer
+ eqnarray Formelgruppen
+ array Tabellen im mathe. Modus
+
+(Aufzaehlungen)
+ enumerate mit Zaehler
+ itemize mit Symbol
+ deskription mit Kürzel
+
+(Gliederung)
+ tabular Tabellen
+ tabbing mit Tabulator
+ minipage als kleine "Seite"
+ samepage kein Seitenumbruch außerhalb von Absätzen
+ sloppypar schlampiger Zeilenumbruch
+ fussypar gründlicher "
+ center zentriert
+ quote rückt links und rechts ein
+ quotation neuer Absatz + "
+ flushright rechtszentriert
+ flushleft linkszentriert
+(Gleitende Objekte)
+ table für Tabellen
+ figure für Bilder
+
+(Bilder)
+ picture mit latex gezeichnete Bilder
+
+(Packet amsmath)
+ split
+ multline
+ gather
+ aline
+ subequation
+ matrix
+ pmatrix
+ bmatrix
+ vmatrix
+ Vmatrix
+ cases
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/bezug.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/bezug.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8870e4b3b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/bezug.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +############################################################
+Literaturverzeichnis ::thebibliography::bibitem::cite::
+############################################################
+\begin{thebibliography}{Muster_Marke}
+ \bibitem[Marke]{Bezug}Eintrag
+ ...
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+(Marke ist optional, andernfalls wird durchgezählt)
+Im Text : \cite{Bezug}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+::nocite::bibliography::
+Mit BibTeX können auch Literaturverzeichnisse erstellt werden.
+\nocite{Bezug1, ...} ist eine Liste der in dieser Weise
+genutzten Bezuege.
+\bibliography{datenbank, ..} gibt die zu nützenden
+Datenbanken an.
+############################################################
+Sonstige Bezuege
+############################################################
+\label{Marke} ::label::
+
+Erstellt Marke.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\ref{Marke} ::ref::
+
+Fügt Position der Marke ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\pageref{Marke} ::pageref::
+
+Fügt Seite der Marke ein.
+
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/copyright_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/copyright_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df07b73c38 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/copyright_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Tcltexed | Version 2.8 | 02. Nov 2006 | Martin Strauss
+::copyright_hlp::
+A plaintexteditor for LaTeX based on scriptlanguage tcl/tk (8.x)
+
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauss
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/counter.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/counter.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c3bf39af0f --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/counter.txt @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +############################################################
+Counter
+############################################################
+Counter besitzen immer ganzzahlige Werte
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\newcounter{Name} ::newcounter::
+\newcounter{Name}[Rücksetzer]
+
+Erstellt Counter "Name".
+Wird Counter Rücksetzer um eins erhöht, fällt
+Counter Name auf Null zurueck.
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\setcounter{Name}{Wert} ::setcounter::
+
+Setzt einen Counter auf einen angegebenen Wert.
+
+default Zähler
+ page laufende Seitennummerierung
+ tocdepth Inhaltsverzeichnisanzeigetiefe (1 chapter 2 section ...)
+ chapter laufende Kapitelnummer, geht analog für (section ..)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stepcounter{Name} ::stepcounter::
+
+Erhöht den Wert von Name um eins
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\value{Name} ::value::
+
+Gibt den Wert von
+############################################################
+Length
+############################################################
+Längen besitzen immer eine Einheit (mm,pt,cm, ...)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\newlength{\Name} ::newlength::
+
+Erstellt Laengenvariable \Name.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\setlength{\Name}{Mass} ::setlength::
+
+Setzt \Name auf Mass.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\addtolength{\Name}{Mass} ::addtolength::
+
+Addiert Mass zu \Name
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\settowidth{\Name}{Text} ::settowidth::
+
+Setzt Name auf die Länge von Text.
+############################################################
+Command
+############################################################
+\newcommand{\Befehl}[n]{Definition} ::newcommand::
+
+Erstellt einen Befehl als Synonym für den Text "Definition",
+mit Benützung von n Übergabewerten.
+z.B.
+\newcommand{\hallo}[1]{Hallo #1}
+im Textfile
+\hallo{mys}
+Ausgabe in Dvifile
+Hallo mys
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\renewcommand{\Befehl}[n]{Definition} ::renewcommand:
+
+Wie oben falls schon ein Befehl unter diesem Namen existiert,
+und dieser umdefiniert werden soll.
+############################################################
+Enviroment ::newenviroment::renewenviroment::
+############################################################
+\newenviroment{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+\newenviroment*{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+
+z.B.
+\newenviroment{tcltk}[1]{\bfseries %i}{\normalfont}
+\begin{tcltk}{Hallo}
+ ...
+\end{tcltk}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\renewenviroment{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
+\renewenviroment*{Name}[n]{begin-Definitionen}{end-Definitionen}
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/documentclass.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/documentclass.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fc698631c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/documentclass.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +############################################################
+Grundform eines Dokumentes unter LaTeX
+############################################################
+\documentclass{Klasse} ::documentclass::
+\documentclass[Optionen]{Klasse}
+
+Bearbeitungsstil des Dokuments
+dieser LaTeX-Befehl ist unverzichtbar.
+auf ihn folgen weitere Deklarationen und mit
+\begin{document} ::document::
+ Text
+\end{document}
+der eigentliche Text.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Klasse
+ book
+ report
+ article
+ letter
+Optionen
+ 10pt (default) setzt Schriftgröße
+ 11pt "
+ 12pt "
+ twoside beidseitiger Druck
+ twocolumn zweispaltig
+ titlepage extra Seite fuer Tittel und Abstrakt
+ leqno linksbuendige Formelnummerierung
+ fleqn linkszentrierte abgesetzte Formeln
+ proc bei Sitzungsprotokollen
+ ifthen latex mit logischen Abfragen
+ a4paper A4 Blattformat
+############################################################
+latex 2.09 :
+\documentstyle[]{} ::documentstyle::
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/editor_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/editor_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ef2a33c971 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/editor_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +############################################################
+#::editor_hlp::
+# Das Editorfenster
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Was ist ein Editorfenster ?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Unter einem Editorfenster verstehe ich Fenster in denen
+unter Tcltexed Texte bearbeitet werden. Jedes Editorfenster
+wird genau einem Text zugeordnet. Sind mehrere Editorfenster
+geöffnet sind zwei Attribute zu vergeben :
+ den Fokus
+ und das für das Hauptdokument
+-----
+Den Fokus besitzt das Editorfenster, das zuletzt im Vordergrund
+gewesen ist. Aktionen außerhalb der Editorfensters, wie zum
+Beispiel das Durchsuchen des Textes, erfolgt stets nur im
+Editorfenster das derzeit den Fokus besitzt. Den Fokus
+kann ein Fenster durch anklicken etc. erhalten.
+-----
+Ist ein Editorfenster als Hauptdokument deklariert, übernimmt
+es für alle anderen Fenster den Aufruf der externen Programme
+latex, xdvi, dvips und ghostview. Im Hauptdokument sollte daher
+immer ein ausführbarer LaTeX-Text sein, während andere
+Editorfenster vermeindlich nur einzubindende Texte enthalten
+können. Ist kein Editorfenster als Hauptdokument deklariert,
+verhaelt sich jedes Editorfenster dahingehend eigenständig.
+-----
+Das Fenster hat folgende Bestandtteile :
+ eine Menuleiste / Popupleiste
+ eine Buttonleiste (Button ~> Druckknopf)
+ und das Eingabefeld.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Funktionen der Buttonleiste
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Von links nach rechts folgen :
+ein "Bild", Save, Save As, latex, xdvi, dvips, ghostview, Syntax, Quit und
+zuletzt eine "Anzeige" Z.S. ?.?.
+-----
+ "Bild"
+Das Bild zeigt an welches Fenster gerade den Fokus hat, und welches,
+wenn überhaupt eines, als Hauptdokument deklariert wurde.
+Das Fenster mit dem Bild das Wellen darstellt ist das Fenster welches
+gerade den Fokus besitzt.
+Das Fenster mit dem farbigen Bild ist das Hauptdokument.
+Ein Editorfenster übernimmt die Funktion des Hauptdokumentes
+durch anklicken des Bildes. Abgestellt wird die Funktion durch
+einen Druck auf das dann farbige Bild.
+-----
+ Save
+Speichert den Text unter der zugeordneten Datei. Ist noch keine
+Datei zugordnet, so wird Save As ausgeführt.
+-----
+ Save As
+Ermöglicht das durchsuchen der Festplatte nach dem zuzuordnenden
+Dateinamen und speichert den Text unter diesem.
+-----
+ latex
+Führt zunächst Save für den aktuellen Text, und nur diesen, aus.
+Dann wird das Programm latex für die zugeordnete Datei ausgeführt.
+Ist einem Fenster das Hauptdokumentattribut vergeben worden, so
+wird dessen Datei stattdessen übergeben.
+latex erstellt eine Datei mit Endung dvi, die Fehlerausgabe
+wird in dem Hilfsfenster ausgegeben. (unix : Bricht latex nicht
+automatisch ab so muß dies von Hand mit der Tastenfolge "q"
+"Return" getan werden.)
+Um das Erstellen von Stichwortverzeichnissen mit den LaTeX-Befehlen
+\makeindex \index etc via dem Programm makeindex zu erleichtern,
+wird dieses Programm automatisch aufgerufen, falls eine entsprechend
+zu bearbeitende Datei (Name.idx) vorhanden ist.
+-----
+ xdvi
+Ruft die von latex zuletzt erstellte Datei mit einem Viewer
+für das dvi Format zur Ansicht auf. ( Du hier angucken können)
+Die Viewer aktualisieren ihre Ansicht, wenn die Datei neu erstellt
+wird.
+-----
+ dvips
+Wandelt die zugehörige dvi-Datei in das Druckerformat gs (ghostscript)
+um und speichert es in einer Datei mit entsprechend zu gs geänderten
+Dateiendung.
+-----
+ ghostview
+Dieses Programm ermöglicht dann die Ansicht des Ergebnisses mit dvips.
+-----
+ ispell
+Führt zunächst Save für den aktuellen Text, und nur diesen, aus.
+Dann wird das Programm ispell, ein Rechtschreibprüfprogramm, für
+die zugeordnete Datei ausgeführt und dessen Ausgabe ins aktuelle
+Fenster übernommen.
+-----
+ Syntax
+Syntax Highlightning, alle mit \ als LaTeX-Befehle erkenntlichen
+Textbereiche bekommen eine Textfarbe in Rot oder Grün, auskommentierte
+Textbereiche bekommen eine Textfarbe in Blau.
+Rot steht für nicht wiedererkannten LaTeX-Befehl,
+Grün für erkannten LaTeX-Befehl,
+Blau für auskommentierten Text.
+Auf Funktionstüchtigkeit wird dabei allerdings nicht geachtet. Zu
+den grün marktierten Befehlen gibt es zumeist Hilfen.
+(Siehe dazu auch Latex-Hilfen)
+-----
+ Quit
+Schließt das Editorfenster mit Rückfrage falls der Text verändert
+jedoch nicht gespeichert wurde.
+-----
+ "Anzeige"
+Wiedergabe der aktüllen Zeile und Spalte in der sich der Curser
+derzeit befindet. Die Anzahl der Zeilen ergibt sich aus der Anzahl
+der "Return"s im Text, nicht aus der der Umbrüche durch zu lange
+Zeilen. Der Button öffnet bei Betätigung ein Fenster mit dem per
+Eingabe die Curserposition verändern kann.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Funktionen der Menuleiste / Popupleiste
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Die Menuleiste existiert nur ab tcl/tk 8.x ist jedoch
+in Funktion der Popupleiste äquivalent.
+Mit Druck auf die rechte Maustaste erscheint die Popupleiste.
+Von oben nach unten (links nach rechts) :
+Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, Block, + % und - %.
+-----
+ Undo
+Revidiert (hoffentlich) die letzte(n) am Text vorgenommene(n)
+Aktion(en). Allerdings werden aus Speicherplatzgründen ältere
+Aktionen vergessen.
+-----
+ Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear
+Bearbeitet den mit Maus selektierten Bereich, ratet mal was da
+passiert ... . Die Aktionen sind Windows und X-Window kompatibel.
+(theoretisch)
+-----
+ Test
+Durchsucht den ganzen Text nach Rechtschreibfehlern und ändert
+deren Farbe in einen Rotton um.
+-----
+ Nearly
+Erstellt eine Liste aller Wörter, die dem Word in dem sich der
+Curser befindet ähnlich sind. Und zeigt sie in einem Fenster.
+-----
+ Block
+Wandelt den selektierten Bereich in einen Blockbereich
+ala Borland um.
+-----
+ + %
+Fügt im selektierten Bereich vor jede Zeile ein % ein, und
+zwar nur wenn dort noch keines existiert.
+-> easy latex auskommentieren
+-----
+ - %
+Eliminiert im selektierten Bereich vor jeder Zeile ein %.
+Es muß dazu wirklich das erste Zeichen der Zeile sein.
+-----
+ ...
+Listet in einem Popup alle möglichen Ergänzung zu einem
+angefangene LaTeX-Befehl. Als zu erkennender Bereich gilt
+der vom letzten \ bis zur Curserposition. Um unnötig lange
+Popups zu vermeiden muß der Bereich länger als ein Buchstabe
+sein. Gelistet werden nur Befehle die unter Optionen aktiviert
+wurden(, wie bei der normalen automatischen Ergänzung auch).
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Funktionen des Eingabefeldes
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+siehe dazu auch die Tastaturbelegung des Editorfensters.
+-----
+ Rechtschreibung
+Um ein Wort als bekannt neu zu registrieren, setzt man den
+Curser auf das schon als unbekannt markierte Wort und macht
+einen Doppelklick mit der linken Maustaste.
+-----
+Ergänzung bekannter LateX-Befehle und eigener Tcltexed-Synonyme.
+\fra ---> \frac{}{}
+\enumerate --->
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item
+ \end{enumerate}
+Ergänzung der Aufklammern.
+{ ---> {}
+$ ---> $$
+-----
+Textverdopplung bei Umgebungseingaben für \begin und \end
+nach Eingabe von :
+\beg --->
+ \begin{}
+ \end{}
+\bege --->
+ \begin{e}
+ \end{e}
+\begenum --->
+ \begin{enum}
+ \end{enum}
+-----
+Wird bei Vorhandensein eines selektierten Bereiches eine
+ein LaTeX-Befehl mit \ begonnen, so wird dieser Bereich nicht
+gelöscht sondern umklammert.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/editort_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/editort_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..24158dfe97 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/editort_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +############################################################
+#::editot_hlp::
+# Tastaturbelegung des Editorfensters
+#
+############################################################
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Fuer Liebhaber von Borland etc Tastenkombinationen :
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Block
+ <Control-k><b> Block Begin
+ <Control-k><k> Block End
+ <Control-k><c> Block Copy
+ <Control-k><m> Block Move
+ <Control-k><v> Block Move
+ <Control-k><y> Block Löschen
+ <Control-k><%> Block Auskommentieren
+ <Control-k><space> Block Auskommentierung aufheben
+Sonstige
+ <F1> Hilfe
+ <F2> Speichern
+ <F3> Datei öffnen
+ <F4> Setzt Textcurser in Sichtbereich
+ <F9> Führe latex aus
+ <Control-k><x> Speichern
+ <Control-k><h> Hilfe
+ <Control-y> Zeile Loeschen
+ <Alt-BackSpace> Undo
+ <Shift-Delete> Cut
+ <Control-Insert> Copy
+ <Shift-Insert> Paste
+ <Control-Delete> Clear
+ <Control-l> Erneute Suche
+ <Alt-x> Beendet dieses Programm vollständig
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Einige von mir :
+ <Control-w> Listet möglicher Ergänzungen eines
+ LaTeX-Befehles.
+ <Control-d> Wenn der Curser sich in einem bekannten
+ LaTeX-Befehl befindet wird der nächste folgende
+ selbe LaTeX-Befehl im Text aufgesucht. Befindet sich
+ der Curser nicht in einem bekannten LaTeX-Befehl
+ wird der nächste Eintrag \section aufgesucht.
+ <Control-u> Wie <Control-d> nur wird im Text vor dem
+ Curser gesucht.
+ Liegt der Curser innerhalb eines als falsch geschrieben
+ markierten Wortes, so bewirkt ein doppelter Tastendruck
+ der linken Maustaste die Registrierung dieses Wortes
+ als bekannt.
+ <Control-b> Zeilenumbruch für einen Absatz
+ <Alt-b> Zeilenumbruch für eine Zeile
+ <Control-B> Umkehr von <Control-b>
+ <Alt-B> Umkehr von <Alt-b>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Da Block, Selektion und Clipboard an sich
+unabhängig voneinander sind :
+ <Control-k><p> Einfügen aus Clipboard
+ <Control-k><g> Kopieren in Clipboard
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Windows - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Maus mit rechter Taste öffnet ein Menu mit den Punkten
+ Cut Textbereich ausschneiden in Clipboard
+ Copy Textbereich kopieren in Clipboard
+ Paste Einfügen aus Clipboard
+ Clear Textbereich löschen
+ Block Textbereich zu Block umformatieren
+ + % Textbereich auskommentieren
+ - % Auskommentierung aufheben
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Motif - Standart
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Maus mit linker Taste (1)
+ einfach Selektion aufheben
+ zweifach Das angeklickte Wort selektieren
+ dreifach Die angeklickte Zeile selektieren
+ Shift-einfach Bereich der Selektion verändern
+ Shift-zweifach Selektion auf ganze Worte ergänzen
+ Shift-dreifach Selektion auf ganze Zeilen ergänzen
+ Control Curser umsetzen ohne Verlust der Selektion
+Cursertasten (CT)
+ <Shift-CT> Bereich selektieren (Buchstaben/Zeilen)
+ <Control-CT> Curser um ganze Worte/Absätze verschieben
+ <Shift-Control-CT> Bereich selektieren (Worte/Absätze)
+[Up,Down] Seite rauf runter (ST)
+ <Shift-ST> Bereich selektieren (Seiten)
+ (<Control-ST> Seitenscrolling horizontal)
+[Home,End] Zeile Anfang Ende (ZT)
+ <Shift-ZT> Bereich selektieren (bis Zeileanfang/-ende)
+ <Control-ZT> Curser an Textanfang/-Ende verschieben
+ <Shift-Control-ZT> Bereich selektieren (bis Textanfang/-ende)
+sonstige
+ <Shift-slash> Gesamten Text selektieren
+ <Insert> Selektion einfügen
+
+Die rechte Maustaste ist anders als üblich belegt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+emacs-like
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ <Control-a> = Home
+ <Control-b> = Left
+ (<Control-d> wurde umbesetzt)
+ <Control-e> = End
+ <Control-f> = Right
+ (<Control-k> wurde umbesetzt)
+ <Control-n> = Up
+ <Control-o> = Return+Left
+ <Control-p> = Down
+ <Control-t>
+ <Control-v> = Page up
+ <Meta-b>
+ <Meta-d>
+ <Meta-f>
+ <Meta-less> Curser an Text Anfang
+ <Meta-greater> Curser an Text Anfang
+ <Meta-Backspace>
+ <Meta-Delete>
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/epsf.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/epsf.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c5fda2fce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/epsf.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +############################################################
+Packet epsf
+############################################################
+\usepackage{epsf} ::epsf::
+\epsfxsize ::epsfxsize::
+\epsfbox{} ::epsfbox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Die genaue Bedeutung der Befehle ist mir unbekannt, es
+handelt sich hier um eine Umgebung mittels der man Bilder
+im Format eps einbinden kann.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Ich empfehle aber dafür auf das latex2e Packet graphicx
+zurückzugreifen. Ich habe gute Erfahrungen mit ihm gemacht.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/format.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/format.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fe079cc677 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/format.txt @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +############################################################
+Schriftgrössen
+############################################################
+In Abfolge :
+\tiny ::tiny::
+\scriptsize ::scriptsize::
+\footnotesize ::footnotesize::
+\small ::small::
+\normalsize ::normalsize::
+\large ::large::
+\Large ::Large::
+\LARGE ::LARGE::
+\huge ::huge::
+\Huge ::Huge::
+
+############################################################
+Schriftarten
+############################################################
+latex2e :
+\bfseries Boldface Series ::bfseries::
+\mdseries Standart Series ::mdseries::
+\itshape Italic Shape ::itshape::
+\upshape Standart Shape ::upshape::
+\scshape SMALL CAPS Shape ::scshape::
+\slshape Slanted Shape ::slshape::
+\rmfamily Roman Family ::rmfamily::
+\sffamily Sans Serif Family ::sffamily::
+\ttfamily Typewriter Family ::ttfamily::
+latex 2.0.9 :
+\bf Boldface ::bf::
+\it Italic ::it::
+\rm Roman ::rm::
+\em Emphasize ::em::
+\sc SMALL CAPS ::sc::
+\sl Slanted ::sl::
+\sf Sans Serif ::sf::
+\tt Typewriter ::tt::
+############################################################
+Schriftorientierung
+############################################################
+Umgebung center ::center::
+\begin{center}
+ Text
+\end{center}
+
+Zentriert den eingeschlossen Text
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\centering ::centering::
+
+Zentriert den folgenden Text
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung quote ::quote::
+\begin{quote}
+ Text
+\end{quote}
+
+Text wird links und rechts eingerückt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung quotation ::quotation::
+\begin{quotation}
+ Text
+\end{quotation}
+
+Text wird links und rechts eingerückt, ein neuer
+Absatz begonnen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung flushleft ::flushleft::
+\begin{flushleft}
+ Text
+\end{flushleft}
+
+Text, links zentriert
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung flushright ::flushright::
+\begin{flushright}
+ Text
+\end{flushright}
+
+Text, rechts zentriert
+############################################################
+Schriftsilben
+############################################################
+\dicretionary{vor}{nach}{ohne} ::dicretionary::
+
+Steuert Zeilenumbruch in Wörtern, wenn sich die Buchstaben
+ändern.
+"ohne" gibt den Bereich ohne Umbruch wieder,
+"vor" den Anfang bei Umbruch,
+"nach" das Ende bei Umbruch an dieser Stelle.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\hypentation{Bei-spiel Hal-lo} ::hypentation::
+
+Eine Liste von Trennungshilfen, die für den restlichen Text
+beachtet werden.
+############################################################
+Seite
+############################################################
+\clearpage ::clearpage::
+
+Beendet laufende Seite, gleitende Objekte folgen auf eigenen
+Seiten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\cleardoublepage ::cleardoublepage::
+
+" , fuer Doppelseiten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\newpage ::newpage::
+
+Erzwingt eine neue Seite.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung samepage ::samepage::
+
+Verbietet den Seitenumbruch außerhalb der Absätze.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\pagebreak[n] ::pagebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier eine neue Seite zu beginnen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\nopagebreak[n] ::nopagebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier keine neue Seite zu beginnen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+############################################################
+Zeile
+############################################################
+\linebreak[n] ::linebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier umzubrechen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\nolinebreak[n] ::nolinebreak::
+
+Empfehlung hier nicht umzubrechen.
+n (0-4) entspricht der Dringlichkeit.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sloppy ::sloppy::
+oder als Umgebung sloppypar
+
+Um die Zeilen stets gleichlang zu halten wird in Wörter am
+Zeilenende gebrochen, um lange Abstaende zwischen Wörtern
+zu vermeiden.
+\sloppy bewirkt ein schlampigeres Umgehen mit diesem
+Vorgang, man riskiert grössere Abstände zwischen den Worten
+im diese ganz lassen zu koennen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\fussy ::fussy::
+oder als Umgebung fussypar
+
+Gegenteil zu \sloppy (default)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+############################################################
+Leerräume steuern,füllen
+############################################################
+\dotfill ::dotfill::
+
+Füllt eine Bereich horizontal mit Punkten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\hrulefill ::hrulefill::
+
+Füllt einen Bereich horizontal mit einem Strich.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\fill ::fill::
+
+Die Abstände zwischen Absätzen werden bei LaTeX automatisch
+je nach Textmenge und Leerraum auf der Seite gesetzt.
+Mit diesem Befehl wird erzwungen, das hier der überschüssige
+Raum eingefügt werden soll.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stretch{Dezimalzahl} ::strech::
+
+Eine Länge als vielfaches von \fill.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\hspace{Länge} ::hspace::
+\hspace*{Länge}
+
+Fuegt horizontalen Abstand ein.
+\hfill entspricht \hspace*{\fill}.
+* wird am Textanfang/-ende nicht ignoriert.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\vspace{Länge} ::vspace::
+
+Fuegt vertikalen Abstand ein.
+\vfill entspricht \vspace*{\fill}.
+* wird am Textanfang/-ende nicht ignoriert.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\indent ::indent::
+
+Die erste Zeile des nächsten Absatzes wird eingerückt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\noindent ::noindent::
+
+Die erste Zeile des nächsten Absatzes wird nicht eingerückt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\quad ::quad::qquad::
+\qquad (entspricht \quad\quad)
+
+Horizontaler absoluter Abstand von 1em
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/gleit.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/gleit.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2d065920f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/gleit.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +############################################################
+Gleitende Tabellen und Bilder ::figure::table::
+############################################################
+\begin{figure}[pos] Bild \end{figure}
+\begin{figure*}[pos] Bild \end{figure*}
+\begin{table}[pos] Tabelle \end{table}
+\begin{table*}[pos] Tabelle \end{table*}
+
+
+(mit *) Nur bei zweispaltigen Dokumenten, beide Spalten
+werden zur Verfügung gestellt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Parameter pos
+ h here (im Text)
+ t top (Seitenbeginn)
+ b bottom (Seitenende)
+ p page (eigene Seite mit allen Tabellen, etc.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Stilparameter:
+ Begrenzungsanzahlen für Gleitende Objekte :
+ topnummer
+ bottomnumber
+ totalnumber
+ dbltopnumber (doublepage)
+Zu setzen via \setcounter{}{}
+::topfraction::bottomfraction::textfraction::
+::dbtopfraction::floatpagefraction::dbfloatpagefraction::
+Bruchteile (0.0-1.0), min. max. gleitender Objekte auf
+einer Seite :
+ \topfraction max am Seitenanfang
+ \bottomfraction max am Seitenende
+ \textfraction max im Text
+ \dbtopfraction max am Seitenanfang , doublepage
+ \floatpagefraction min einer gesonderten Seite
+ \dbfloatpagefraction " , auf doublepage
+Zu setzen via \renewcommand{}{}
+::floatsep::textfloatsep::intextsep::dbfloatsep::
+::dbtextfloatsep::
+Abstände zwischen :
+ \floatsep Objekten
+ \textfloatsep Text und Objekt am Seitenanfang/ende
+ \intextsep Objekt und Textrand, im Text
+ \dbfloatsep entspr. bei doublepage
+ \dbtextfloatsep "
+Zu setzen via \setcounter{}{}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\caption[Kurzform fuer Verzeichnis]{Text} ::caption::
+
+Erzeugt Überschrift bzw Unterschrift
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/gpl_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/gpl_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e04861aa1d --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/gpl_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +GNU General Public License - GNU Project - Free Software Foundation (FSF)
+::gpl_hlp::
+Table of Contents
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+
+Preamble
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE | Version 2, June 1991
+
+Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+0.
+ This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+
+1.
+ You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+
+2.
+ You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+
+2.a)
+ You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+
+2.b)
+ You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+
+2.c)
+ If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+
+3.
+ You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+
+3.a)
+ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.b)
+ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+
+3.c)
+ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+
+4.
+ You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+5.
+ You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+
+6.
+ Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+
+7.
+ If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+
+8.
+ If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+
+9.
+ The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+
+10.
+ If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+NO WARRANTY
+
+
+11.
+ BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+
+12.
+ IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+
+
+How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+- one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does. -
+Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19xx - name of author -
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+
+
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and
+`show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever
+suits your program.
+
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+
+A copy of
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+
+GNU's home page
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html
+
+FSF & GNU inquiries & questions to
+gnu@gnu.org"
+Other ways to contact
+http://www.gnu.org/home.html#ContactInfo
+
+Copyright notice above.
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA
+
+Updated:
+16 Feb 1998 tower
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/graphics.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/graphics.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0aecc460df --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/graphics.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +############################################################
+Einarbeitung grafischer Elemente ::grafics::
+############################################################
+Package graphics
+\usepackage[Treiber]{graphics}
+
+siehe auch in grfguide.dvi wenn vorhanden
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Treiber
+ dvips ps eps
+ xdvi ps eps
+ dviwin ps eps pcx bmp
+############################################################
+Grafik einbinden ::includegraphics::
+############################################################
+\includegraphics{Bild}
+\includegraphics[Breite,Höhe]{Bild}
+\includegraphics*[Breite,Höhe]{Bild}
+
+Baut Bild in den Kontext ein. * bewirkt das Ausschneiden des
+benützten Bildbereiches. Anderenfalls ragt das Bild über
+den restlichen Bereich hinaus. Empfehlenswert ist es diesen
+Befehl mit der figure Umgebung in den Text einzugliedern.
+Einseitig umflossenen Text kann man mit dem latex-packet picins
+erreichen, oder mit "\parbox"en erzwingen.
+############################################################
+Objektmanipulation
+############################################################
+\scalebox{Faktor}{Text etc} ::scalebox::
+Textskalierung
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\resizebox{Breite}{H÷he}{Text etc} ::resizebox::
+Anderes Format
+Breite = ! -> Breite skaliert
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\rotatebox{GradWinkel}{Text etc} ::rotatebox::
+Drehung der Ausgabe
+############################################################
+generelle Deklerationen, etc.
+############################################################
+\ExecuteOptions{OPTION} ::ExecuteOptions::
+
+Setzen von Optionen. Dazu gehören einerseits die Treiber
+andererseits :
+ draft Setzt Rahmen anstatt der Bilder ein -> schnellerer
+ Aufbau des Bildes
+ final Gegenteil zu draft
+ hiderotate Versteckt rotierte Objekte
+ hidescale Versteckt scalierte Objekte
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\graphicspath{path-liste} ::graphicspath::
+
+Setzt den Suchpfad fuer graphics-Objekte. Ein Beispiel für
+unix :
+\graphicspath{{/home/mys/}{pictures}}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{ps,eps,gif}
+::DeclareGraphicsExtentions::
+Ergaenzt Bildnamen um diese Endungen um zu den korrekten
+Dateinamen zu erhalten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{ext}{type}{readfile}{command}
+::DeclareGraphicsRule::
+Dateien mit Endung ext werden als Dateien des Types type verstanden
+(z.B. als eps ps gif ..) aus der Datei mit Endung readfile werden
+gegebenenfalls die Boundigbox - Werte eingelesen, und vor Einbau
+wird command ausgefuehrt.
+z.B.
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{´zcat #1}
+ermöglicht das verwenden gepackter Bilder.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/graphicx.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/graphicx.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c7074048ac --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/graphicx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +############################################################
+Einarbeitung grafischer Elemente ::graficx::
+############################################################
+Package graphicx
+\usepackage[Treiber]{graphicx}
+
+siehe auch in grfguide.dvi wenn vorhanden
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Treiber
+ dvips ps eps
+ xdvi ps eps
+ dviwin ps eps pcx bmp
+############################################################
+Grafik einbinden ::includegraphics::
+############################################################
+\includegraphics[Optionslist]{Bild}
+
+Komma separierte Optionen Liste z.B width=1,height=1
+Options :
+ bb Bonding Box,z.B ( = 1 1 100 200)
+ viewport wie bb relativ zur vorhandenen Bonding Box
+ angle Drehwinkel
+ width Skalierung auf diese Breite
+ height Skalierung auf diese Höhe
+ totalheight Skalierung unter Berücksichtigung einer
+ Drehung
+ keepaspectratio Beibehalten der orginalen Seiten-
+ verhältnisse (true,false)
+ scale Skalierung
+ clip Ausschneiden des Bereiches ?
+ type Datentyp der verwandten Datei (z.B. eps)
+gefolgt von type :
+ ext Endung der Datei (sofern noch nicht vorgegeben)
+ read Endung der Datei mit der Bondig Box Information
+ command Auszuführender Befehl
+############################################################
+Objektmanipulation
+############################################################
+\scalebox{Faktor}{Text etc} ::scalebox::
+Textskalierung
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\resizebox{Breite}{H÷he}{Text etc} ::resizebox::
+Anderes Format
+Breite = ! -> Breite skaliert
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\rotatebox[Optionslist]{Winkel}{Text etc} ::rotatebox::
+
+Drehung der Ausgabe
+ origin Rotationszentrum beschrieben durch ein oder zwei
+ der folgenden Zeichen
+ c bildzentriert
+ r right
+ l left
+ b buttom
+ B baseline
+ x x-Koordinate des Rot.
+ y y-Koordinate des Rot.
+ units Was ist zu 360 Grad äquivalent ?
+############################################################
+generelle Deklerationen, etc.
+############################################################
+\ExecuteOptions{OPTION} ::ExecuteOptions::
+
+Setzen von Optionen. Dazu gehören einerseits die Treiber
+andererseits :
+ draft Setzt Rahmen anstatt der Bilder ein -> schnellerer
+ Aufbau des Bildes
+ final Gegenteil zu draft
+ hiderotate Versteckt rotierte Objekte
+ hidescale Versteckt scalierte Objekte
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\graphicspath{path-liste} ::graphicspath::
+
+Setzt den Suchpfad fuer graphics-Objekte. Ein Beispiel fuer
+unix :
+\graphicspath{{/home/mys/}{pictures}}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{ps,eps,gif}
+::DeclareGraphicsExtensions::
+Ergänzt Bildnamen um diese Endungen um zu den korrekten
+Dateinamen zu erhalten.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{ext}{type}{readfile}{command}
+::DeclareGraphicsRule::
+Dateien mit Endung ext werden als Dateien des Types type verstanden
+(z.B. als eps ps gif ..) aus der Datei mit Endung readfile werden
+gegebenenfalls die Boundigbox - Werte eingelesen, und vor Einbau
+wird command ausgefuehrt.
+z.B.
+\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{´zcat #1}
+ermöglicht das verwenden gepackter Bilder.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/if.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/if.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d9e3699fb --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/if.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +############################################################
+Bedingungen ::ifthenelse::whiledo::equal::not::and::or::
+############################################################
+\ifthenelse{test}{wenn_zweig}{sonstzweig}
+\whiledo{test}{schleifentext}
+
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Abfragebedingungen:
+1. \equal{String1}{String2}
+Ist String1 gleich String2 so ist das Ergebnis wahr.
+(Für Zeichenketten)
+2. n1 < n2
+ n1 = n2
+ n1 > n2
+(Für Zahlen)
+3. \{ test \}
+Klammern für Teiltest
+3.a \not test
+3.b \and test
+3.d \or test
+Als Verknüpfungen von Teiltests
+
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/index.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9699eba838 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +############################################################
+Überschriften
+############################################################
+Folgende Befehle erzeugen Überschriften in folgender
+Hierarchie : ::part::chapter::section::subsection::
+::subsubsection::paragraph::subparagraph::
+\part{Text} Einteilung eines Buches
+\chapter{Text} Kapitel
+\section{Text}
+\subsection{Text}
+\subsubsection{Text}
+\paragraph{Text}
+\subparagraph{Text}
+
+Text entspricht der jeweiligen Überschrift.
+Wird ein * hinter den Befehl gesetzt so wird der entsprechende
+Eintrag nicht ins Inhaltsverzeichnis uebernommen.
+############################################################
+Aufzaehlungen
+############################################################
+\begin{enumerate} ::enumerate::item::
+ \item Text
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Zaehlt die Eintraege durch.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{itemize} ::itemize::
+ \item Text
+\end{itemize}
+
+Stellt ein Symbol vor jeden Eintrag.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{description} ::discription::
+ \item[Kurzform] Text
+\end{description}
+
+Stellt die Kurzform fett gedruckt vor den jeweiligen Eintrag
+############################################################
+Anhang
+############################################################
+Umgebung :
+\begin{appendix} ::appendix::
+\end{appendix}
+
+Erzeugt einen Bereich der mit allen seinen Kapiteln etc.
+als Anhang interpretiert wird.
+############################################################
+Stichwortverzeichnis
+############################################################
+Umgebung :
+\begin{theindex} ::theindex::
+ \item haupt_eintrag
+ \subitem eingerückter sub_eintrag ::subitem::subsubitem::
+ \subsubitem noch weiter eingerueckt der subsub_eintrag
+ \indexspace % erzeugt Leerzeile ::indexspace::
+\end{theindex}
+
+Dient der Erstellung von Inhaltsverzeichnissen.
+Dies muß immer noch von Hand geschehen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Eine automatische Indexerstellung erreicht man folgender Weise :
+Package :
+\usepackage{makeidx} ::makeidx::
+Im Vorspann des Dokumentes trägt man den Befehl
+\makeindex ::makeindex::
+ein. Im flüssigen Text folgen dann Einträge der Form
+\index{haupt_eintrag}
+ setzt einen Haupteintrag
+\index{haupt_eintrag!sub_eintrag}
+ setzt unter Haupteintrag einen untergeordneten
+\index{haupt_eintrag!sub_eintrag!subsub_eintrag}
+ ...
+\index{haupt_eintrag|(}
+Weiterer Text des Dokuments
+\index{haupt_eintrag|)}
+ bewirkt eine von n bis m Angabe, statt der sonst
+ üblichen Seitenangabe.
+\index{haupt_eintrag|see{anderer Haupteintrag}}
+ erstellt einen Querverweis.
+\index{haupt_eintrag|uu}
+ erzeugt eine unterstrichene Seitenzahl.
+Diese Einträge werden in der Datei mit Endung idx gespeichert.
+Mit Aufruf des Programmes "makeindex" wird dann das
+Verzeichnis erstellt. (makeindex text.idx)
+(tcltexed startet makeindex automatisch bei Aufruf von latex,
+ das Resultat wird jedoch erst beim zweiten Durchgang
+berücksichtigt)
+
+An der Stelle an des Befehls
+\printindex ::printindex::
+im Dokument wird dann beim nächsten mal das
+Stichwortverzeichnis eingefügt.
+
+############################################################
+Erstellung und Manipulation der gängigen Verzeichnisse
+############################################################
+
+Syntax :
+\tableofcontents ::tableofcontents::
+
+Erstellt das Inhaltverzeichnis
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\listoffigures ::listofffigures::
+
+Erstellt Liste aller figures
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax :
+\listoftables ::listoftables::
+
+Erstellt Liste aller table
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::addcontentsline::
+\addcontentsline{Art}{Format}{Text}
+
+Schiebt zusätzlichen Eintrag ein.
+
+Art
+ toc für "table of contents"
+ lof für "list of figures"
+ lot für "list of tables"
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Syntax : ::addtocontents::
+ \addtocontents{Art}{Text}
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/input.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/input.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5920a47fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/input.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +############################################################
+Dateien einbinden
+############################################################
+\input{file} ::input::
+
+Fügt 1:1 in Text ein vor Compilierung
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\include{file} ::include::
+
+Wird getrennt abgearbeitet, und dann eingefügt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\includeonly{file1,file2,...,filen} ::includeonly::
+
+Nur files dieser Liste werden wirklich eingefügt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stepcounter{Name} ::stepcounter::
+
+Erhöht den Wert von Name um eins
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\value{Name} ::value::
+
+Gibt den Wert von
+############################################################
+Bildschirm/Kommandozeile
+############################################################
+\typeout{Nachricht} ::typeout::
+
+Gibt beim Compilieren die Nachricht aus.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\typein{Nachricht} ::typein::
+
+Fügt an der Stelle des Auftauchens, nach Ausgabe der
+Nachricht, den eingegeben Text ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\typein[\Befehl]{Nachricht}
+
+ " , aber setzt Befehl auf den eingegeben Text.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/latexbox.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/latexbox.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..93b1918e35 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/latexbox.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +############################################################
+Boxen / Rahmen
+############################################################
+Übergabeparameter pos :
+ t top
+ b bottom
+ l left
+ r right
+Doppelnennungen sind zum teil möglich.
+############################################################
+unter latex allgemein :
+
+Identisch wie unter Umgebung picture, wenn man die
+Koordinatenangaben nebst Klammern weg läßt
+
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\rule{Breite}{Hoehe}{Text} ::rule::
+\rule[lift]{Breite}{Hoehe}{Text}
+
+Schwarzer Balken um lift über der Grundlinie mit (Breite.Höhe)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Umgebung minipage ::minipage::
+\begin{minipage}[pos]{Breite}
+\end{minipage}
+oder
+\parbox[pos]{Breite}{Text} ::parbox::
+
+Absatzboxen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Parameter
+::fboxrule::fboxsep::
+\fboxrule Breite der Rahmenlinien
+\fboxsep Leerraum zwischen Rahmen und Text
+############################################################
+Boxen / Rahmen unter der Umgebung picture
+(siehe auch unter picture)
+############################################################
+\makebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::makebox::
+ohne Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\framebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::framebox::
+mit durchgezogenem Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\dashbox{Strichlänge}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::dashbox::
+mit gestricheltem Rahmen,
+
+############################################################
+Bildkompositionen im Arbeitsspeicher unter der Umgebung picture
+############################################################
+Erstellt neuen Namen fuer Bildteil
+\newsavebox{\Name} ::newsavebox::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\savebox{\Name}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::savebox::
+Erstellt neue Komposition unter \Name mit Breite x ,Hoehe y und
+Ansatzpunkt pos
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\usebox{\Name} ::usebox::
+Nutzt erstellte Kompositionen
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/math.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/math.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7e7b67fb9c --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/math.txt @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +############################################################
+Mathematische Umgebung
+############################################################
+\begin{math} ::math::
+ ...
+\end{math}
+
+oder kürzer
+$ ... $ ::$::
+
+Formeln flüssig im Text.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{displaymath} ::displaymath::
+ ...
+\end{displaymath}
+
+oder kuerzer
+\[ ... \] ::\[::
+::\]::
+
+Formeln abgesetzt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{equation} ::equation::
+\end{equation}
+
+Formeln durchnummeriert.
+############################################################
+Mathematische Befehle
+############################################################
+{Teil_1 \atop Teil_2} ::atop::
+
+Setzt Teil_1 ueber Teil_2.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+{Teil_1 \choose Teil_2} ::choose::
+
+Setzt Teil_1 über Teil_2 und klammert das Ergebnis ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Mit \nolimits wird bei folgenden Befehlen, dass Dahinterstellen
+der Grenzen im $$-Modus unterdrückt : ::nolimits::
+\sum Summenzeichen ::sum::
+\int Integralzeichen ::int::
+\oint Kreisintegralzeichen ::oint::
+\prod Produktzeichen ::prod::
+
+\coprod ::coprod::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\frac{Zähler}{Nenner} ::frac::
+
+Bruch
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\sqrt{} ::sqrt::
+\sqrt[n]{}
+
+Quadrat - bzw n.te - wurzel von ...
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\nonumber ::nonumber::
+
+Stellt die Durchnummerierung aller Gleichungen ab.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\left? \right? ::left::right::
+mit ? aus "" "(" ")" "[" "]" "|" "|" "\{" "\}"
+
+Klammert einen Bereich einer Gleichung und passt sich in
+der Grösse an.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\stackrel{oben}{unten} ::stackrel::
+
+Schiebt verkleinert "oben" über "unten".
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\pmod{a+b} ::pmod::
+
+erzeugt : (mod a + b)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\text{ ... } ::text::
+
+normaler Text eingeschoben in mathematischen Formeln
+############################################################
+nur mit Bildern :
+############################################################
+griechisches Alphabet :
+
+\alpha \beta \gamma \delta \epsilon \varepsilon \zeta \eta
+\theta \vartheta \iota \kappa \lambda \mu \nu \xi \pi \varpi
+\rho \varrho \sigma \varsigma \tau \upsilon \phi \varphi \chi
+\psi \omega
+\Gamma \Delta \Theta \Lambda \Xi \Pi \Sigma \Upsilon \Phi
+\Omega
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Punkt(e) vertikal horizontal ..
+
+\cdot \vdots \ldots
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Pfeile :
+
+\leftarrow \rightarrow \uparrow \downarrow
+\leftrightarrow \updownarrow
+\leftharpoonup \rightharpoonup
+\leftharpoondown \rightharpoondown \rightleftharpoons
+\hookleftarrow \hookrightarrow
+\mapsto
+\nwarrow \nearrow \swarrow \searrow
+\longleftarrow \longrightarrow \longleftrightarrow
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Doppelte Pfeile :
+
+\Longleftrightarrow
+\Leftarrow \Rightarrow \Uparrow \Downarrow
+\Longleftarrow \Longrightarrow
+\Leftrightarrow \Updownarrow
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Bekannte Funktionen :
+
+\arccos \arcsin \arctan \arg \cos \cosh \cot \coth \csc \deg
+\det \dim \exp \gcd \hom \inf \ker \lg \lim \liminf \limsub
+\ln \log \max \min \Pr \sec \sin \sinh \sup \tan \tanh
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\imath \jmath
+
+fuer Vektoren gedacht um sich den Punkt unter dem
+Vektorpfeil zu sparen.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+haefig genutzt :
+
+\pm \mp plus/minus minus/plus
+\hbar Physiker lieben h-quer
+\nabla Nabla
+\partial Bei partiellen Differentialen
+\prime Ableitungsstrich (?)
+\Re Realteil
+\Im Imaginaerteil
+\infty Unendlichzeichen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Diverse Striche und Klammern ...
+ \hat{} \breve{} \grave{} \bar{} \dot{}
+ \check{} \acute{} \tilde{} \vec{} \ddot{}
+ \overline{} \overbrace{} \widehat{}
+ \underline{} \underbrace{} \widetilde{}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+\times \otimes
+\div \ast \dagger \ddagger \amalg \cap \cup
+\uplus \sqcap \sqcup \vee \wedge \setminus \wr \circ \bullet
+\oslash \odot
+\bigcirc \bigtriangleup \bigtriangledown
+\oplus \ominus
+
+\le \ge \models \ll \gg \neq \subset \supset \doteq
+\subseteq \supseteq \approx \sqsubseteq \sqsupseteq \cong
+\in \ni \equiv \vdash \dashv \perp \smile \frown \parallel
+\prec \succ \sim \preceq \succeq \simeq \asymp \bowtie \mid
+
+
+\aleph \wp
+
+\ell \sonder_strich
+\top \bot \surd \neg \exists \forall \emptyset
+\natural \sharp \flat \angle \backslash \clubsuit \diamondsuit \spadesuit \heartsuit \triangle \mod
+
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/notiz.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/notiz.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..03db16b816 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/notiz.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +############################################################
+Fußnoten
+############################################################
+\footnote{Text} ::footnote::
+\footnote[Nummer]{Text}
+
+Im flüssigen Text erscheint eine Nummer, unter dem Text
+die Fußnote. Mit angegebener Nummer muß das Mitzählen des
+Counters via \addtocounter{footnote}{Anzahl} selbst nachgeholt
+werden.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\footnoterule ::footnoterule::
+
+Linie zwischen Fußnote und Seitentext.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\footnotemark ::footnotemark::
+\footnotetext{Text} ::footnotetext::
+\footnotemark[Nummer]
+\footnotetext[Nummer]{Text}
+
+Setzt Marke in Tabellen, Boxen etc. .
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Stilparameter : ::footnotesep::
+\footnotesep vert. Abstand Fußnoten
+############################################################
+Randnotiz
+############################################################
+\marginpar{Text} ::marginpar::
+
+Text am Seitenrand
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Parameter sind extra als Seitenparameter beschrieben.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/pagenumbering.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/pagenumbering.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1613938576 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/pagenumbering.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +Syntax :
+\pagenumbering{num_stil} ::pagenumbering::
+
+Einstellung des Stils der Seitennummerierung.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+num_stil
+ arabic (default)
+ roman roemisch klein
+ Roman roemisch gross
+ alph Alphabet klein
+ Alph Alphabet gross
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/pagestyle.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/pagestyle.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..241df73d17 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/pagestyle.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +Syntax :
+\pagestyle{Stil} ::pagestyle::
+
+Legt einen Stil für den generellen Seitenaufbau fest
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Stil
+ plain (default) mit Seitennummer als Fußzeile
+ empty keine Kopf oder Fußzeile
+ headings Seitennummer im Kopf + Ueberschrift Information
+#########################################################
+Syntax :
+\thispagestyle{Stile} ::thispagestyle::
+
+Wie oben jedoch nur für die aktuelle Seite
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/picture.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/picture.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..06bb0ad8eb --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/picture.txt @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +Umgebung picture ::picture::
+\begin{picture}(x,y)
+\end{picture}
+
+Erzeugt eine Bildumgebung mit Grösse (x Breite,y Höhe)
+############################################################
+Parameter : ::unitlength::
+ \unitlength Äquivalent fuer eine Längeneinheit
+Linienbreite ::thicklines:thinlines::linethickness::
+ \thicklines Dicke Linien
+ \thinlines Dünne Linien
+ \linethickness{Breite} Nutzung einer angegebene Linienbreite
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Übergabeparameter pos :
+ t top
+ b bottom
+ l left
+ r right
+Doppelnennungen sind möglich.
+############################################################
+Positionierung von Bildelementen (immer zu verwenden)
+############################################################
+\put(x,y){Text} ::put::
+
+Setzt "Text" auf die Koordinaten (x,y)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\multiput(x1,y1)(x2,y2){N}{Text} ::multiput::
+
+Setzt "Text" N mal zwischen den Koordinaten (x1,y1) und (x2,y2)
+############################################################
+Boxen / Rahmen
+############################################################
+\makebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::makebox::
+
+ohne Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\framebox(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::framebox::
+
+mit durchgezogenem Rahmen
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\dashbox{Strichlänge}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::dashbox::
+
+mit gestricheltem Rahmen,
+############################################################
+Geometrische Formen
+############################################################
+\line(x,y){Text} ::line::
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\vector(x,y){Text} ::vector::
+
+Pfeil
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\circle{Radius} ::circle::
+
+Kreis
+\circle*{Radius}
+
+gefüllter Kreis
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\oval(x,y) ::oval::
+
+Rechteck mit maximal abgerundeten Seiten
+
+\oval(x,y)[pos]
+
+bzw. ein Teil davon. pos gibt an welcher Teil gezeichnet werden
+soll.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\bezier{N}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3) ::bezier::
+
+Agerundeter Winkel mit (x2,y2) als Zentrum. Dabei werden
+N Punkte gezeichnet
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\shortstack[pos2]{Text1\\Text2\\...} ::shortstack::
+
+Stellt Text1 über Text2 ueber ... zentriert wird dabei
+(pos2) l left r right oder c center.
+############################################################
+Bildkompositionen im Arbeitsspeicher
+############################################################
+\newsavebox{\Name} ::newsavebox::
+
+Erstellt neuen Namen fuer Bildteil
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\savebox{\Name}(x,y)[pos]{Text} ::savebox::
+
+Erstellt neue Komposition unter \Name mit Breite x ,Hoehe y und
+Ansatzpunkt pos
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\usebox{\Name} ::usebox::
+
+Nutzt erstellte Kompositionen
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/readme_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/readme_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..04165831cc --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/readme_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +Tcltexed | Version 2.8 | 02. Nov 2006 | Martin Strauß
+::readme_hlp::
+Copyright (C) 1999 Martin Strauß
+
+
+ Tcltexed ein LaTeX-Editor
+
+ !!! Achtung, dieses Programm ist noch unter Konstruktion !!!!
+ Ich habe inzwischen so einiges an Text bearbeitet mit diesem Programm,
+ aber für den Fall der Fälle ... alle gefundenen Fehler bitte an mich weiterleiten.
+ Am besten per email : mys@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+
+ kurze Anleitung :
+ Die systematische Beschreibung ist unter "Help" "Tcltexed" zu finden.
+ Auf jedenfall lohnt es sich ab und zu mal <F1> zu drücken.
+ Für jeden bekannten Latexbefehle gibt es eine kurze Beschreibung !!!
+ Der Tastatursatz ist an den von Motiv, emacs und joe / Borland Pascal
+ angelehnt. Zuzüglich eigener Tastenkombinationen.
+ Ist ein Editorfenster geöffnet so gibt es links oben ein Bildchen.
+ Das Fenster mit dem farbigen Bild (mit Maus draufdrücken) ist das
+ Hauptdokument.
+ Drückt man auf ein Bild in der mathematischen Sammlung sollte der
+ passende Befehl automatisch ins aktuelle Editorfenster eingefügt werden.
+ Aktuelles Fenster -> Fenster mit dem Bild mit Ringen.
+ Gibt man einen latex-Befehl ein, so versucht tcltexed diesen zu erkennen
+ und gegebenenfalls abzuschliessen. (z.B. wird \ga zu \gamma korrigiert)
+ Unter Optionen findet man die Möglichkeit dieses Verhalten abzustellen.
+ Die Leiste oben im Editorfenster dient dem direkten Aufruf der Programme
+ die da draufstehen.
+
+ Rein prinzipiell ist dieses Programm unter unix, linux, Win95 WinNT etc
+ lauffähig. (Falls einer das Program für nen Mac haben will, sollte er/sie
+ sich bei mir melden). Man benötigt hierzu die Scriptsprache Tcl/Tk die es
+ kostenlos im Internet gibt.
+ ... es liegt im Netz !!!! Näheres unter :
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
+
+ Frage ? Fehler gefunden ? Ideen fuer die Zukunft ? Sonstiges
+ bitte an mich schreiben :
+
+ Martin Strauss
+ mys@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de
+ http://wwwcip.rus.uni-stuttgart.de/~phy10932/index.html
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/sonder.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/sonder.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7ac5f90093 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/sonder.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +############################################################
+Sonderbares
+############################################################
+\today ::today::
+
+Fügt Datum der Erstellung mittels LaTeX ein.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+percent (englisch per cent)
+\% ::%::
+
+Das Prozentzeichen % wird bei LaTeX gemeinhin
+als Auskommutierungszeichen benutzt.
+Um im Text eine Ausgabe dieses Zeichens zu erreichen
+muss es als Zeichenfolge \% in den Text eingefügt werden.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\LaTeX ::LaTeX::
+
+Fügt LaTeX-Logo ein.
+
+\LaTeX2e ::LaTeX2e::
+
+Fügt LaTeX2e-Logo ein.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tabbing.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tabbing.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f8d30dfdeb --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tabbing.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +############################################################
+Tabulatorsetzung ::tabbing::
+############################################################
+\begin{tabbing}
+eins\=zwei\=drei\\ % Musterzeile (hier drei Spalten)
+ 1 \> 2 \> 3 \\ % angepaßte Zeile
+ ...\\
+\end{tabbing}
+
+Soll die Musterzeile nicht sichtbar sein -> endet mit \kill
+statt \\.
+\+ setzt dauerhaft für alle folgenden Zeilen alle Spalten
+ein TAB nach rechts versetzt.
+\= erstellt einen neuen TAB.
+\> verschiebt zum nächsten TAB.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tabelle.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tabelle.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9dd49d92b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tabelle.txt @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +############################################################
+Tabellen ::array::tabular::
+############################################################
+
+Übergabeparameter pos :
+ t top
+ b bottom
+Spaltenformat besteht zusammengesetzt aus
+ l left (neue Spalte)
+ r right (neue Spalte)
+ c center (neue Spalte)
+ p{Breite} Spaltenbreite
+ *{n}{Spaltenformat-2} n-mal Spaltenformat-2
+ | vertikaler Strich
+ || vertikaler Doppelstrich
+ @{Text} fuegt Text ein
+############################################################
+Tabellenumgebungen
+############################################################
+
+Die Anzahl der Spalten ergibt sich ueber die Anzahl
+der l,r,c im Textstring Spaltenformat.
+Neue Zeilen werden durch Zeilenumbruch bewirkt.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{array}[pos]{Spaltenformat}
+ Spalte1 & Spalte2 & ... \\
+ ...
+\end{array}
+
+Nur in mathematischen Modi ..
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{tabular}[pos]{Spaltenformat}
+\end{tabular}
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\begin{tabular*}{Tabellenbreite}[pos]{Spaltenformat}
+\end{tabular*}
+############################################################
+Nützliche zum Teil unabhängige Befehle
+############################################################
+\hline ::hline::
+
+Horizontale Linie,
+direkt nach \\ in Tabellen bewirkt eine Unterteilung
+in ganze Zeilen. (unabh.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\vline ::vline::
+
+Vertikale Linie,
+innerhalb von Spalten bewirkt eine vertikale Unterteilung
+in zwei Spalten. (unabh.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\cline{n-m} ::cline::
+
+Horizontale Linie von Spalte n nach m,
+direkt nach \\ in Tabellen. (abh.)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+\multicolumn{Spaltenanzahl}{Spaltenformat}{Text}
+::multicolumn::
+Vereinigt die nächsten Spalten angegebener Spaltenzahl zu einer,
+die wiederum neu eingeteilt werden kann. (abh.)
+############################################################
+Stilparameter
+############################################################
+::tabcolsep::arraycolsep::arrayrulewidth::doublerulesep::
+\tabcolsep Spaltenzwischenraum bei tabular
+\arraycolsep Spaltenzwischenraum bei array
+\arrayrulewidth Liniendicke
+\doublerulesep Abstand von Doppellinien
+via \setlength{}{}
+::arraystretch::
+\arraystretch Zeilenabstand als Faktor (default 1)
+via \renewcommand{}{}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tcltexed_hlp.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tcltexed_hlp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08f0b9cfac --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/tcltexed_hlp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +############################################################
+#::tcltexed_hlp::
+# Tcltexed steht fuer tcl-(la)tex-ed(itor)
+#
+############################################################
+
+Im wesentlichen Besteht Tcltexed aus zwei Teilbereichen. Zum
+einen der Funktionsbereich der Editorfenster, die in unter
+"Editor" beschrieben wird, zum anderen eine ganze Menge an
+Hilfsdiensten, die allesamt über das Hauptfenster aufgerufen
+werden.
+Alle Aktionen auf einen Text beziehen sich auf das Editorfenster
+das den Fokus zuletzt besessen hat, bzw nach meiner Definition
+gerade besitzt. Nähres dazu in der Beschreibung "Editor".
+
+Im folgenden werde ich die verschiedenen Funktionen der über
+das Hauptfenster aufrufbaren Dienste aufzählen und beschreiben.
+
+Menupunkte des Hauptfensters
+1. File
+ a) New
+Hiermit kann man neue LaTeX-Texte beginnen. Es gibt dazu einen
+internen Default-Text, der bei externes Default-Textes im
+Basisverzeichnis unter default.tex
+ b) Load
+Laden einer vorhandenen Datei ...
+ c) Append
+Fügt im Text den Inhalt der Datei ab der Position des Cursers
+ein.
+ d) Save e) Save As
+Speichert den Text.
+ f) Quit
+Beendet die Arbeit mit Tcltexed. Alle Fenster werden (wenn nötig
+mit Rückfrage) geschlossen.
+
+2. Edit
+ a) Clear
+Löschung des gesamten Textes.
+ b) Zeilenumbruch
+Über dieses Untermenü kann man entweder für den gesamten Text,
+einen Absatz oder eine Zeile einen Zeilenumbruch bewirken.
+Endet eine Zeile mit einem Leerzeichen so wird die folgende Zeile
+als Fortsetzung verstanden. Wird ein Zeilenumbruch auf eine Zeile
+ausgeführt, so wird die Zeile inklusive der Fortsetzungen neu gebrochen.
+Wird im Untermenü eine Umkehr des Zeilenumbruchs gewählt, so werden
+für die betroffenen Zeilen die Fortsetzungen wieder zusammengefügt,
+und an die jeweilige Anfangszeile angehängt.
+Ist die erste Zeile um einige Leerzeichen eingerückt, so werden auch
+die zum Umbruch gehörenden Zeilen um diese Leerzeichen eingerückt.
+ c) Rechtschreibung
+Rechtschreibkorrektur des aktuellen Textes.
+ d) registriere Wort
+Wenn sich der Curser im aktuellen Text in einem als falsch
+markierten Wort befindet, dann wird dieses Wort als richtig
+geschrieben registriert.
+ e) \"a..\ss -> ä..ß
+Wandelt alle Latex-Befehle zur Darstellung von Umlauten in Umlaute um.
+ f) ä..ß -> \"a..\ss
+Wandelt alle Umlaute in die zugehörigen Latex-Befehle um.
+ g) "a.."s -> ä..ß
+Wandelt Latex-Befehle zur Darstellung von Umlauten aus dem [german]{babel}
+Packet in Umlaute um.
+ h) ä..ß -> "a.."s
+Wandelt Umlaute in die zugehörigen Latex-Befehle des [german]{babel}
+Packetes um. Dieses Format ist mit "ispell -t -d deutsch file.tex" konform.
+ i) Search
+Suchen und Ersetzen im Text.
+Mit oder ohne Beachtung der Groß/Kleinschreibung
+ j) My Own
+Ermöglicht das Eintragen von LaTeX-Sequenzen die per Buttondruck
+in den Text eingefügt werden. Diese eigenen LaTeX-Sequenzen
+werden mit "Optionen speichern" mit abgespeichert. Und bleiben
+dann für den nächsten Aufruf von Tcltexed erhalten.
+
+3. Options
+ a) AutoKlammerzu
+Ist diese Funktion aktiviert, so werden Aufklammern stehts
+mit Zuklammern ergänzt.
+ { --> {}
+ b) Packete/etc
+Hier kann man die automatische Ergaenzung von LaTeX-Befehlen
+aktivieren, bzw. deaktivieren. Dies geschieht selektiv fuer
+verschiedene LaTeX-Packete oder Umgebungen.
+Beispiel einer Ergänzung :
+\fra --> \frac{}{}
+Es ist zu beachten das je mehr LaTeX-Befehle erkannt werden sollen
+desto später oder garnicht ergänzt wird. Die Befehle werden
+einander zu ähnlich.
+ c) Sprache
+Sprachwahl fuer Texte, Buttons und Hilfen.
+Die Einstellung verändert die Sprache für den nächsten Start
+des Programmes. Sie muß folglich gespeichert werden (s.u.).
+ d) Schriftgröße
+Setzt die Schriftgröße für das Editorfenster fest.
+ e) Save Options
+Speichert alle durch User konfigurierbaren Bereiche von Tcltexed in
+eine Datei. Diese werden dann automatisch beim nächsten Start geladen.
+(Ihr Dateiname ist unter unix .tcltexed, unter Windows tcltexed.ini .
+Ich rate aber ab diese Datei von Hand zu editieren. Dateien älterer
+Tcltexedversionen werden ignoriert, bzw. überschrieben)
+
+4. Mathematik
+Liefert eine Menge von Standartbefehlen der Mathematikumgebung von
+LaTeX in Form von Buttons mit Beschriftung oder Bildern.
+Ein Druck mit der Maus fügt den entsprechenden Befehl in den Text
+an der Position des Cursers ein.
+
+5. Allgemeines
+Wie 4. , hier jedoch Sammlungen anderer Befehle.
+
+6. Help
+Habt Ehrfurcht ! Dies ist die Hilfe fuer Not leidende LaTeX Opfer.
+ a) Tcltexed
+Liefert wie ihr sicherlich schon gemerkt habt, unter anderem diesen
+Text, sowie weitere Hilfen und ähnliches zu Tcltexed selbst.
+ b) LaTeX
+Habt noch mehr Ehrfurcht !!
+Hier sind alle Tcltexed (bzw mir) zu Ohren gekommenen LaTeX-Befehle
+noch einmal alphabetisch aufgelistet. Davor Ehrfurcht ?? Nun zu vielen
+davon gibt es Kurzbeschreibungen oder Bildchen ... (ne Scheiß Arbeit)
+ + <Return> + linke Maustaste zeigen Hilfe an
+ rechte Maustaste fügt den Befehl ein
+ Bei Tastendruck A-Z a-z wird an den entsprechenden ersten Eintrag
+ gesprungen.
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/titlepage.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/titlepage.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..247ae4e4c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/titlepage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Umgebung titlepage (Syntax siehe begin oder end)
+::titlepage::
+Dient der freien Gestaltung der Titelseite.
+Wird diese Freiheit kann man sich folgender Befehle
+bedienen.
+#########################################################
+Syntax : ::title::author::and::date::thanks::maketitle::
+\title{Titel des Dokuments}
+\author{Dieser Einer\\hier \and Ein Anderer\\dort}
+\date{Datumstext} (optional)
+\thanks{Dank an bla} (optional)
+\maketitle
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/usepackage.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/usepackage.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8391dfc768 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/usepackage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Syntax : ::usepackage::
+\usepackage{PACKET}
+\usepackage[Option]{PACKET}
+
+
+Lädt zusätzliche Latex-Packete.
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+PACKET : (es handelt sich um Makrodateien mit Endung .sty)
+ babel Latex-Stile fuer verschiedenen Sprachen
+ Option : german, english ...
+ german für deutschen Stil beim Latex-Format (z.B. wird Chapter zu
+ Kapitel)
+ umlaut(e) übersetzt Zeichen außerhalb des ascii-Zeichensatzes beim
+ compilieren automatisch in das latex-Format um. (z.B. ß zu \3)
+ graficx für Einbindung von Bildern und grafischen Manipulation
+ grafics simpleres Packet als graficx mit selber Funktion
+ epsf für Einbindung von eps-Bildern (ich empfehle graficx zu nutzen)
+(American Mathmatik Society)
+ amsmath für Formelsätze
+ amssymb für Symbole
+ amsfonts für Fonts
+ amscd für Flußdiagramme
diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/verbatim.txt b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/verbatim.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8b149d3708 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/ger/verbatim.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +############################################################
+Orginaltext ::verbatim::
+############################################################
+\begin{verbatim}
+ Text
+\end{verbatim}
+
+fügt Text 1 zu 1 in den laufenden LaTeX-formatierten Text ein.
+Der erste wieder beachtete LaTeX-Befehl ist \end{verbatim}.
+
+\begin{verbatim*}
+ Text
+\end{verbatim*}
+
+Analog wie oben, aber statt Space werden sichtbare Platzhalter
+gesetzt.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/support/tcltexed/hlp/index b/support/tcltexed/hlp/index new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..21271683e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/support/tcltexed/hlp/index @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +fontshape {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} put {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} bibliography {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/Environments.txt} LaTeX2e {eng/sonder.txt ger/sonder.txt bre/sonder.txt} ref {eng/References.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/References.txt} textnormal {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} mathbb {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt bre/amsfonts.txt} noindent {eng/Paragraphs.txt ger/format.txt bre/Paragraphs.txt} line {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} newenviroment ger/counter.txt dashbox {eng/Environments.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} epsfxsize {eng/epsf.txt ger/epsf.txt bre/epsf.txt} footnotemark {eng/Footnotes.txt ger/notiz.txt bre/Footnotes.txt} mathbf {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} arabic {eng/Counters.txt bre/Counters.txt} nocite {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/Environments.txt} texttt {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} pagestyle {eng/Styles.txt ger/pagestyle.txt bre/Styles.txt} xleftarrow {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} enumerate {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt bre/Environments.txt} stopbreaks {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} fboxrule ger/latexbox.txt boldsymbol {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt bre/amsfonts.txt} addcontentsline {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt bre/Contents.txt} slshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} markboth {eng/Styles.txt bre/Styles.txt} Huge {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} oddsidemargin ger/Seitenformat.txt textup {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} textfloatsep ger/gleit.txt tabular {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt bre/Environments.txt} linethickness {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} section {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} nonumber ger/math.txt paragraph {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} part {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} displaymath ger/math.txt newline {eng/Breaking.txt bre/Breaking.txt} figure {eng/Environments.txt ger/gleit.txt bre/Environments.txt} Large {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} arraystretch ger/tabelle.txt framebox {eng/Environments.txt eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt bre/Spaces.txt} vfill {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} value {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt ger/input.txt bre/Counters.txt} scshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} newenvironment {eng/Definitions.txt bre/Definitions.txt} label {eng/References.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/References.txt} flushright {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt bre/Environments.txt} overbrace {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} ! {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} # {eng/Characters.txt bre/Characters.txt} kill {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} {$} {eng/Math.txt ger/math.txt bre/Math.txt} it ger/format.txt Biggl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} % {eng/Characters.txt ger/sonder.txt bre/Characters.txt} listoffigures {eng/Contents.txt bre/Contents.txt} hrulefill {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Spaces.txt} ' {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} equal ger/if.txt ( {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} not ger/if.txt name {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} ) {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} headheight ger/Seitenformat.txt Biggr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} amsmath {eng/amsmath.txt eng/amsthm.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt bre/amsthm.txt} + {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} whiledo ger/if.txt settodepth {eng/Lengths.txt bre/Lengths.txt} , {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} - {eng/Breaking.txt eng/Environments.txt bre/Breaking.txt bre/Environments.txt} mathfrak {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt bre/amsfonts.txt} hoffset ger/Seitenformat.txt intertext {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} epsfbox {eng/epsf.txt ger/epsf.txt bre/epsf.txt} twocolumn {eng/Layout.txt bre/Layout.txt} huge {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} multicolumn {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt bre/Environments.txt} author {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt bre/Styles.txt} include {eng/Input.txt ger/input.txt bre/Input.txt} totalheight {eng/Lengths.txt bre/Lengths.txt} footnotesep ger/notiz.txt Bigl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} end {eng/Environments.txt ger/begin.txt bre/Environments.txt} dbtextfloatsep ger/gleit.txt thanks {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt bre/Styles.txt} fussy {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} large {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} gather {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} {;} {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} pagenumbering {eng/Styles.txt ger/pagenumbering.txt bre/Styles.txt} Bigr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} < {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} arraycolsep ger/tabelle.txt = {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} underline {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} equation {eng/Environments.txt ger/math.txt bre/Environments.txt} > {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} vline {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt bre/Environments.txt} itemize {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt bre/Environments.txt} onecolumn {eng/Layout.txt bre/Layout.txt} DeclareGraphicsExtensions ger/graphicx.txt unitlength ger/picture.txt ttfamily {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} newcounter {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt bre/Counters.txt} oval {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} atop ger/math.txt indexspace ger/index.txt dbfloatsep ger/gleit.txt setcounter {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt bre/Counters.txt} list {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} theoremstyle {eng/amsthm.txt ger/amsthm.txt bre/amsthm.txt} biggl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} columnseprule ger/Seitenformat.txt dotfill {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Spaces.txt} setlength {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt ger/Seitenformat.txt bre/Lengths.txt} closing {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} input {eng/Input.txt ger/input.txt bre/Input.txt} marginparwidth ger/Seitenformat.txt readme_hlp ger/readme_hlp.txt refstepcounter {eng/Counters.txt bre/Counters.txt} nolinebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} par {eng/Paragraphs.txt bre/Paragraphs.txt} biggr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} cline {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt bre/Environments.txt} prod ger/math.txt usecounter {eng/Counters.txt bre/Counters.txt} addtolength {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt bre/Lengths.txt} address {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} ddots {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} hfill {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} pushtabs {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} eqnarray {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} frac {eng/Math.txt ger/math.txt bre/Math.txt} linebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} verse {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} ldots {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} bigl {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} mathit {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} raggedbottom {eng/Layout.txt bre/Layout.txt} theindex ger/index.txt or ger/if.txt strech ger/format.txt {[} {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} \\ {eng/Breaking.txt bre/Breaking.txt} bigr {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} voffset ger/Seitenformat.txt textbf {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} reversemarginpar {eng/Margin.txt bre/Margin.txt} \] {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} footnoterule ger/notiz.txt fontencoding {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} ^ {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} document {eng/Starting.txt ger/documentclass.txt bre/Starting.txt} verb {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} _ {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} ` {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} table {eng/Environments.txt ger/gleit.txt bre/Environments.txt} marginparsep ger/Seitenformat.txt xrightarrow {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} a {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} topskip ger/Seitenformat.txt vector {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} ps {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} normalsize {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} right ger/math.txt footskip ger/Seitenformat.txt flushbottom {eng/Layout.txt bre/Layout.txt} choose ger/math.txt marginpar {eng/Margin.txt ger/notiz.txt bre/Margin.txt} depth {eng/Lengths.txt bre/Lengths.txt} sc ger/format.txt thispagestyle {eng/Styles.txt ger/pagestyle.txt bre/Styles.txt} rm ger/format.txt tabbing {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabbing.txt bre/Environments.txt} substack {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} hline {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt bre/Environments.txt} marginparpush ger/Seitenformat.txt sf ger/format.txt usepackage {eng/Document.txt ger/usepackage.txt bre/Document.txt} emph {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} enlargethispage {eng/Breaking.txt bre/Breaking.txt} coprod ger/math.txt ExecuteOptions {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} sl ger/format.txt swapnumbers {eng/amsthm.txt ger/amsthm.txt bre/amsthm.txt} sideset {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} Vmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} footnotetext {eng/Footnotes.txt ger/notiz.txt bre/Footnotes.txt} usefont {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} hspace {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Spaces.txt} LaTeX {eng/sonder.txt ger/sonder.txt bre/sonder.txt} epsf {eng/epsf.txt ger/epsf.txt bre/epsf.txt} gpl_hlp {eng/gpl_hlp.txt ger/gpl_hlp.txt bre/gpl_hlp.txt} chapter {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} mathversion {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} savebox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Spaces.txt} scalebox {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} topfraction ger/gleit.txt fnsymbol {eng/Counters.txt bre/Counters.txt} theorem {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} telephone {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} matrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} textheight ger/Seitenformat.txt graphicspath {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} tt ger/format.txt subparagraph {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} discription {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt bre/Environments.txt} floatpagefraction ger/gleit.txt indent ger/format.txt circle {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} left ger/math.txt int ger/math.txt addtocounter {eng/Counters.txt bre/Counters.txt} caption ger/gleit.txt usebox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Spaces.txt} raggedright {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} today {eng/sonder.txt ger/sonder.txt bre/sonder.txt} math ger/math.txt doublerulesep ger/tabelle.txt sinature {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} amssymb {eng/amssymb.txt ger/amssymb.txt bre/amssymb.txt} split {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} listoftables {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt bre/Contents.txt} printindex ger/index.txt upshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} editort_hlp {eng/editort_hlp.txt bre/editort_hlp.txt} {\[} ger/math.txt array {eng/Environments.txt ger/tabelle.txt bre/Environments.txt} rotatebox {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} tcltexed_hlp {eng/tcltexed_hlp.txt ger/tcltexed_hlp.txt bre/tcltexed_hlp.txt} settoheight {eng/Lengths.txt bre/Lengths.txt} stackrel ger/math.txt {\]} ger/math.txt DeclareGraphicsRule {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} quad ger/format.txt LARGE {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} sffamily {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} hypentation {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} vmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} copyright_hlp {eng/copyright_hlp.txt ger/copyright_hlp.txt bre/copyright_hlp.txt} cite {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/Environments.txt} arrayrulewidth ger/tabelle.txt fboxsep ger/latexbox.txt dbfloatpagefraction ger/gleit.txt CD {eng/amscd.txt ger/amscd.txt bre/amscd.txt} vdots {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} subequation {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} small {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} mathrm {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} newcommand {eng/Definitions.txt ger/counter.txt bre/Definitions.txt} oint ger/math.txt boxed {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} subsubitem ger/index.txt mathsf {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} bfseries {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} listofffigures ger/index.txt clearpage {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} tabcolsep ger/tabelle.txt medskip {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} thebibliography {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/Environments.txt} ifthenelse ger/if.txt centering {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt bre/Environments.txt} amscd {eng/amscd.txt ger/amscd.txt bre/amscd.txt} topmargin ger/Seitenformat.txt fontsize {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} textit {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} editor_hlp {eng/editor_hlp.txt ger/editor_hlp.txt bre/editor_hlp.txt} minipage {eng/Environments.txt ger/latexbox.txt bre/Environments.txt} qquad ger/format.txt cdots {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} columnsep ger/Seitenformat.txt item {eng/Environments.txt ger/index.txt bre/Environments.txt} opening {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} fontfamily {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} typein {eng/Terminal.txt ger/input.txt bre/Terminal.txt} sqrt {eng/Math.txt ger/math.txt bre/Math.txt} frame {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} intextsep ger/gleit.txt textwidth ger/Seitenformat.txt documentclass {eng/Document.txt ger/documentclass.txt bre/Document.txt} newpage {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} settowidth {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt bre/Lengths.txt} pmod ger/math.txt smallskip {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} rmfamily {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} headsep ger/Seitenformat.txt mathtt {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} vspace {eng/Spaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Spaces.txt} addtocontents {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt bre/Contents.txt} underbrace {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} tableofcontents {eng/Contents.txt ger/index.txt bre/Contents.txt} alph {eng/Counters.txt bre/Counters.txt} textmd {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} symbol {eng/Characters.txt bre/Characters.txt} titlepage {eng/Environments.txt ger/titlepage.txt bre/Environments.txt} fontseries {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} newsavebox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Spaces.txt} makeidx ger/index.txt addvspace {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} picture {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} bibliographystyle {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} mbox {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} newtheorem {eng/amsthm.txt eng/Definitions.txt ger/amsthm.txt bre/Definitions.txt bre/amsthm.txt} footnote {eng/Footnotes.txt ger/notiz.txt bre/Footnotes.txt} selectfont {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} cleardoublepage {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} bmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} sloppy {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} renewenviroment ger/counter.txt maketitle {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt bre/Styles.txt} appendix {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} location {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} verbatim {eng/Environments.txt ger/verbatim.txt bre/Environments.txt} samepage ger/format.txt stepcounter {eng/Counters.txt ger/counter.txt ger/input.txt bre/Counters.txt} shortstack {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} footheight ger/Seitenformat.txt subitem ger/index.txt bigskip {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} center {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt bre/Environments.txt} typeout {eng/Terminal.txt ger/input.txt bre/Terminal.txt} bottomfraction ger/gleit.txt mathnormal {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} align {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} newlength {eng/Lengths.txt ger/counter.txt bre/Lengths.txt} raisebox {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} renewenvironment {eng/Definitions.txt bre/Definitions.txt} quote {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt bre/Environments.txt} startbreaks {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} grafics ger/graphics.txt fbox {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} bf ger/format.txt documentstyle ger/documentclass.txt rule {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt bre/Spaces.txt} letter {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} bezier ger/picture.txt amsthm ger/amsthm.txt title {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt bre/Styles.txt} graficx ger/graphicx.txt sbox {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} makeindex ger/index.txt floatsep ger/gleit.txt includeonly {eng/Input.txt ger/input.txt bre/Input.txt} cc {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} cases {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} markright {eng/Styles.txt bre/Styles.txt} height {eng/Lengths.txt bre/Lengths.txt} DeclareGraphicsExtentions ger/graphics.txt pageref {eng/References.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/References.txt} tiny {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} bibitem {eng/Environments.txt ger/bezug.txt bre/Environments.txt} dicretionary ger/format.txt raggedleft {eng/Environments.txt bre/Environments.txt} thicklines:thinlines ger/picture.txt fill ger/format.txt subsection {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} normalfont {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} evensidemargin ger/Seitenformat.txt footnotesize {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} subsubsection {eng/Sectioning.txt ger/index.txt bre/Sectioning.txt} mathcal {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} textfraction ger/gleit.txt editot_hlp ger/editort_hlp.txt multiput {eng/Environments.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt} sum ger/math.txt itshape {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} date {eng/Styles.txt ger/titlepage.txt bre/Styles.txt} lrbox {eng/Spaces.txt bre/Spaces.txt} nopagebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} makebox {eng/Environments.txt eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt ger/picture.txt bre/Environments.txt bre/Spaces.txt} scriptsize {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} makelabels {eng/Letters.txt bre/Letters.txt} multline {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} and {ger/if.txt ger/titlepage.txt} textsc {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} amsfonts {eng/amsfonts.txt ger/amsfonts.txt bre/amsfonts.txt} mdseries {eng/Typefaces.txt ger/format.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} textrm {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} parbox {eng/Spaces.txt ger/latexbox.txt bre/Spaces.txt} overline {eng/Math.txt bre/Math.txt} quotation {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt bre/Environments.txt} text {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt ger/math.txt bre/amsmath.txt} pmatrix {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} begin {eng/Environments.txt ger/begin.txt bre/Environments.txt} flushleft {eng/Environments.txt ger/format.txt bre/Environments.txt} textsf {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} DeclareMathOperator {eng/amsmath.txt ger/amsmath.txt bre/amsmath.txt} nolimits ger/math.txt dbtopfraction ger/gleit.txt renewcommand {eng/Definitions.txt bre/Definitions.txt} width {eng/Lengths.txt bre/Lengths.txt} newfont {eng/Definitions.txt bre/Definitions.txt} em ger/format.txt pagebreak {eng/Breaking.txt ger/format.txt bre/Breaking.txt} resizebox {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} textsl {eng/Typefaces.txt bre/Typefaces.txt} includegraphics {ger/graphics.txt ger/graphicx.txt} |